this owner’s manual should be considered a permanent · pdf filethis owner’s...

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when itis sold.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing.Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any timewithout notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Although this manual is applicable to both right-hand and left-hand drive models, the illustrations contained in thismanual mainly refer to the left-hand drive models.The illustrations of vehicles with diesel engine are noted by Diesel model, and these illustrations mainly refer to theright-hand drive models.

This owner’s manual covers all versions. Therefore, you may find descriptions of equipment and features that are noton your particular vehicle.

09/01/28 17:31:49 32SMG631_001

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual orthe separate service information booklet helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needsmaintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained inservicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicatedto your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions andconcerns.

Best wishes and happy motoring.

Symbols on labels attached to your vehicle are to remind you toread this owner’s manual for proper and safe operation of your vehicle.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

(On German type)Mounting the front licence plate:Mount the front licence plate tothe provided holder taking carethat the upper edge of the licenceplate does not project above theupper surface of the bumper.

Mounting the rear licence plate:Mount the rear licence plate to theback of the vehicle so that itslower edge is flush with the lowerend of the surface provided formounting.

Several other booklets explain the warranties that protect your new vehicle.Read the Service Book/warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand thecoverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities.

Congratulations! Your selection was a wise investment. It will give you yearsof driving pleasure.

1.

2.

Introduction

i

09/01/28 17:31:58 32SMG631_002

Your vehicle is equipped with several devices commonly referred to as Event Data Recorders. They record varioustypes of real time vehicle data such as SRS airbag deployment and SRS system components failure.This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with thepermission of the vehicle owner.However this data may be accessed by Honda, its authorised dealers and authorised repairers, employees,representatives and contractors only for the purpose of the technical diagnosis, research and development of thevehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance anddriving conditions. The data can be used to help technicians diagnose, repair and maintain the vehicle. This data maynot be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.However this data may be accessed by Honda, its authorised dealers and authorised repairers, employees,representatives and contractors only for the purpose of the technical diagnosis, research and development of thevehicle.

Introduction

Event Data Recorders

Service Diagnostic Recorders

ii

09/01/28 17:32:02 32SMG631_003

－－

－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

iii

09/01/28 17:32:11 32SMG631_004

09/01/28 17:32:13 32SMG631_005

Turn to the beginning of each section for a complete list of subjects.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator,message and symbol on the multi-information display, gauge, andhow to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park;plus what you need to know ifyou’re planning to tow a trailer.

The maintenance schedule showsyou when you need to take yourvehicle to the dealer. There is alsoa list of things to check andinstructions on how to check them.

Tips on cleaning and protectingyour vehicle.

This section covers severalproblems motorists sometimesexperience, and details how tohandle them.

ID numbers, dimensions,capacities, and technicalinformation.

Important information about theproper use and care of yourvehicle’s seat belts, an overview ofthe supplemental restraint system,and valuable information on howto protect children with childrestraints.

How to operate the heating andventilation system/climate controlsystem, the audio system, andother convenience features.

What fuel to use, how to break-inyour new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

Contents

..........Your Vehicle at a Glance . 2

....Driver and Passenger Safety . 7

.....Instruments and Controls . 69

............................Features . 195

...................Before Driving . 369

..............................Driving . 387

......................Maintenance . 441

................Appearance Care . 519

Taking Care of the.......................Unexpected . 527

.........Technical Information . 583

................................Index . 597

1

09/01/28 17:32:26 32SMG631_006

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equipped:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

2

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

(P.155)

(P.175)

Left-hand drive type

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

BONNET RELEASEHANDLE

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY

Vehicle without navigation system is shown.

SUNSHADE SWITCHCLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

INSIDE MIRROR(P.91) (P.197, 203) (P.177)

(P.179)DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK (P.316)

i-SHIFT

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

MANUALTRANSMISSION

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

(P.245, 254, 293, 302)USB ADAPTER CABLE SOCKET

MIRROR CONTROLS(P.180)

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

(P.12, 28)

(P.187)

CLOCK(P.317)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON(P.149)

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG(P.12, 28)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P.220)

(P.373)

(P.371)

(P.395)

(P.400)(P.406)

09/01/28 17:32:34 32SMG631_007

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equippedOnly on vehicles equipped with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.1 :

3 :2 :


3


ENGINE START BUTTON


WINDSCREEN WIPERS/WASHERS

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

HORN

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTONREMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

(P.315)

HANDS-FREE TELEPHONESYSTEM BUTTONS

VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

(P.190)

(P.322)

(P.149)

(P.148)

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS(P.92)

HEADLIGHT WASHERBUTTON (P.141)

REAR WINDOWDEMISTER/HEATEDMIRROR

(P.140)

VSA OFF SWITCHPARKING SENSORSYSTEM BUTTON(P.325)

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS

(P.149/180)

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

(P.92)

(P.332)

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS(P.151)

(P.423)

(P.390, 392, 393)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FRONT FOG LIGHTS /REARFOG LIGHT (P.144, 145, 146, 147)

1

3

3

2

3

3

3

3

3

09/01/28 17:32:42 32SMG631_008

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

If equipped:


4




MIRROR CONTROLS

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

Right-hand drive type


(P.12, 28)

i-SHIFT

SUNSHADE SWITCH

HAZARDWARNINGBUTTON


PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG(P.12, 28)

CLOCK

AUDIO SYSTEM


INSIDE MIRROR

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

MANUALTRANSMISSION

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKACCESSORY POWER SOCKET USB ADAPTER CABLE SOCKET

(P.317)

(P.149)

(P.220)

(P.316)

(P.187)

(P.197, 203) (P.177) (P.179)(P.91)

(P.180)

(P.155)

(P.175)

(P.245, 254, 293, 302)

(P.395)

(P.400)

(P.406)

(P.371)

(P.373)

09/01/28 17:32:50 32SMG631_009

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equippedOnly on vehicles equipped with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.1 :

2 :3 :


5


HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

WINDSCREENWIPERS/WASHERS

ENGINE STARTBUTTON

mph to km/hCHANGE BUTTON


CIGARETTELIGHTER

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/HEATED MIRROR

HORN



VSA OFF SWITCH

(P.149/180)


(P.148)

(P.149)

(P.92)

(P.190)

(P.92)

(P.322)


(P.150)

(P.140)

(P.325)

(P.88)(P.144, 145, 146, 147)

(P.315)REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

HEADLIGHTADJUSTER


(P.332)

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS(P.151)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/REAR FOG LIGHT/FRONT FOG LIGHTS

(P.423)

(P.390, 392, 393)

PARKING SENSORSYSTEM BUTTON1

3

2

3

3

3

3

3

09/01/28 17:32:59 32SMG631_010

6

09/01/28 17:33:01 32SMG631_011

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.........................................Airbags . 12

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 14......................1. Close the Doors . 14

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 15............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 16

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 165. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 176. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 20...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 22

..Seat Belt System Components . 22

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 23Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 24...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 25

Additional Information About...........................Your Airbags . 27

......Airbag System Components . 27How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 28...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29

How Your Side Curtain..........................Airbags Work . 30

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30.............................Airbag Service . 32

...Additional Safety Precautions . 32Protecting Children General

................................Guidelines . 34All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 34All Children Should Sit in a

.................................Back Seat . 35The Passenger’s Front Airbag

................Poses Serious Risks . 35The Side Airbag Poses Serious

.........................................Risks . 38

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 39

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 39

...Additional Safety Precautions . 39Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 41.......................Protecting Infants . 41

.........Protecting Small Children . 43Selecting a Child Restraint

..........................................System . 44Installing a Child Restraint

......................................System . 46Child Restraint System for EU

.................................Countries . 47....With the Lower Anchorages . 49

.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 53..............................With a Tether . 60

...........Protecting Larger Children . 61...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 62

..................Using a Booster Seat . 63When Can a Larger Child Sit in

.........................................Front . 64...Additional Safety Precautions . 65

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 66...................................Safety Labels . 67

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 7

09/01/28 17:33:05 32SMG631_012

－You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child restraint system. Largerchildren should use a booster seatand a lap/shoulder belt until theycan use the belt properly without a

booster seat (see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tyre blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tyrepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page , and forEU countries, see the Service Book/separate service information bookletthat came with your vehicle).

17

34 65

443

Important Safety Precautions


Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

8

09/01/28 17:33:15 32SMG631_013

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting inthe correct position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features


always wearyour seat belts

9

(3) (4)

(6)

(2)(8)(6)(7)

(2)

(5)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(1)

(9)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners

09/01/28 17:33:22 32SMG631_014

－－－－

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument panelto remind you and your passengersto fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child restraint systems.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In most European Countries there isa law covering the use of seat belts.Please take time to familiarizeyourself with the legal requirementsof the countries in which you willdrive.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:

frontal impactsside impactsrear impactsrollovers

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.



Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

10

Not wearing a seat beltproperly increases thechance of serious injury ordeath in a crash, even thoughyour vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

09/01/28 17:33:33 32SMG631_015

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Seat belts are designed to bear uponthe bony structure of the body, andshould be worn low across the frontof the pelvis or the pelvis, chest andshoulders, as applicable; wearing thelap section of the belt across theabdominal area must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted asfirmly as possible, consistent withcomfort, to provide the protection forwhich they have been designed. Aslack belt will greatly reduce theprotection afforded to the wearer.

Belts should not be worn with strapstwisted.

Each belt assembly must only be usedby one occupant; it is dangerous toput a belt around a child being carriedon the occupant’s lap.



What You Should Do:

11

WARNING:

09/01/28 17:33:40 32SMG631_016

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).28

29

30



Airbags

12

09/01/28 17:33:47 32SMG631_017

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.



Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

13

09/01/28 17:33:53 32SMG631_018

－

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and thetailgate are closed.

Your vehicle has a door and tailgatemonitor on the multi-informationdisplay to indicate when a specificdoor or the tailgate is not tightlyclosed.

The above illustration shows that alldoors and the tailgate are open.

See page for how the monitordisplay works.

34 65

101

Protecting Adults and Teens


Close the DoorsIntroduction 1.

14

09/01/28 17:34:01 32SMG631_019

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

In addition to adjusting the seat, youcan adjust the steering wheel up anddown, and in and out (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked into position. See page

for how to adjust the front seats.

151

165



Adjust the Front Seats2.

15

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back fromthe front airbags as possible.

09/01/28 17:34:08 32SMG631_020

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecentre of the steering wheel.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe centre of the back of your headrests against the centre of therestraint.Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.165

Adjust the Seat-Backs Adjust the Head Restraints3. 4.


Driver and Passenger Safety16

Reclining the seat-back toofar can result in serious injuryor death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

09/01/28 17:34:17 32SMG631_021

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries. Insert the latch plate into the buckle,

then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.

When a passenger is seated in therear seating position, make sure therear head restraint is adjusted to itshighest position.

166

CONTINUED



Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

17

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positionedproperly before driving.

09/01/28 17:34:24 32SMG631_022

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the centre ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).



18

Improperly positioning theseat belts can cause seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

RELEASEBUTTON

09/01/28 17:34:31 32SMG631_023

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is safely parked and theengine is off.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

In a front passenger leans sidewaysand his head is in the deploymentpath of the side airbag, an inflatingside airbag can strike the passengerwith enough force to very seriouslyinjure him.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

22



Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

19

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well backin the seat, with your feet onthe floor.

09/01/28 17:34:39 32SMG631_024

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do, they could bevery seriously injured in a crash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety Precautions



Never let passengers ride in thearea in front of a folded-up rearseat or on top of a folded-downrear seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

20

09/01/28 17:34:47 32SMG631_025

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.



Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

21

09/01/28 17:34:53 32SMG631_026

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the seat beltsin all seating positions.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before your seatbelt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

The seat belt system also monitorsthe seat belt use of all three rearseating positions according to eachseat belt buckle latch function. Themulti-information display will showyou the seat belt use on the rear seat(see page ).

The front passenger’s seat belt usemonitoring system uses the occupantdetection sensor in the frontpassenger’s seat. The system maynot work properly under theseconditions:

You place heavy items on the frontpassenger’s seat.

You place a cushion on the frontpassenger’s seat.

The front passenger is not sittingproperly.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

You will also see a symbol ‘‘ ’’(for a driver)/‘‘ ’’ (for a frontpassenger), or a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘PASSENGER FASTENSEAT BELT’’ message with asymbol on the multi-informationdisplay to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

100

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


Seat Belt System Components

22

09/01/28 17:35:03 32SMG631_027

CONTINUED

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

Have your vehicle checked by adealer if the indicator comes on orthe beeper sounds when there is nofront passenger or there are noobjects on the front seat.

17



Lap/Shoulder Belt

23

SHOULDERPORTION

LATCHPLATE

BUCKLE

UPPERSEATBELTANCHOR

LAP PORTION

09/01/28 17:35:10 32SMG631_028

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

The seat belts in all rear seatingpositions have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild restraint (see page ).

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theextra tension in the seat belt couldbe helpful.

If the front seat belt tensioners everactivate, they must be replaced asthe belts will no longer retractproperly.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

The SRS indicator willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).

If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsodeploy.

53

30

If equipped with the lockable retractor

do not deploy



Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

24

09/01/28 17:35:21 32SMG631_029

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.Pull each belt out fully, and look for

frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.525

It is essential to replacethe entire assembly after it has beenworn in a severe impact even if damageto the assembly is not obvious.

Care should be taken toavoid contamination of the webbing withpolishes, oils and chemicals, andparticularly battery acid. Cleaning maysafely be carried out using mild soap andwater. The belt should be replaced ifwebbing becomes frayed, contaminatedor damaged.

No modifications oradditions should be made by the userwhich will either prevent the seat beltadjusting devices from operating toremove slack, or prevent the seat beltassembly from being adjusted to removeslack.

CONTINUED

Seat Belt Maintenance



WARNING:

WARNING:

WARNING:

09/01/28 17:35:29 32SMG631_030

(Rear Seat)

The rear seat has three lap/shoulderbelts.

When replacing the seat belts, makecertain to use the anchorage pointsshown in the illustrations.

(Front Seat)



Anchorage Points

26

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result inserious injury or death if theseat belts do not workproperly when needed.

Check your seat beltsregularly and have anyproblem corrected as soon aspossible.

09/01/28 17:35:36 32SMG631_031

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the centre ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceilingabove the side windows. The frontand rear pillars on both sides aremarked ‘‘SIDE CURTAINAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

28

29

30

30

24

22

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags


09/01/28 17:35:45 32SMG631_032

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,while the tensioner tightens andlocks the seat belt to help keep youin place, and the airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will inflatethe driver’s and front passengers’front airbags, and activate theautomatic seat belt tensioners.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

How Your Front Airbags Work



09/01/28 17:35:53 32SMG631_033

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If a front seat passenger leanssideways and his head is in thedeployment path of the side airbag,he can be seriously injured by aninflating side airbag. An inflatingside airbag can strike the child withenough force to kill or very seriouslyinjure a child. For the information ofthe side airbags hazards, see pages

and .

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. If you ever have a moderate to

severe side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the affected side. 38 61

How Your Side Airbags Work



29

09/01/28 17:36:00 32SMG631_034

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

The SRS indicator alerts you to apotential problem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners.

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS IndicatorWorks



SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

09/01/28 17:36:10 32SMG631_035

You will also see the symbol‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

107



Ignoring the SRS indicatorcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbag systems ortensioners do not workproperly.

Have your vehicle checked bya dealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts youto a possible problem.

09/01/28 17:36:15 32SMG631_036

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags and automatic seat belttensioners to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Your airbag systems and automaticseat belt tensioners are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If anairbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Handling is allowed by trainedpersonnel only. It is prohibited toremove the airbag unit/belt-tensioner from the vehicle. In case ofmalfunction, shutdown or afterairbag inflation/belt-tensioneroperation you have to ask a qualifiedshop for repair or removal.

Airbag Service Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbag andautomatic seat belt tensionercomponents or wiring for anyreason.

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.



09/01/28 17:36:23 32SMG631_037

If water or another liquidsoaks into the seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto liquid.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.



09/01/28 17:36:27 32SMG631_038

－－

－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children age 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, infants andchildren should be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages).

(see pages ).41 61

6561

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved childrestraint system that is properlysecured to the vehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines


Children who areunrestrained or improperlyrestrained can be seriouslyinjured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in an approvedchild restraint system. Alarger child should beproperly restrained with aseat belt and use a boosterseat if necessary.

09/01/28 17:36:35 32SMG631_039

－

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating airbag when they ride in theback.

In most countries, child restraintsystems must meet thespecifications of the ECE 44regulation.

In many countries, the law requireschildren younger than 12 years ofage and less than 150 cm (60 in) inheight to be secured in an officiallyapproved and suitable child restraintsystem. In those countries, officiallyapproved and suitable child restraintsystems must therefore be used inorder to transport a child on anypassenger seat whatsoever. Pleasecheck your local legal requirements.

According to crash statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. It is recommended that allchildren age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the airbag inflates, itcan hit the back of the child restraintsystem with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure an infant.

CONTINUED

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

Infants

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks



Never put a rearward facing childrestraint system in the front seat of avehicle equipped with a passenger’sfront airbag.

35

09/01/28 17:36:43 32SMG631_040

－

As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94; If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the rearwardfacing child restraint system withgreat force. The rearward facingchild restraint system can bedislodged or struck with enoughforce to cause very serious injury tothe infant.

If thevehicle seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, an inflating frontairbag can strike the child withenough force to kill or very seriouslyinjure a small child.

Wheneverpossible, larger children should sit inthe back seat, on a booster seat ifneeded, and be properly restrainedwith a seat belt (see page forimportant information aboutprotecting larger children).

In all cases observe the legalrequirements of the countries inwhich you will drive.

61Small Children

Larger Children

Placing a front facing child restraintsystem in the front seat of a vehicleequipped with a passenger’s frontairbag can be hazardous.

Children who have outgrown childrestraint systems are also at risk ofbeing injured or killed by an inflatingpassenger’s front airbag.



DO NOT place rear-facingchild seat on this seat withairbag.

DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURYcan occur.

09/01/28 17:36:50 32SMG631_041

－

As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94;To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the windscreen, onthe front passenger’s doorjamb andon the front visors. Please read andfollow the instructions on theselabels.





Extreme Hazard!

DO NOT use a rearwardfacing child restraint on aseat protected by an airbag infront of it!

09/01/28 17:36:56 32SMG631_042

－

Side airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere side impact.If any part of a child’s body is in thepath of a deploying airbag, aninflating side airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a child.

To remind you of the side airbagshazards, and that children must beproperly restrained in the back seat,your vehicle has the safety label oneach front doorjamb.



The Side Airbag Poses SeriousRisks

38

Leaning over the front doorcan result in serious injury ordeath if the side airbaginflates.

Always sit upright with theirback against the seat-back.

09/01/28 17:37:01 32SMG631_043

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision or a side impact, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


19

17

61

165

CONTINUED

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Additional Safety PrecautionsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.



09/01/28 17:37:12 32SMG631_044

－

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

‘‘Never let children kneel on seats orstand while the vehicle is in motion.The violent forces created duringemergency braking will cause thechildren to be thrown forward. Thechildren could be seriously injured orkilled.’’

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in somecountries, and can be veryhazardous.

If a childwraps a loose seat belt aroundtheir neck, they can be seriouslyor fatally injured. (See pages

and for how to activate anddeactivate the lockable retractor.)

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

5653

158

Always take the ignitionkey with you whenever you leave thevehicle alone (with other occupants).

Use the main powerwindow switch to prevent childrenfrom opening the windows. Using thisfeature will prevent children fromplaying with the windows, whichcould expose them to hazards ordistract the driver (see page ).175

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

If equipped with the lockableretractor, make sure any unusedseat belt that a child can reach isbuckled, the lockable retractor isactivated, and the belt is fullyretracted and locked.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.



WARNING:

WARNING:

09/01/28 17:37:20 32SMG631_045

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild restraint system until the childreaches the restraint system maker’sweight or height limit for therestraint system, and the child is atleast one year old.

A rearward facing child restraintsystem can be placed in any seatingposition in the back seat, but not inthe front.

For EU countries, an approvedrearward facing child restraintsystem should be placed in anyseating position in the back seat (seepage ).

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of therestraint with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

Only a rearward facing childrestraint system provides propersupport for a baby’s head, neck andback.

Two types of restraints may be used:a restraint system designedexclusively for infants, or aconvertible restraint system used inthe rearward facing, reclining mode.

For EU countries, refer to pagefor the recommended child

restraint system.

If placed facing forward, aninfant could be very seriously injuredduring a frontal collision.

4747

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Restraint System Type

Rearward Facing Child RestraintSystem Placement

Never put a rearwardfacing child restraint system in thefront seat.

Do not put a rearward facing childrestraint system in a forward-facingposition.

Protecting Infants and Small Children


09/01/28 17:37:30 32SMG631_046

As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94;When properly installed, a rearwardfacing child restraint system mayprevent the driver or a frontpassenger from moving their seat asfar back as recommended, or fromlocking their seat-back in the desiredposition.

In either situation, we stronglyrecommend that you install the childrestraint system directly behind thefront passenger seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or you may wish to geta smaller rearward facing childrestraint system.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the rearwardfacing child restraint system withgreat force. The rearward facingchild restraint system can bedislodged or struck with enoughforce to cause very serious injury tothe infant.





Placing a rearward facingchild restraint system in thefront seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbaginflates.

Always place a rearwardfacing child restraint systemin the back seat, not the front.

09/01/28 17:37:37 32SMG631_047

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the childrestraint system maker’s weight andheight limits, should be restrained ina front facing, upright child restraintsystem.

Of the different restraint systemsavailable, we recommend those thathave a five-point harness system asshown.

We also recommend that a smallchild uses the child restraint systemas long as possible, until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the restraint system.


restraint system.

We strongly recommend placing afront facing child restraint system ina back seat, not the front.

If the vehicle seatis too far forward, or the child’s headis thrown forward during a collision,an inflating airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries.

If it is necessary to put a front facingchild restraint system in the front,move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible, and be sure thechild restraint system is firmlysecured to the vehicle and the childis properly strapped in the restraintsystem.47

Protecting Small Children

Child Restraint System Type

Child Restraint System Placement

Placing a front facing child restraintsystem in the front seat of a vehicleequipped with a passenger’s airbagcan be hazardous.



Placing a front facing childrestraint system in the frontseat can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbag inflates.

If you must place a frontfacing child restraint systemin front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible,and properly restrain thechild.

09/01/28 17:37:46 32SMG631_048

In mostcountries, child restraint systemsmust meet the specifications ofthe ECE 44 regulation. Look forthe approval mark on the systemand the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box.

Whatever type of child restraint youchoose, to provide proper protection,a child restraint system should meetthree requirements:

The manufacturer of the vehicledoes not assume any responsibilityfor damage which would be causedby a defect inherent in therecommended child restraint system.

When buying a child restraintsystem, you need to choose either aconventional child restraint system,or one designed for use with thelower anchorages and tethers.

Conventional child restraint systemsmust be secured to a vehicle with aseat belt, whereas lower anchoragessystem-compatible child restraintsystems are secured by attaching therestraint to hardware built into thetwo outer seating positions in theback seat.

Since lower anchorages system-compatible child restraint systemsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation, ifyour vehicle is equipped with thelower anchorages system, werecommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting alower anchorages system-compatiblechild restraint system with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In EU countries, a child restraintsystem with a flexible anchor is notavailable.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with lower anchorages, alower anchorages system-compatiblechild restraint system can beinstalled using a seat belt.

49The child restraint system shouldmeet safety standards.

1.

Selecting a Child Restraint System


09/01/28 17:37:53 32SMG631_049

Rearward facing for infants, frontfacing for small children.

Make sure the restraint system fitsyour child. Check the manufacturer’sinstructions and labels for height andweight limits.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild restraint system, or using apreviously purchased one, werecommend that you test therestraint system in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the child restraint system willbe used.


restraint system.47

The child restraint system shouldbe of the proper type and size to fitthe child.

The child restraint system shouldfit the vehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

3.

2.

Selecting a Child Restraint System


09/01/28 17:37:59 32SMG631_050

A child restraint system securedwith a seat belt should be installed asfirmly as possible. However, it doesnot need to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Someside-to-side movement can beexpected and should not reduce thechild restraint system’s effectiveness.

If you use a lap/shoulder beltwithout a lockable retractor, be sureyou install a locking clip on the seatbelt (see page ).

Afterinstalling a child restraint system,push and pull the restraint systemforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

If the child restraint system is notsecure, try installing it in a differentseating position, or use a differentstyle of child restraint system thatcan be firmly secured.

After selecting a proper childrestraint system and a good place toinstall the restraint system, there arethree main steps in installing therestraint system:

All childrestraint systems must be securedto the vehicle with the lap part of alap/shoulder belt or with the loweranchorages system. A child whoserestraint system is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

Make sure thechild is properly strapped in thechild restraint system according tothe child restraint system maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a childrestraint system can be seriouslyinjured in a crash.

The following pages provide therecommended child restraintsystems for EU countries andguidelines on how to properly installa child restraint system. A frontfacing child restraint system is usedin all examples, but the instructionsare the same for a rearward facingchild restraint system.


restraint system.47

59

Except for European models

Make sure the child restraintsystem is firmly secured.

Properly secure the child restraintsystem to the vehicle.

Secure the child in the childrestraint system.

1.

3.2.

Installing a Child Restraint System


09/01/28 17:38:07 32SMG631_051

＋

＊

＊

＊

＊

Various types of child restraint systems are available. Not all types are suitable for your vehicle. Please refer to thetable below to select which category of child restraint system can be used on each seating position.

The particular child restraints in the above table are Honda Genuine Parts. They are available from your dealer.

A size class is specified for some child restraint systems. Make sure to check the size class as indicated on themanufacturer’s instructions, package, and labels of the child restraint.

Move the front seat to its rearmost position.Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.Suitable for ‘‘universal’’ category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.

Suitable for particular child restraint systems given in this table. These restraints may be of the ‘‘specificvehicle,’’ ‘‘restricted,’’ or ‘‘semi-universal’’ category.

Suitable for front facing ISO FIX child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this massgroup.

Suitable for particular ISO FIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in this table.

:

U:X:

IL:IUF:

L:

CONTINUED

Mass Group

group 0 Up to 10 kggroup 0 Up to 13 kg

group I 9 kg to 18 kggroup II 15 kg to 25 kggroup III 22 kg to 36 kg

Front passenger

XX

Honda LORDHonda KID or Honda KID FIXHonda KID or Honda KID FIX

CentreHonda BABY-SAFEHonda BABY-SAFE

Honda LOADHonda KID or Honda KID FIXHonda KID or Honda KID FIX

Rear passengerSeating Position

OutboardU

IL (Honda BABY-SAFE ISO FIX)or U

IUF (Size class A, B1, B) or UL (Honda KID FIX) or UL (Honda KID FIX) or U


Child Restraint System for EU Countries

For a correct installation, please refer to the Child Restraint Instruction Manual.


09/01/28 17:38:20 32SMG631_052

Your vehicle is equipped with loweranchorages at the outer seatingpositions on the rear seat. Theseanchorages are only to be used witha child restraint system designed tobe attached to the lower anchorages.Refer to page for how to install achild restraint system to the loweranchorages.

49



The use of any child restraintsystem which is not suitablefor your vehicles would notproperly secure the infant orchild who could therefore bekilled or seriously injured.

09/01/28 17:38:24 32SMG631_053

Your vehicle is equipped with loweranchorages at the outer rear seats.These anchorages are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child restraint system designed foruse with the lower anchorages.

To install a child restraint systemdesigned to be attached to the loweranchorages:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchorages.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchorages that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child restraint systemand the anchorages.

The location of each loweranchorage is indicated by a smallbutton above the anchorage point.


restraint system.

1.

2.

47

CONTINUED

Installing a Child RestraintSystem with the LowerAnchorages



LOWER ANCHORAGES

09/01/28 17:38:31 32SMG631_054

Place the child restraint system onthe vehicle seat, then attach thechild restraint system to the loweranchorages according to the childrestraint system maker’sinstructions.

Some child restraint systemsdesigned for use with loweranchorages have a rigid-typeconnector as shown above.

When using the guide-cups,always follow the child restraintsystem manufacturer’sinstructions.

Attach the guide-cups to thelower anchorages as shown inthe illustration.

You may use optional guide-cupsthat came with your child restraintsystem to install it to the loweranchorages without damaging theseat surface.

4.3. On some child restraint systems



Rigid type

GUIDE-CUPGUIDE-CUP

LOWER ANCHORAGE

09/01/28 17:38:39 32SMG631_055

CONTINUED

Other child restraints have a flexible-type connector as shown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child restraint system maker’sinstructions for adjusting ortightening the fit.

Flexible type child restraintsystem is available in somecountries. In EU countries, thistype is not available.

Attach the attaching clip to thetether anchor fitting as shown inthe illustration. Make sure thestrap is not twisted, then tightenthe strap according to the childrestraint system maker’sinstructions.

The above illustration shows howthe attaching clip should be routedin EU countries.

5.

6.



Flexible type ATTACHING CLIP

Front

ANCHOR FITTING

09/01/28 17:38:46 32SMG631_056

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is not twisted.

Push and pull the child restraintsystem forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

The design and suitability of thechild restraint systems must becarefully checked with the childrestraint system manufacturerconcerned and the seller of thosesystems. If you are not sure, consultyour dealer before purchasing thistype of child restraint system.

Attach the clip to the tether anchorfitting, then tighten the strap asinstructed by the child restraintsystem maker.

7.

167



ATTACHING CLIP

TETHER ANCHOR FITTING

09/01/28 17:38:52 32SMG631_057

CONTINUED

The procedures in the followingpages are described based on a frontfacing child restraint system.

Place the child restraint system inthe desired back seating position.Make sure the child restraint ispositioned well back in the seat-back.

If you place the child restraintsystem in either rear outer seatingposition and use the tether strap foradditional security, make sure topush down the head restraint to thelowest position and attach theattaching clip to the anchor fittingbefore securing the child restraintsystem with the lap/shoulder belt.

To properly route a lap/shoulder beltthrough a child restraint system,follow the restraint system maker’sinstructions.When not using the lower

anchorages system, all childrestraint systems must be secured tothe vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inthe back seating positions have alockable retractor that must beactivated to secure a child restraintsystem.

To check if the lap/shoulder belt isequipped with the lockable retractor,pull the lap part of the lap/shoulderbelt all the way out, let the beltretract slowly, then pull the beltagain gently. If the belt is locked, thebelt is equipped with the lockableretractor. If it is not, follow theinstruction on page .

1.

56



Installing a Child RestraintSystem with a Lap/Shoulder Belt(with a Lockable Retractor)

53

09/01/28 17:39:00 32SMG631_058

Push down the tab. Route theshoulder part of the belt into theslit at the side of the restraint,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tugon it. If the belt is locked, youwill not be able to pull it out. Ifyou can pull the belt out, it is notlocked, and you will need torepeat these steps.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops.

Route the belt through therestraint according to the restraintsystem maker’s instructions, theninsert the latch plate into thebuckle.

4.3.

5.

2.



TAB

09/01/28 17:39:08 32SMG631_059

CONTINUED

Secure the belt in the slit bypushing up the tab. Make sure thebelt is not twisted and it ispositioned properly in the slit.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child restraintsystem, or push on the back of therestraint system while pulling upon the belt.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child restraint system will notbe secure.

7.6.



55

09/01/28 17:39:13 32SMG631_060

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child restraint system,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child restraintsystem forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secureenough to stay upright duringnormal driving manoeuvres. If thechild restraint system is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

When not using the loweranchorages system, all childrestraint systems must be secured tothe vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

To properly route a lap/shoulder beltthrough a child restraint system,follow the restraint system maker’sinstructions.

The procedures in the followingpages are described based on a frontfacing child restraint system.

For EU countries, refer to pagefor installing a child restraint

system.

8.

47



Installing a Child RestraintSystem with a Lap/Shoulder Belt(without a Lockable Retractor)

56

09/01/28 17:39:21 32SMG631_061

CONTINUED

Place the child restraint system inthe desired back seating position.Make sure the child restraint ispositioned well back in the seat-back.

Route the belt through therestraint according to the restraintsystem maker’s instructions, theninsert the latch plate into thebuckle.

Push down the tab. Route theshoulder part of the belt into theslit at the side of the restraint.

Grab the shoulder part of the beltnear the buckle, and pull up toremove any slack from the lap partof the belt. Remember, if the lappart of the belt is not tight, thechild restraint system will not besecure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child restraintsystem, or push on the back of therestraint system while pulling upon the belt.

1.

2.

3. 4.



TAB

09/01/28 17:39:29 32SMG631_062

On vehicles without lockable retractorfitted to the seat where the child ispositionedWhen you secure a child restraintsystem with a lap/shoulder belt, besure you install a locking clip on theseat belt (see page ).

Push and pull the child restraintsystem forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secureenough to stay upright duringnormal driving manoeuvres.

Secure the belt in the slit bypushing up the tab. Make sure thebelt is not twisted and it ispositioned properly in the slit.

When pushing up the tab, makesure to pull up the upper shoulderpart of the lap/shoulder belt toremove any slack from the belt.

59

5. 6.




58

LOCKING CLIP

TAB

09/01/28 17:39:36 32SMG631_063

To install a locking clip, do thefollowing:

Place the child restraint in the seatwith a lap/shoulder belt. Route thelap/shoulder belt through therestraint according to the seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

Insert the latch plate into thebuckle. Pull on the shoulder partof the belt to make sure there isno slack in the lap portion.

Tightly grasp the belt near thelatch plate. Pinch both parts of thebelt together so they won’t slipthrough the latch plate. Unbucklethe seat belt.

Install the locking clip as shown.Position the clip as close aspossible to the latch plate.

If it is necessary to put a front facingchild restraint system in the front,move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible, be sure the childrestraint system is firmly secured tothe vehicle, and the child is properlystrapped in the restraint system (seepage ).

A locking clip is usually includedwith the child restraint system. Ifyou need a clip, contact the seat’smanufacturer or a store that sellschild restraints.

Always use a seat belt locking clipwhen you secure a child restraintsystem to your vehicle with a lap/shoulder belt. This helps prevent therestraint system from shiftingposition or overturning.

Insert the latch plate into thebuckle. Push and pull on the childrestraint system to verify that it isheld firmly in place. If it is not,repeat these steps until therestraint is secure.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

43

On vehicles without lockable retractorfitted to the seat where the child ispositioned



Using a Seat Belt Locking ClipExcept for European models

59

LOCKING CLIP

09/01/28 17:39:46 32SMG631_064

Children riding in vehicles should berestrained to minimize the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable. (The owners may checkwith the child restraint systemmaker to determine whether a tetheris available for a particular childrestraint system.)

A child restraint system with a tethercan be installed in the two outerpositions in the back seat, using oneof the anchor points shown in theillustration.

After properly securing the childrestraint system (see page forthe belt with the lockable retractoror see page for the belt withoutthe lockable retractor), lift thehead restraint, then route thetether strap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

1.53

56

Installing a Child RestraintSystem with a Tether



Using an Anchor Fitting

60

TETHER ANCHOR POINTS

ANCHOR FITTING

ANCHOR FITTING

ATTACHING CLIP

TETHERSTRAP

09/01/28 17:39:54 32SMG631_065

Attach the attaching clip to theanchor fitting, making sure thestrap is not twisted.

Tighten the tether strap accordingto the child restraint systemmaker’s instructions.

To attach the tether to the childrestraint system, follow the childrestraint system maker’s instructions.

When the child restraint system isused, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint system.The above illustration shows how

the tether strap should be routedin EU countries.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a front facing child restraintsystem, the child should sit in a backseat on a booster seat and wear thelap/shoulder belt.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Child restraint anchoragesare designed to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fitted childrestraints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts,harnesses or for attaching other itemsor equipment to the vehicle.


Installing a Child Restraint System, Protecting Larger Children

Protecting Larger Children

61

WARNING:

ATTACHING CLIP

ANCHOR FITTING

TETHERSTRAP

09/01/28 17:40:03 32SMG631_066

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

1.

2.



Checking Seat Belt Fit

62

Allowing a child age 12 orunder to sit in front can resultin injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbaginflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use abooster seat if needed, havethe child sit up properly andwear the seat belt properly.

Leaning over the front doorcan result in serious injury ordeath if the side airbaginflates.

Always sit upright with theirback against the seat-back.

09/01/28 17:40:09 32SMG631_067

CONTINUED

For EU countries, refer to pagefor the booster seat placement.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsapproved safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

A child who has outgrown a frontfacing child restraint system shouldride in a back seat and use a boosterseat until the lap/shoulder belt fitsthem properly without the booster.

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

47

44

3.

4.

5.



Using a Booster Seat

63

09/01/28 17:40:19 32SMG631_068

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

If your vehicle is equipped with theside airbag, it also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

It is recommended that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

A back-rest may be available for aspecific booster seat. Install theback-rest to the booster seat andadjust it to the vehicle seat accordingto the booster seat maker’sinstructions. Make sure the seat beltis properly routed through the guideat the shoulder of the back-rest andthe belt does not touch and cross thechild’s neck (see page ).

17 61

17



Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

64

GUIDE

09/01/28 17:40:29 32SMG631_069

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Remind the child not to leantoward the door.

Supervise the child. Even a maturechild sometimes needs to bereminded to fasten the seat belt orsit properly.



Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.Do not let a child wear a seat belt

across the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Additional Safety Precautions

65

09/01/28 17:40:38 32SMG631_070

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in a collision thatmay have damaged the underside.

With the tailgate open, airflow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windows,and set the heating and ventilationsystem/climate control system asshown below.

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand ventilation system/climatecontrol system as follows:

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and evenkill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

09/01/28 17:40:46 32SMG631_071

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your dealer for areplacement.

CONTINUED

Safety Labels


RADIATOR CAP DANGER LABEL BATTERY DANGER LABEL

SIDE AIRBAG

EXPANSION TANK CAP DANGER LABEL

(Petrol models)

(Diesel models)

CHILD SAFETY/SRS AIRBAG

(Left-hand drive type)

CHILD SAFETY/SRS AIRBAG

(Right-hand drive type)

CHILD SAFETY

(For some types)

09/05/29 11:01:45 32SMG631_072

The label shown below is attached toeach front doorjamb. Symbols on top of the

engine under the engine cover are toremind you to follow the servicemanual instructions. When replacingthe injectors, your authorized dealershould perform this work. Contactyour dealer.

On Diesel models

Safety Labels


Side Airbag

Safety alert symbol

Follow owner’ s manualinstructions carefully

09/01/28 17:41:03 32SMG631_073

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 70............................Instrument Panel . 72

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 76.............................................Gauges . 87

....mph to km/h Change Button . 88...............................Speedometer . 89

.................................Tachometer . 89...................Temperature Gauge . 89

..................................Fuel Gauge . 89..............................REV Indicator . 90.............................ECO Indicator . 90

.............Multi-Information Display . 91Controls Near the Steering

.........................................Wheel . 138Windscreen Wipers and

.....................................Washers . 140.......Turn Signals and Headlights . 144

..........Front and Rear Fog Lights . 146......Instrument Panel Brightness . 148

...............Hazard Warning Button . 149

...............Rear Window Demister . 149.......................Headlight Adjuster . 150

......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 151.............................Keys and Locks . 152

......................Immobilizer System . 153..............................Ignition Switch . 154

....................................Door Locks . 155....................Power Door Locks . 155

.......................Super Locking . 157............Childproof Door Locks . 158

.....................Remote Transmitter . 159..........................................Tailgate . 163

...............................................Seats . 165...........Front Seat Adjustments . 165

Driver’s Seat Height............................Adjustment . 166

........................Head Restraints . 166....................................Armrests . 169

.............Folding the Rear Seats . 170..................................Seat Heaters . 173

....................Luggage Area Cover . 174............................Power Windows . 175

......................................Sunshades . 177...........................................Mirrors . 179

...............................Parking Brake . 182.........Interior Convenience Items . 183

..................................Glove Box . 184.........................Centre Console . 185

.....................Beverage Holders . 186.........Accessory Power Socket . 187

...........................Centre Pocket . 188..................................Coat Hook . 188...................................Sun Visor . 188

............................Vanity Mirror . 189........Under-floor Storage Area . 189

......................Cigarette Lighter . 190.......................................Ashtray . 191

...............................Interior Lights . 192

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 69

09/01/28 17:41:07 32SMG631_074

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊

: If equipped

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls70


MIRROR CONTROLS



HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

CLOCK



(P.12, 28)

BONNET RELEASE HANDLE

M/T model without navigation system is shown.

SUNSHADE SWITCHCLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM

(P.12, 28)

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG

(P.91)

(P.180)

(P.155)

(P.175)

(P.149)

(P.220)

(P.317)(P.177)(P.197, 203)

i-SHIFT

MANUALTRANSMISSIONAUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

(P.245, 254, 293, 302)DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG (P.316)

AUXILIARY INPUTJACK

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

USB ADAPTER CABLESOCKET(P.187)

(P.371)

(P.373)

(P.395)

(P.400)(P.406)

09/01/28 17:41:15 32SMG631_075

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

: If equipped

Control Locations



CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

CLOCK MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY


(P.12, 28)

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG

M/T model without navigation system is shown.

AUDIO SYSTEM

SUNSHADESWITCH

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG(P.12, 28)

MIRROR CONTROLS




(P.317)

(P.149)

(P.220)

(P.175)

(P.155)

(P.180)

(P.91)(P.177)

(P.197, 203)

i-SHIFT

MANUALTRANSMISSIONAUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

AUXILIARY INPUTJACK USB ADAPTER CABLE

SOCKET

(P.316) ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET (P.187) (P.245, 254, 293, 302)

(P.395)

(P.400)(P.406)

(P.371)

(P.373)

09/01/28 17:41:23 32SMG631_076

Since the indicators vary between models, some indicators are not on your vehicle.

Instrument Panel (Petrol models)


With manual transmission

72

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

FRONT FOG LIGHTINDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

ELECTRIC POWERSTEERING (EPS)INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

REAR FOG LIGHTINDICATOR

(P.85)

(P.79)

(P.82)

(P.82)

(P.85)

(P.86)

(P.82) (P.76)

(P.86)

(P.83)

(P.83)

(P.83)

(P.80)

(P.83)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR (P.80)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR(P.78)

SHIFT DOWNINDICATOR

SHIFT UPINDICATOR

DEFLATION WARNINGSYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.76, 566)

(P.77, 563)

(P.77, 565)

(P.398)

(P.398)

(P.78, 569)

(P.84, 425)

09/01/28 17:41:31 32SMG631_077



Instrument Panel (Petrol models)With automatic transmission

73

LOW FUEL INDICATOR







HIGH BEAM INDICATOR


ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR




(P.85)

(P.79)

(P.82)

(P.86)

(P.83)

(P.83)

(P.83)

(P.80)

(P.83)(P.78)

LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.81)

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

HIGH TEMPERATUREINDICATOR (P.81)

SECURITY SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.85)

(P.82)

(P.86)

FRONT FOG LIGHTINDICATOR (P.82)

(P.76, 566)

(P.77, 565)

(P.77, 563)

(P.78, 569)PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

DEFLATION WARNING SYSTEMINDICATOR (P.84, 425)

(P.80)

(P.82)SPEED ALARM INDICATOR

(P.76)

09/01/28 17:41:40 32SMG631_078


Instrument Panel (Petrol models)


With i-SHIFT

74

LOW FUEL INDICATOR






LIGHTS ON INDICATOR


HIGH BEAM INDICATOR







ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR


i-SHIFT SYSTEM INDICATOR



(P.85)

(P.79)

(P.82)

(P.82)

(P.85)

(P.86)

(P.82) (P.76)

(P.86)

(P.83)

(P.83)

(P.83)

(P.80)

(P.83)

(P.78)



(P.76, 566)

(P.77, 563)

(P.77, 565)

(P.78, 569)

(P.84, 425)

(P.406)

(P.79, 416)

09/01/28 17:41:49 32SMG631_079


Instrument Panel (Diesel models)


(P.85)

(P.82)

(P.82)

(P.76)

SHIFT DOWNINDICATOR

SHIFT UPINDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR


LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM INDICATOR(P.79)

(P.85)



GLOW PLUGS INDICATOR


(P.77)





(P.86)

(P.82)





(P.83)

(P.83)

(P.80)

(P.83)


(P.78)ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR


LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.86)

(P.83)


(P.398)

(P.398)

(P.84, 425)

(P.78, 569)

(P.77, 565)

(P.77, 563)

(P.76, 567)

09/01/28 17:41:58 32SMG631_080

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you

turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper soundsand the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

See page on petrol models andpage on diesel models.

This indicator will also come onwhen you restart the engine afteryour vehicle has run out of fuel (seepage ).

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’(for a driver)/‘‘ ’’ (for a frontpassenger), or this symbol with a‘‘FASTEN YOUR SEAT BELT’’ or‘‘FASTEN YOUR PASSENGER’SSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display to remind youand your passengers to fasten yourseat belts.

The seat belt system also monitorsthe seat belt use of all three rearseating positions according to eachseat belt buckle latch function. Themulti-information display will showyou the seat belt use on the rear seat(see page ).

22

106

100

566567

517

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

On Diesel models only

Instrument Panel Indicators


09/01/28 17:42:09 32SMG631_081

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’or this symbol with an ‘‘OILPRESSURE LOW’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .


This indicator comes on for a fewseconds (several seconds in coldweather or at high altitudes) whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. When the engine iscold, wait for the indicator to go offbefore starting the engine.

It is hard to start the engine.

This indicator goes out faster thannormal when the outsidetemperature is very low.

If you experience any of thefollowing symptoms, there may be aproblem with the water temperaturesensor of the fuel system. Have yourvehicle inspected by your dealer.

106107

563 565

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Glow Plugs Indicator(Diesel models only)

Charging SystemIndicator



09/01/28 17:42:20 32SMG631_082

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tyres.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .


You will also see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE’’message in the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

If it remains lit after you fullyrelease the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

You will also see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

1.

2.

102

106

107

569

420

Parking Brake andBrake System Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator



09/01/28 17:42:29 32SMG631_083

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will go off if youhave inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, or if it does not come on whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, there is a problemwith the i-SHIFT control system.Avoid rapid acceleration, frequentlyshifting, and driving at high speed,and have the vehicle checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

When this indicator comes on, youwill hear a beep as a reminder. Youwill also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ orthis symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator also comes on whiledriving if the clutch system isoverheating. It will go off when theclutch system temperature comesdown. If this indicator goes off whiledriving to your dealer, you cancontinue driving normally. For moreinformation of the i-SHIFT, see page

.153

108

406

Only on vehicles with i-SHIFT

i-SHIFT (AutomatedManual Transmission)System Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator



09/01/28 17:42:38 32SMG631_084

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message on the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel to seethe message (see page ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, side curtain airbags, orautomatic seat belt tensioners. Formore information, see page .

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

30

92

System MessageIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator



09/01/28 17:42:45 32SMG631_085

Do not drive the vehicle while theindicator is on or the engine may bedamaged.

This indicator shows thetemperature of the engine coolant. Itnormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and goes off after a fewseconds. In normal drivingconditions, this indicator should notblink or stay on. In severe drivingconditions, such as very hot weatheror a long period of uphill driving, thisindicator may blink. This means theengine coolant temperature is high.If the indicator begins to blink whileyou are driving, be sure to slow downto prevent overheating. If theindicator stays on, pull safely to theside of the road and turn off theengine. See page for instructionsand precautions on checking theengine’s cooling system.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with an ‘‘ENGINETEMP. HIGH’’ message on themulti-information display. This indicator shows the

temperature of the engine coolant. Ifthere is no problem, this indicatorcomes on when the engine is cold. Ifit comes on when the engine is warm(normal operating temperature),have the vehicle inspected by yourdealer as soon as possible.

559

On vehicles with automatic transmission On vehicles with automatic transmission



High TemperatureIndicator

Low TemperatureIndicator

81

09/01/28 17:42:54 32SMG631_086

If this happens, stop the vehicle in asafe place and turn off the engine.Reset the system by restarting theengine. The indicator will stay on,but should go off after driving ashort distance. If it does not go off,or comes back on again while driving,take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. With the indicatoron, the EPS may be turned off,making the vehicle harder to steer.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the rear fog light. See page

for information on operating therear fog light.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the front fog lights. See page

for information on operating thefront fog lights.

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and goes offafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, there is a problemin the electric power steering system.You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If you turn the steering wheel to thefull left or right position repeatedlywhile stopping or driving at very lowspeed, you may feel slightly hardersteering in order to prevent damageto the steering box caused byoverheating.

If your vehicle speed exceeds 120km/h, a reminder tone sounds onceand the speed alarm indicator startsto blink. The indicator will stayblinking as long as you drive yourvehicle faster than 120 km/h.

108

146

147



Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

Rear Fog Light Indicator

(For some types)

Front Fog LightIndicator

(For some types)

Speed Alarm Indicator(For some types)

82

09/01/28 17:43:05 32SMG631_087

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.


For more information, see page .

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.You will also see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. See page for moreinformation on the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

The VSA system indicator will alsocome on when there is a problem inthe hill start assist system. For moreinformation, see page .

1.

2.

3.

322

322

109

109

424

422

422

422

On vehicles with i-SHIFT

If equipped

If equipped



Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

83

09/01/28 17:43:20 32SMG631_088

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.


If it comes on while driving [over25 km/h (15 mph)], it indicatesthat one of your vehicle’s tyresmay be low on pressure.

You will also see the symbol‘‘ ’’ or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK TYRE PRESSURE’’message on the multi-informationdisplay.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check whichtyre has lost the pressure, anddetermine the cause. If it is becauseof a flat tyre, replace the flat tyrewith the compact spare (if equipped)(see page ) or use the tyre repairkit (if equipped) (see page ).Then have the flat tyre repaired assoon as possible. If two or more tyresare underinflated, call a professionaltowing service (see page ). Thisindicator may come on unexpectedlydue to the condition of your tyres orroad surfaces. For more information,see page .

If this indicator begins to flash,there is a problem with thedeflation warning system. You willalso see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or thissymbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. The indicator continues toflash for a while (approximately 1minute), then stays on. If thishappens, have your dealer checkthe system as soon as possible.For more information, see page

.

2.

1.

112

530537

578

425



Deflation WarningSystem Indicator

84

09/01/28 17:43:28 32SMG631_089

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door without the key inthe ignition switch.

You will also see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a‘‘HEADLIGHTS ON’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

This indicator also comes on whenthe light switch is in AUTO and thelights turn on automatically.

You will see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display if there is aproblem with the automaticheadlight control system.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignalling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle will flash.

Your vehicle has the one-push turnsignal feature to signal a lane changeeasily (see page ).

103

145

487

144

For some types

On vehicles with automatic lighting onfeature

High Beam Indicator

Lights On Indicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators



09/01/28 17:43:38 32SMG631_090

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

This indicator is located in the fuelgauge. It comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

You will also see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a‘‘FUEL LOW’’ (petrol models) or‘‘DIESEL FUEL LOW’’ (dieselmodels) message on the multi-information display.

Refer toon page if your vehicle runs outof fuel.

When the indicator comes on, thereare about 7.5 of fuel remaining inthe tank before the needle reaches 0.There is a small reserve of fuelremaining in the tank when theneedle reaches 0.

319

517

On diesel models

Security System Indicator(For some types)

Low Fuel Indicator

Priming the Fuel System



LOW FUEL INDICATOR


On vehicle withmanualtransmission ori-SHIFT

On vehicle withautomatictransmission

09/01/28 17:43:48 32SMG631_091

Gauges


TACHOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

SPEEDOMETER

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

REV INDICATOR ECO INDICATOR

Petrol model with manual transmission is shown.

09/01/28 17:43:52 32SMG631_092

→ →

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, your lastselection is displayed.

Press and hold the mph to km/hchange button until you hear a beep.The speedometer and theinformation on the multi-informationdisplay (trip meter, odometer,current fuel mileage, estimateddistance, average speed, and averagefuel economy readings) switchbetween kilometers per hour andmiles per hour.

You will see the mph to km/hchange indicator on the multi-information display.

The mph is set as the default settingwhen the vehicle leaves the factory.Even if you change this setting to thekm/h display, the system returns tothe default setting if your vehicle’sbattery is disconnected or goes dead.

On the right-hand drive models only

mph to km/h Change Button

Gauges


km/h mph mph km/h

09/01/28 17:43:59 32SMG631_093

The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on or the glow plugs indicatorwill blink when you restart theengine after your vehicle has run outof fuel.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire,damaging the catalytic converter.

On the right-hand drive models, youcan switch the display betweenkm/h and mph.

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles per hour(mph) depending on the type.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, such asvery hot weather or a long period ofuphill driving, the pointer may riseinto the upper half of the gauge. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pull insafely to the side of the road. Turn topage on petrol models and page

on diesel models for instructionsand precautions on checking theengine cooling system.

You can set the vehicle speed alarm.For more information, see page .

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

116557

561

On some types On petrol models only

On diesel models only

Except automatic transmissionFuel GaugeTemperature GaugeSpeedometer

Tachometer

Gauges


09/01/28 17:44:09 32SMG631_094

This indicator shows you thetachometer reading approaching tothe red zone while driving. Whenyou see all six indicators come on, itindicates that the tachometerreading reaches the red zone.

To protect engine damage, neverdrive with the tachometer reading inthe red zone.

This indicator shows the current fuelmileage and the fuel economy whiledriving. When you see all sixindicators come on, it indicates thatthe engine is operating in its mosteconomical range. No indicatorcomes on when your vehicle is usingextra fuel.

When you select the automaticdriving mode, the REV indicatorturns off. For more information, seepage .406

On vehicles with i-SHIFTREV Indicator ECO Indicator

Gauges


REV INDICATOR ECO INDICATOR

09/01/28 17:44:17 32SMG631_095

You can select the displayedlanguage and also customize somevehicle control settings to your likingwith the multi-information displayand the two buttons on the steeringwheel (see page ).

The multi-information display in thetachometer on the instrument paneldisplays various information andsymbols/messages when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position.Some of the indicators/messageshelp you operate your vehicle moreeffectively. Others keep you awareof the vehicle’s condition forcontinued trouble-free driving.

There are two types of symbols/messages: normal display symbols/messages and system warningsymbols/messages.

The multi-information displayconsists of an upper segment and alower segment. Each segment candisplay two lines of messages.

In normal display mode, the uppersegment displays the trip computer,and the lower segment displays theodometer, trip meter, and outsidetemperature.

92

CONTINUED

Normal Display Symbols/Messages

Multi-Information Display


UPPER SEGMENT UPPER SEGMENT

‘‘mph’’ selected‘‘km/h’’ selected LOWER SEGMENTLOWER SEGMENT

09/01/28 17:44:25 32SMG631_096

If there is any system warning,system warning symbol(s) will beshown on the multi-informationdisplay following the current fuelmileage display. The system warningsymbol/message that has thehighest priority will be displayed firstwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

In normal display mode, the upperdisplay shows the trip computer andrear seat belt use when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position (see page ). Each timeyou press the INFO button, the tripcomputer changes from the currentfuel mileage to the estimateddistance, to the elapsed time, to theaverage speed, to the average fuelmileage, to the rear seat belt use and

then to no display as shown on thenext page.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, what you lastselected is shown in the multi-information display.

93



SEL/RESETBUTTON

INFOBUTTON

SEL/RESETBUTTON

INFO BUTTON

On vehicles with cruise control On vehicles without cruise control

09/01/28 17:44:31 32SMG631_097

CONTINUED




Right-hand drive typemph is selected.

: Press the INFO button.


09/01/28 17:44:38 32SMG631_098

Indicators in the trip computer show:

The lower segment always showsthe odometer, trip meter and theoutside temperature in the normaldisplay mode.

The average fuel economy isupdated once every 10 seconds.When you reset a trip meter, theaverage fuel economy for that tripmeter also resets. To reset thevalues in the trip computer, pressand hold the SEL/RESET buttonuntil the number resets to ‘‘0.0.’’

: Your vehicle’s average fueleconomy since you last reset the tripcomputer B.

: Your vehicle’s average fueleconomy since you last reset the tripcomputer A.

: The average speed you aretravelling is displayed in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles per hour(mph) depending on the displaymode you selected.

: The time travelled sinceyou last turned the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

This distance is estimated from thefuel economy you have achievedover the last few kilometers (miles),so it will vary with changes in speed,traffic condition, etc.

: The estimated distance youcan travel on the fuel remaining inthe tank.

The display may show a instant fueleconomy reading higher than innormal driving while the particulatematter (PM) is burnt and removedfrom the diesel particulate filter(DPF). For more information, seepage .

: Your vehicle’s current fueleconomy is shown in mpg.

: Your vehicle’s current fuelmileage in kilometers per hour andL/100 km.

595

On diesel models with DPF



TRIP METER

ODOMETER

OUTSIDE TEMPERATUREINDICATOR

09/01/28 17:44:51 32SMG631_099

±The odometer shows the totalnumber of kilometers or miles yourvehicle has been driven.

This meter shows the number ofkilometers or miles driven since youlast reset it.

There are two trip meters: trip A andtrip B. To switch the display betweenthem, press the SEL/RESET buttonrepeatedly. When you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, your last selection isdisplayed.

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 30 km/h (19 mph).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(0°C) could mean that ice is formingon the road surface. You will also seea caution symbol on the multi-information display (see page ).

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit by up to 3°C warmer or cooler(see page ).

‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ will bedisplayed when the average fuelmileage is selected in the uppersegment, depending on which tripmeter (trip A or trip B) is displayedin the lower segment.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Celsius.

125

104

Odometer

Trip Meter

Outside Temperature Indicator



NOTE:

09/01/28 17:45:03 32SMG631_100

These symbols/messages alsotrigger the appropriate indicator(s)on the instrument panel and causethe system message indicator tocome on. The system messageindicator does not go off until theproblem(s) are corrected.

The following pages describe eachsystem warning symbol/messagethat can be displayed. Here is a list ofall messages:

If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example, the engine oillevel is low or a door is not fullyclosed, the multi-information displaywill show you the problem. It doesthis by interrupting the currentdisplay with one or more symbols/messages. Most of the symbols/messages are displayed for about 5seconds, and then the currentdisplay returns. Some symbols/messages stay on until the problemis corrected.

When your vehicle is new, the multi-information display shows thesystem warning symbols without themessages. This is the default settingwhen the vehicle leaves the factory.You can customize this setting to seethe system warning symbols withmessages (see page ). Somesymbols such as the low outsidetemperature, rear seat belt reminderindicator, etc., do not come with amessage.

In this section, the system symbolwith message is used in almost allexamples, but the symbol(s) are thesame for the default setting.

123

System Warning Symbols




09/01/28 17:45:09 32SMG631_101

CONTINUED

See pages82 and 108.



See pages22 and 99.

See pages22 and 99.

See pages106, 566 and

567.









See page400.




A/T model

i-SHIFT model



09/01/28 17:45:22 32SMG631_102


See page101.









See page326.

See page329.






Petrolmodels

Dieselmodels



09/01/28 17:45:35 32SMG631_103

Fasten Seat Belt Fasten Passenger Seat Belt

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘FASTENPASSENGER SEAT BELT’’ messageif a front seat passenger does notfasten their seat belt while driving.This symbol/message remainsdisplayed if a passenger ignores itand does not fasten the seat beltwhile the vehicle is moving.

In addition to the seat belt reminderindicator in the instrument panel,you will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘FASTENSEAT BELT’’ message if you do notfasten the seat belt while driving.This symbol/message remainsdisplayed if you ignore it and do notfasten the seat belt while the vehicleis moving.

For more information of the seat beltreminder indicator, see page .22



09/01/28 17:45:43 32SMG631_104

If the system cannot detect the seatbelt use, you will see three dashes.Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position to reset thesystem. If this happens repeatedly,have your vehicle checked by yourdealer.

Rear Seat Belt Use Monitor

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the uppersegment of the multi-informationdisplay shows the rear seat belt use.

This monitor goes off after about 30seconds. It will also go off when youchange the display by pressing thesystem message button on thesteering wheel.

The seat belt system detects anyseat belt use of all three rear seatseating positions according to eachseat belt buckle latch function. Thesystem shows you how many rearseat belts are being used andreminds you and your passengers tofasten their seat belts. According tothe rear seat belt use (1 through 3),you will see the indicator(s)highlighted on the right side of theupper segment.

While driving, you can also confirmthe rear seat belt use. Press andrelease the INFO button ( )repeatedly to change the display.



Seat belts in right and centrepositions are used.

09/01/28 17:45:51 32SMG631_105

Door and Tailgate Open

If the tailgate or any door(s) is notclosed tightly, this monitor displayindicates you which door or thetailgate is not closed tightly, andreminds you to close the tailgate orthe door(s) before you start driving.This display continues until youclose the door(s) and the tailgate.

Pressing the INFO button on thesteering wheel momentarily changesthe display, but it will come backafter about 5 seconds.



09/01/28 17:45:56 32SMG631_106

Release Parking Brake Ignition Key

If you start driving without releasingthe parking brake, the currentdisplay is interrupted and the multi-information display shows thissymbol, or this symbol with a‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE’’message. This symbol/messagecontinues, and a chime sounds, untilyou release the parking brake.

If you leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door, you will see thissymbol, or this symbol with/a‘‘IGNITION KEY’’ message on thedisplay and hear a reminder beeper.

Brake Fluid Low

If the brake fluid level is at or belowthe MIN mark on the side of thebrake fluid reservoir in the enginecompartment, you will see thissymbol, or this symbol with a‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message. Ifyou see this message, have the brakesystem checked by your dealer (seepage ).471



09/01/28 17:46:03 32SMG631_107

If the level of the fuel in the tankgets low, you will see this symbol, orthis symbol with a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’message on the display, and youmust refuel soon. The low fuelindicator in the instrument panel willalso come on (see page ).

If the level of the fuel in the tankgets low, you will see this symbol, orthis symbol with a ‘‘DIESEL FUELLOW’’ message on the display, andyou must refuel soon. The low fuelindicator in the instrument panel willalso come on (see page ).

Fuel Low Diesel Fuel Low Headlights On

If you turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position without turning off theheadlights or position lights, andopen the driver’s door, you will seethis symbol, or this symbol with a‘‘HEADLIGHTS ON’’ message onthe display. The lights on indicator inthe instrument panel also comes onand stays on. You will also hear areminder chime.

86 86

On petrol models On diesel models



09/01/28 17:46:11 32SMG631_108

If the outside temperature is verylow (near freezing) and there is arisk that the road surface is iced over,you will see this symbol on the multi-information display. For moreinformation on the outsidetemperature indicator, see page .

Low Outside Temperature Tyre Pressure Low

If one of your vehicle’s tyres has lowpressure, you will see this symbol orthis symbol with a ‘‘CHECK TYREPRESSURE’’ message on the multi-information display. The deflationwarning system indicator in theinstrument panel will also come on. Ifyou see this symbol/message,inspect the air pressure. For moreinformation see page .

If you set the speed alarm function inthe custom settings, you will see thisindicator and hear a beep when thevehicle speed reaches the set speed.You can set two different speeds forthe alarm. For more information toset the speed alarm, see page .

Speed Alarm(For some types)

11695

425



Alarm at vehicle speed 80 km/h is set.

09/01/28 17:46:20 32SMG631_109

The following symbols/messagesindicate various problems in yourvehicle’s systems.

Check Engine Oil Level

If this symbol or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’message comes on on the multi-information display when the engineis running, the engine oil level is low.You will also hear a beep with thissymbol/message on. You shouldcheck the oil level and add engine oil.For more information, see page .

If you ignore the oil level symbol/message and keep driving with thissymbol/message on, you canseriously damage the engine.You will also hear a beep when the

symbol or the symbol with amessage is displayed on the multi-information display the first time.

564

System Warnings



09/01/28 17:46:27 32SMG631_110

Oil Pressure Low Check System (Engine) Check System (Brake)

If the engine oil is very low or haslost pressure, you will see thissymbol or this symbol with an ‘‘OILPRESSURE LOW’’ message on themulti-information display. You willalso see the low oil pressureindicator in the instrument panelflashing or staying on. If you see thissymbol/message, you should takeimmediate action since seriousengine damage is possible. Followthe procedure on page .

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display, itmeans one of the engine’s emissionssystems may have a problem. Haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer(see page on petrol models andpage on diesel models).

If there is a problem with the brakesystem, you will see this symbol orthis symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. The parkingbrake and brake system indicator inthe instrument panel will also comeon. For more information, see page

.

563

566567

569



09/01/28 17:46:35 32SMG631_111

Check System (Charging System) Check System (Airbag System)

If there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system (ABS), you willsee this symbol or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display. Have yourvehicle checked by a dealer (seepage ).

Check System (ABS System)

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display, itmeans the battery is not beingcharged. For more information, seepage .

If there is a problem with your frontairbags, side airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, or side curtainairbags, you will see this symbol orthis symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. Take yourvehicle to a dealer as soon aspossible (see page ).30

78565



09/01/28 17:46:43 32SMG631_112

Check System (i-SHIFT) Check System (EPS)

If there is a problem with thei-SHIFT system, you will see thissymbol or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display. Thei-SHIFT system indicator on theinstrument panel will also come onand you will hear a beep. If you seethis symbol/message, avoid rapidacceleration, frequently shifting, and

driving at high speed, and have thevehicle checked by your dealer assoon as possible. For moreinformation, see page .

If there is a problem with the electricpower steering (EPS) system, youwill see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display. TheEPS system indicator in theinstrument panel will also come on. Ifyou see this symbol/message, havethe EPS system checked by yourdealer. For more information, seepage .

This symbol/message and thei-SHIFT system indicator also comeon while driving if the clutch systemis overheating. They will go off whenthe clutch system temperaturecomes down. If they go off whiledriving to your dealer, you cancontinue driving normally.

82

416

On vehicles with i-SHIFT (automatedmanual transmission)



09/01/28 17:46:51 32SMG631_113

Check System (VSA)

If there is a problem with the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, youwill see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display. TheVSA system and VSA activationindicators in the instrument panelwill also come on. If you see thissymbol/message, have the VSAsystem checked by your dealer. Formore information, see page .

Check System (Engine Oil LevelSensor)

Check System (PGM-FI)

If there is a problem with the engineoil level sensor system, you will seethis symbol or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display. If youignore this symbol/message andcontinue driving, the system will beseriously damaged. For moreinformation, see page .

If there is a problem with the enginecontrol system, you will see thissymbol or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display. If youignore this symbol/message andcontinue driving, the engine controlsystem will be seriously damaged.For more information, see page .

422565

568



09/01/28 17:46:58 32SMG631_114

DPF (Regeneration Required)

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘DPF REGENERATIONREQUIRED’’ message on the multi-information display while the engineis running, it means the dieselparticulate filter (DPF) should beregenerated to remove theaccumulated particulate matter (PM).For more information on the DPFsystem, see page .

DPF (Check System)

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information displaywhile the engine is running, it meansthe diesel particulate filter (DPF) isclogged with accumulatedparticulate matter (PM) and itshould be checked, then repaired orreplaced. Take your vehicle to aHonda dealer as soon as possible.

While in this condition, the enginepower gets reduced.

If you ignore this symbol/messageand continue driving, the DPF andyour vehicle’s emission controlsystems will be seriously damaged.For more information on the DPFsystem, see page .595

595

Diesel models with DPF (DieselParticulate Filter)

Diesel models with DPF (DieselParticulate Filter)



09/01/28 17:47:07 32SMG631_115

Water In Fuel Filter Check System (AutomaticHeadlights On)

If this symbol or this symbol with a‘‘WATER IN FUEL FILTER’’message shows on the multi-information display, water hasaccumulated in the fuel system,which may cause damage to the fuelinjection system. Contact your dealeras soon as possible to have the waterdrained off.

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display, itmeans there is a problem with theautomatic headlights on controlsystem. If you see this symbol/message, have the vehicle checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

Diesel models onlyOn vehicles with automatic lightingfeature.



09/01/28 17:47:14 32SMG631_116

Deflation Warning System (CheckSystem)

If there is a problem with thedeflation warning system, you willsee this symbol or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display. Thedeflation warning system indicator inthe instrument panel also continuesto flash for a while (approximately 1minute), then stays on. If you seethis symbol/message, the deflationwarning system is not monitoring

tyre pressure. Have the deflationwarning system checked by yourdealer as soon as possible (see page

).426



09/01/28 17:47:19 32SMG631_117

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

±

＊＊＊ CONTINUED

You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to suit your needs. The table shows the settings you cancustomize.

Menu Item DescriptionSets the speed alarm on and changes the alarm speedsetting.

Sets the speed alarm on.

Initialises the deflation warning system.

Switches warning message to be displayed or not.Changes the outside temperature reading above or belowits current reading.Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy toreset when you refuel.Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.Changes the measurement standard in the trip computer.Switches indicator to be displayed or not.Switches indicator to be displayed or not.

SPEED ALARM 1(ON/OFF, Setting)SPEED ALARM 2(ON/OFF, Setting)SPEED ALARM 1(ON/OFF)SPEED ALARM 2(ON/OFF)

WARNING MESSAGEADJUST OUTSIDETEMP. DISPLAYTRIP A RESET WITHREFUELELAPSED TIME RESETDISPLAY UNITREV. INDICATORECO. INDICATOR

Page

117

120

427

123125

126

128129131132

Group SetupSPEED ALARM(For some types)(P.116)

(P.427)CHG SETTING(P.122)

Setting OptionON/OFFover 5 km/h (mph)with 5 km/h (mph) steps

ON/OFF

CANCELOK

ON/OFFup to 3°C0°CON/OFF

IGN OFF , TRIP A, TRIP BAUTO , KM, MILESON /OFFON /OFF

Factory default settingSetting is available while driving Only on the right-hand drive type1 : 2 : 3 :

1

1

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

INITIALISEDEFLATIONWARNING SYSTEM


Customized Settings


113

09/02/17 16:07:57 32SMG631_118

＊

＊

＊

Group SetupLANGUAGE(P.134)

DEFAULT ALL(P.135)

Page134

135

Menu Item DescriptionChanges the language used in the display.

Returns all settings to the factory default.

Setting OptionENGLISH , ITALIAN,SPANISH, GERMAN,FRENCH, PORTUGUESECANCELOK

Factory default setting:



09/01/28 17:47:32 32SMG631_119

To enter the customizing mode, thevehicle must be stopped with theignition switch in the ON (II)position and the parking brake set onvehicles with manual transmission ori-SHIFT. If your vehicle has theautomatic transmission, the shiftlever should be in park.(Exceptionally, this condition is notapplied on some speed alarmsettings.) Press and hold the INFObutton on the steering wheel forabout 3 seconds while the multi-information display is in its normaldisplay. Here are the settings youcan customize.

Each time you press the INFObutton, the display changes as shownabove.

DEFAULT ALL: To return to thedefault settings (see page ).

LANGUAGE: To select language(see page ).

CHG SETTING: To changevehicle control settings (see page

).INITIALISE DEFLATIONWARNING SYSTEM: To initialisethe deflation warning system (seepage ).

SPEED ALARM (For some types):To set the speed alarm (see page

).122

134

135

116

427

CONTINUED




INITIALISE DEFLATION WARNINGSYSTEM (See page 427)

(For some types)

09/01/28 17:47:41 32SMG631_120

If you do not select any settings onthe display after you press the INFObutton and the setting menu isdisplayed, the customizing modedisplay will return to the normaldisplay after about 10 seconds.

If you try to start driving whilecustomizing the settings, you will see‘‘MUST STOP AND PARK TOCHANGE SETTINGS’’ on thedisplay and the customizing will becancelled.

Customizing is also cancelled, if youturn the ignition switch out of theON (II) position.

You can also select the specifiedspeed alarm while driving. If you setthe alarm to the specified vehiclespeed while driving, select ‘‘SPEEDALARM,’’ and refer to page .

You can access different alarmfunctions when the vehicle isstopped or while driving. Whiledriving, you can select either of thetwo speed alarm settings. When yourvehicle is stopped, you can customizethe setting speed to your preference.

If you want to change any vehiclecontrol settings, select ‘‘CHGSETTING,’’ and follow theinstructions on page .

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ asdescribed on page .

Use the INFO button ( ) on thesteering wheel to see and scrollthrough the settings, and the SEL/RESET button to enter yourselections.

135

122

120

On some types Speed Alarm(For some types)



09/01/29 17:56:06 32SMG631_121

To set the speed alarm while the vehicleis stopped:

Press and hold the INFO button toenter the customizing mode, thenpress and release the INFO buttonrepeatedly to select ‘‘SPEEDALARM.’’ While the multi-information display is showing‘‘SPEED ALARM,’’ press the SEL/RESET button. The display changesto the setting mode.

Speed setting 1: You can set thealarm on or off, and adjust thesetting speeds above or below50 km/h (30 mph).

Speed setting 2: You can set thealarm on or off, and adjust thesetting speeds above or below80 km/h (50 mph).

Each time you press and release theINFO button ( ), the selectedicon is changed from set 1, to 50km/h (30 mph), and to set 2, to 80km/h (50 mph). Then press theINFO button again to exit.On the left-hand drive type, you can

set the speed alarm in km/h. On theright-hand drive type, you can set thespeed alarm in km/h or mphaccording to the selectedspeedometer display. The two speedselections and the on/off settingicons are displayed.

CONTINUED



Speed setting 1 off is selected.

09/01/28 17:47:58 32SMG631_122

＋－

Select either of the setting modes (1or 2), then select on or off bypressing the SEL/RESET buttonrepeatedly.

The displayed number is the currentspeed setting. Select either the or

icon by pressing the INFO buttonrepeatedly, then press the SEL/RESET button to change the settingvalue.

To adjust the setting speed, selecteither of the setting speeds, thenpress and release the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes to thespeed setting screen.



Alarm onAlarm off

09/01/28 17:48:05 32SMG631_123

Once you have made your selection,press and release the INFO button tomove to the exit mode. Press theSEL/RESET button to enter yoursetting. If you press the INFO button,the display goes back to the settingmode. Repeat the setup.

Each time you press the SEL/RESET button, the setting speedincreases or decreases by 5 km/h(mph). You can set the speed valuesover 5 km/h (5 mph) with 5 km/h(mph) steps. Always follow theposted speed limit and never drivefaster than is safe for the trafficconditions.

To enter your selection, select theSET icon by pressing the INFObutton, then press the SEL/RESETbutton.

To exit the customizing mode, selectthe exit mode shown above bypressing the INFO button repeatedly,then press the SEL/RESET button.The display goes back to the normaldisplay.

CONTINUED



09/01/28 17:48:11 32SMG631_124

After your selection, press andrelease the INFO button to move tothe exit mode. Press the SEL/RESET button to enter your setting.If you press the INFO button, thedisplay goes back to the settingmode. Repeat the setup.

Press the INFO button for about 1second to switch the display. You willsee the speed alarm settings in themulti-information display.

Select the desired setting speed,then press the SEL/RESET button.Each time you press the SEL/RESET button, the selected speedicon switches between on and off.According to the selected display,

you can select the alarm speedbetween the two setting speeds:50 km/h and 80 km/h in km/h mode,or 30 mph and 50 mph in mph mode.Each time you press and release theINFO button, the selected icon is

changed between the setting speedsand the exit icon.

To select the alarm speed while driving:



Alarm off Alarm on

09/01/28 17:48:18 32SMG631_125

After pressing the SEL/RESETbutton, the display shows yoursetting for a few seconds, then goesback to the normal display.

If you do not press any button, thedisplay returns to the normal displayafter about 10 seconds.



Alarm on

09/01/28 17:48:22 32SMG631_126

＋－

REV. INDICATOR: Rev indicatorcan be turned on or off (see page

).

ECO. INDICATOR: ECO indicatorcan be turned on or off (see page

).

You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to suit yourneeds. The following items are thesettings you can customize.

WARNING MESSAGE: Thewarning message is displayed withthe symbol or not (see page ).

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY: The outsidetemperature indicator value isadjustable up to or 3°C (seepage ).

TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL:Average fuel economy for tripmeter A can be reset afterrefueling (see page ).

ELAPSED TIME RESET: Theelapsed time can be reset whenyou turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position or when youreset trip meter A or B (see page

).

DISPLAY UNIT: Measurements inthe trip computer can be selected;auto, km or miles (see page ).This function is available on theright-hand drive type only.

123

125

126129 131

132

128

Change Setting



Right-hand drive type is shown.


: Press the SEL/RESETbutton.

09/01/28 17:48:32 32SMG631_127

Press and hold the INFO button toenter the customizing mode, thenpress and release the INFO buttonrepeatedly to select ‘‘CHG SETTING.’’While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘CHG SETTING,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button. The displaychanges to the setting mode.

Press and release the INFO buttonrepeatedly until you see the setupyou want to customize, and press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection. Each time you press theINFO button, the display changes asshown. To customize each setting,follow the procedures described onthe following pages.

To exit the customizing mode afteryour selection, select the exit modeshown above by pressing the INFObutton repeatedly, then press theSEL/RESET button. The display willreturn to the normal display.

You can see message(s) with thesystem warning symbol on the multi-information display. While the multi-information display is showing‘‘WARNING MESSAGE,’’ press theSEL/RESET button. The displaychanges to the setting display.

CONTINUED

Warning Message



09/01/28 17:48:39 32SMG631_128

You can select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’. Eachtime you press the INFO button, theselected mode switches between onand off. Enter your selection bypressing the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows‘‘SETUP ON’’ for a few seconds,then goes back to the ‘‘CHGSETTING’’ display. Press the SEL/RESET button, then press the INFObutton repeatedly to select anothercustomizing mode.

To exit the customizing mode, selectthe exit mode by pressing the INFObutton repeatedly, then press theSEL/RESET button (see page ).The display goes back to the‘‘WARNING MESSAGE’’ display.

If you fail to enter your selection,you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on thedisplay for a few seconds. Thedisplay returns to the setting mode.

Repeat the setup.

To return to the normal display,select the display, then pressthe SEL/RESET button.

123



09/01/28 17:48:47 32SMG631_129

＋－

＋＋＋－－－

If you find that the temperaturereading is always a few degreesbelow or above the actualtemperature, adjust it as described inthe following section.

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDETEMP. DISPLAY,’’ press the SEL/RESET button. The display changesto the setting display.

The highlighted number is thecurrent adjustment above or belowthe outside temperature. Selecteither or icon by pressing theINFO button repeatedly then pressthe SEL/RESET button to changethe setting value. You can select thevalue between 0, 1, 2, 3, and 0,

1, 2, 3. To enter your selection,select the SET icon by pressing theINFO button, then press the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED

Outside Temperature DisplayAdjustment



09/01/28 17:48:54 32SMG631_130

±

If you fail to enter your selection,you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on thedisplay for a few seconds. Thedisplay returns to the setting mode.Repeat the setup.

To cause the trip meter A and theaverage fuel economy for trip A toreset every time you refuel yourvehicle, adjust it as follows.

To exit the customizing mode, selectthe exit mode by pressing the INFObutton repeatedly, then press theSEL/RESET button. The displaygoes back to the normal display.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows‘‘SETUP °C’’ for a few seconds,then goes back to the ‘‘CHGSETTING’’ display. Press the SEL/RESET button, then press the INFObutton repeatedly to select anothercustomizing mode.

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘TRIP A RESET WITHREFUEL,’’ press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes to thesetting display.

Trip A Reset With Refuel



09/01/29 17:56:15 32SMG631_131


To exit the customizing mode, selectthe exit mode by pressing the INFObutton repeatedly, then press theSEL/RESET button. The display willreturn to the normal display.


When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows‘‘SETUP ON’’ for a few seconds,then goes back to the ‘‘CHGSETTING’’ display. Press the SEL/RESET button, then press the INFObutton repeatedly to select anothercustomizing mode.

CONTINUED



09/01/28 17:49:08 32SMG631_132

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘ELAPSED TIMERESET,’’ press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes to thesetting display.

TRIP A: The elapsed time is resetwhen you reset trip meter A.

TRIP B: The elapsed time is resetwhen you reset trip meter B.

You can select ‘‘IGN OFF,’’‘‘TRIP A,’’ or ‘‘TRIP B’’. Each timeyou press the INFO button, theselected mode switches betweenthem. Enter your selection bypressing the SEL/RESET button.

To cause the elapsed time to resetevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position orreset trip meter A or B, adjust it asdescribed as follows.

IGN OFF: The elapsed time is resetwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position.

Elapsed Time Reset



09/01/28 17:49:16 32SMG631_133


You can select the measurementstandard in the trip computer asdescribed as follows. There are threeselectable modes; AUTO, KM andMILES.


When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows theappropriate setting; ‘‘SETUP IGNOFF,’’ ‘‘SETUP TRIP A,’’ or ‘‘SETUPTRIP B’’ for a few seconds, thengoes back to the ‘‘CHG SETTING’’display. Press the SEL/RESETbutton, then press the INFO buttonrepeatedly to select anothercustomizing mode.

CONTINUED

On the right-hand drive type only

Display Unit



IGN OFF is selected.

09/01/28 17:49:23 32SMG631_134

You can select ‘‘AUTO,’’ ‘‘KM,’’ or‘‘MILES’’. Each time you press theINFO button, the selected modeswitches between them. Enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘DISPLAY UNIT,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button. The displaychanges to the setting display.

AUTO: The displayed measurementsof the trip computer on the multi-information display correspond withthe speedometer display setting. Thedisplay switches between ‘‘km’’ and‘‘miles.’’

KM: The displayed measurements ofthe trip computer on the multi-information display do notcorrespond to the speedometerdisplay switching. Always displaywith ‘‘km.’’

MILES: The displayedmeasurements of the trip computeron the multi-information display donot correspond to the speedometerdisplay switching. Always displaywith ‘‘miles.’’

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows theappropriate setting; ‘‘SETUP AUTO,’’‘‘SETUP KM,’’ or ‘‘SETUP MILES’’for a few seconds, then goes back tothe ‘‘CHG SETTING’’ display. Pressthe SEL/RESET button, then pressthe INFO button repeatedly to selectanother customizing mode.



AUTO is selected.

09/01/28 17:49:31 32SMG631_135


You can select the REV indicator inthe instrument panel. While themulti-information display is showing‘‘REV. INDICATOR,’’ press theSEL/RESET button. The displaychanges to the setting display.



CONTINUED

REV Indicator



09/01/28 17:49:38 32SMG631_136


You can display the ECO indicator inthe instrument panel. While themulti-information display is showing‘‘ECO. INDICATOR,’’ press theSEL/RESET button. The displaychanges to the setting display.


In the automatic driving mode, theREV indicator goes out even if thesetting is on.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows‘‘SETUP ON’’ or ‘‘SETUP OFF’’ for afew seconds, then goes back to the‘‘CHG SETTING’’ display. Press theSEL/RESET button, then press theINFO button repeatedly to selectanother customizing mode.


ECO Indicator



ON is selected.

09/01/28 17:49:45 32SMG631_137




When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows‘‘SETUP ON’’ or ‘‘SETUP OFF’’ for afew seconds, then goes back to the‘‘CHG SETTING’’ display. Press theSEL/RESET button, then press theINFO button repeatedly to selectanother customizing mode.



ON is selected.

09/01/28 17:49:52 32SMG631_138

Press and hold the INFO button toenter the customizing mode, thenpress and release the INFO button toselect ‘‘LANGUAGE.’’ While themulti-information display is showing‘‘LANGUAGE,’’ press the SEL/RESET button. The display changesto the setting display.

You can select any of the followinglanguages: English, French, German,Spanish, Italian, Portuguese. Pressand release the INFO button toselect the language, then press theSEL/RESET button to enter theselection.

When the language selection issuccessfully completed, the displaychanges to the screen shown abovefor a few seconds, then goes back tothe ‘‘LANGUAGE’’ display. Press theINFO button repeatedly to selectanother customizing mode.

Selecting Language



ENGLISH is selected.

09/01/28 17:49:59 32SMG631_139

If you fail to set the language setting,you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on thedisplay for a few seconds. Thedisplay returns to the setting mode.Repeat the setup.

To exit the customizing mode, selectthe exit mode shown above bypressing the INFO button repeatedly,followed by the SEL/RESET button.The display goes back to the normaldisplay.

If you want to set the customizablevehicle control settings to the defaultsetting, press the INFO button onthe steering wheel repeatedly until‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ is displayed, thenpress the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED

Default Settings



09/01/28 17:50:06 32SMG631_140

The display shows the selectableitems. If you want to cancel‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ select ‘‘CANCEL’’by pressing the INFO button, thenpress and hold the SEL/RESETbutton for about 3 seconds to set.The display goes back to the normaldisplay.

To set the default settings, select‘‘OK’’ by pressing the INFO button,then press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton for about 3 seconds to set.

After the DEFAULT ALL operationis completed, you will see the abovedisplay for a few seconds, then thedisplay switches to the languagesetting mode.



09/01/28 17:50:13 32SMG631_141

The following are the default valuesfor each customizable setting.

If the DEFAULT ALL operation isnot successful, you will see the abovedisplay for a few seconds, then thedisplay goes back to the settingdisplay. Selecting the default setting is

cancelled.

Displayed language is English.

ECO indicator is on.

In the automatic driving mode, theREV indicator goes out.

Rev indicator is on.

Measurements in the tripcomputer correspond with themeasurements selected with themph to km/h change button(km/h or mph).This setting is only on the right-hand drive type.

The speed alarm function (forsome types) is off.

The elapsed time is reset with theignition switch in the LOCK (0)position.

Average fuel economy for tripmeter A is not reset on refueling.

Outside temperature displayadjustment value is 0°C.

The warning message function isoff. Only the symbols aredisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay.




09/01/28 17:50:24 32SMG631_142

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equipped

To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.

1 :2 :3 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel



HAZARD WARNINGBUTTONENGINE START BUTTON

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

HORN


(P.190)

(P.322)


(P.149)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

(P.144, 145, 146, 147)


VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS (P.92)

(P.141)HEADLIGHTWASHER BUTTON

WINDSCREEN WIPERS/WASHERS

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS(P.148)

(P.315)

VSA OFF SWITCH

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS(P.92)

(P.140)


PARKING SENSOR SYSTEMBUTTON (P.325)

(P.149/180)

(P.332)


(P.423)

(P.390, 392, 393)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FRONT FOG LIGHTS /REAR FOG LIGHT

1

3

3

3

2

3

3

3

3

09/01/28 17:50:34 32SMG631_143

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equipped

To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.

1 :2 :3 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel


WINDSCREENWIPERS/WASHERS




ENGINE STARTBUTTON


(P.92)

(P.322)

(P.150)

(P.140)

CIGARETTELIGHTER(P.92)

(P.325)

VSA OFF SWITCH

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS (P.315)


HEADLIGHTADJUSTER


INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS(P.148)

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON(P.149)

(P.149/180) HORN

mph to km/hCHANGE BUTTON(P.88)



(P.190)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/REAR FOG LIGHT/FRONT FOG LIGHTS(P.144, 145, 146, 147)

PARKING SENSORSYSTEM BUTTON

(P.332)


(P.423)

(P.390, 392, 393)

3

3

3

1

2

3

3

3

09/01/28 17:50:43 32SMG631_144

－

－

－

－

－－

－

－

－

＊

＊

Push the lever up or down to select aposition.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to vehicle’s speed.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

While the vehicle is stopped and ingear, the wipers sweep thewindscreen whenever you removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

MISTOFFINT Intermittent(AUTO )LO Low speedHI High speedWindscreen washers

On vehicles with automaticintermittent wipers, see page

.

Vary the delay by turning theadjustment ring. If you turn it tothe shortest delay( position), the wiperschange to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds20 km/h (12 mph).

The wipers run at high speed.

The wipers run at low speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

:

1.2.3.

4.5.6.

141

Windscreen Wipers

INT

MIST

OFF

HI

LO

Windscreen Washers

Windscreen Wipers and Washers


ADJUSTMENT RING

09/01/28 17:50:54 32SMG631_145

CONTINUED

The automatic intermittent wipersystem senses rainfall andautomatically turns on thewindscreen wipers. To enablesensing, push the lever down toselect AUTO.

The headlight washers can beoperated at any time by pressing theheadlight washer button located nextto the steering wheel column. Theheadlights must be turned on to usethis button. In addition, the headlightwasher operates without pressingthe button at the first time you turnon the windscreen washers after youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

The headlight washers use the samefluid reservoir as the windscreenwashers.

On some models



Automatic Intermittent WipersHeadlight Washers(For some types)

141

09/01/28 17:51:02 32SMG631_146

You can adjust the sensitivity of thesystem by turning the adjustmentring on the wiper lever.

When the system senses rainfall, itturns on the windscreen wipers andvaries their speed (intermittent, lowspeed, or high speed) depending onhow hard it is raining. This functionis available when the vehicle speedexceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).

When the wiper lever is in the ‘‘LO’’(low speed) or ‘‘HI’’ (high speed)position, the windscreen wipers runat that speed. Automatic sensing isdisabled.



ADJUSTMENT RING

09/01/28 17:51:08 32SMG631_147

Do not position the wiper lever inAUTO when driving through a carwash. Turn off this system when notin use.

The rainfall sensor is located in thewindscreen near the rearview mirror.If the sensor is covered with mud, oil,dust, etc., the wipers may notoperate properly or may operateunexpectedly.



RAINFALL SENSOR

09/01/28 17:51:12 32SMG631_148

－－Push down or up onthe lever to signal a turn. To signal alane change, push lightly on thelever in the proper direction and holdit. The lever will return to centrewhen you release it or complete aturn.

Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the position lights, tail-lights,instrument panel lights, and rearlicence plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder chime whenyou open the driver’s door.

Turn signalOffPosition and indicator lightsAUTO (on some models)Headlights onHigh beamsFlash high beams

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or the ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a‘‘HEADLIGHTS ON’’ message onthe multi-information display.

If you hold the turn signal lever, theturn signal continues to blink andwill stop when you release it.

To signal a lane change easily, pushthe turn signal lever in the properdirection lightly and release it. Theleft or right turn signal indicator onthe instrument panel and theappropriate outside turn signals willblink three times.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.

Turn Signal Headlights On

One-push Turn Signal(For some types)


Turn Signals and Headlights

144

09/01/28 17:51:21 32SMG631_149

－－ On some models

The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights, allother exterior lights, and theinstrument panel lights when itsenses low ambient light.

To turn on the automatic lighting,turn the light switch to the AUTOposition at any time. The lights willcome on automatically when theoutside light level becomes low (atdusk, for example). The lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.The lights and indicator turn offautomatically when the systemsenses high ambient light.

Push the leverforward until you hear a click to turnon the high beams. The blue highbeam indicator will come on (seepage ). Pull the lever back toreturn to the low beams.

The daytime running lights come onautomatically when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. They go out automaticallywhen the light switch is ON.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

The lights turn off automaticallywhen you turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position. To turn themon again, either turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, orturn the light switch to the

position.

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingfacilities.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or the engine off for along time.

If there is a problem with theautomatic lighting control system,you will see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ orthe symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. Have the vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

85

CONTINUED


AUTOHigh Beams

(For some types)Daytime Running Lights

Headlights

145

09/01/28 17:51:31 32SMG631_150

The automatic lighting feature iscontrolled by a sensor located on thewindscreen near the rearview mirror.Do not cover this sensor or spillliquids on it.

The rear fog light switch is locatednext to the light control switch. Youcan use the rear fog light when theheadlights are on (the light controlswitch is in the position).

To operate the rear fog light, turnthe switch up from the off ( )position. The indicator in theinstrument panel comes on toindicate that the rear fog light is on.

You can turn off the rear fog lightwith the headlights on by turning theswitch up again.

The rear fog light will go off whenyou turn the headlights off. To turnthe rear fog light on again, you haveto turn the rear fog light switchagain with the headlights on.

Headlights, Front and Rear Fog Lights


(For some types)Rear Fog Light

146

LIGHTING SENSOR

REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH

09/01/28 17:51:40 32SMG631_151

The fog light switch is located nextto the light control switch. You cancontrol the front fog lights with thisswitch when the light control switchis in the or position.

You can also use the rear fog lightwhen the light control switch is inthe position or the front foglights are turned on.

You can turn off the rear fog lightwith the headlights on by turning theswitch down again.

You can turn off the rear fog lightwith the front fog lights on byturning the switch up again.

The front and rear fog lights will gooff when you turn the light controlswitch off. If only the rear fog light ison, it will go off when you turn theheadlights off.

To turn the rear fog light on again,you have to turn the fog light switchagain with the headlights on( position) or the front foglights on.

To turn on the rear fog light only,turn the switch down from the OFFposition. The indicator in theinstrument panel comes on toindicate that the rear fog light is on.

To operate the front fog lights, turnthe switch up from the OFF positionto the ON position. The

indicator comes on as areminder. To turn the rear fog lighton with the front fog lights, turn theswitch one position up from the

position.

When you turn the light controlswitch on again, the front fog lightswill also turn on. To turn the foglights completely off, turn the foglight switch down to the OFFposition.

Front and Rear Fog Lights


Front and Rear Fog Lights(For some types)

147

FRONT AND REAR FOG LIGHTSSWITCH

09/01/28 17:51:51 32SMG631_152

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to the

or position.

You can adjust the brightness to thedesired level with the headlightswitch off, and also with theheadlight switch on. Both settingswill remain at those levels until youchange them.

Each display (upper and lower) willilluminate with reduced brightnesswhen you unlock and open thedriver’s door, then go to normalbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns offafter about 10 seconds.

The knob on the instrument paneladjusts the brightness of the instru-ment panel. Push on the knob to popit out, then turn it to adjust thebrightness.

Push the knob back in to preventyour setting from accidentallychanging.

The brightness can be shown withinthe six brightness levels on themulti-information display. When youturn the knob, the lower segment ofthe display changes to vertical barsthat show you the current level. Youwill hear a tone when you reach themaximum or minimum brightness.The brightness level goes out about5 seconds after you stop adjusting.

Instrument Panel Brightness


BRIGHTNESS LEVELS

09/01/28 17:52:00 32SMG631_153

The rear window demister will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position. Push thedemister button to turn it on and off.The indicator in the button comes onto show the demister is on. It shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedemister on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Push the red button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all outsideturn signals and both turn indicatorsin the instrument panel to flash. Usethese lights to give a warning toother road users that your vehicle iscausing a hazard.

Pushing the demister also turns themirror heaters on and off. For moreinformation, see page .

The demister and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The demister will shut itself offwithin about 20 to 40 minutesaccording to the outside temperature.

180


Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Demister

Rear Window DemisterHazard Warning Button

149

09/01/28 17:52:08 32SMG631_154

The vertical angle of the headlights(low beam) can be adjustedaccording to the number of personsand the loading weight in theluggage area.

Push the knob to pop it out, thenturn the knob to select anappropriate angle of the headlights.After adjusting, push the knob backin to prevent your setting fromaccidentally changing.

A driver or a driver and passengerin the front seat.Five persons in the front and rearseats.Five persons in the front and rearseats and luggage in the luggagearea, within the limits of maximumpermissible axle weight andmaximum permissible vehicleweight.A driver and luggage in theluggage area, within the limits ofmaximum permissible axle weightand maximum permissible vehicleweight.

Your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic headlight adjustingsystem that senses changes in thevehicle posture due to riding andloading conditions of the passengersand their luggage and adjusts thevertical angle of the headlights (lowbeam) automatically.

0:

1:

2:

3:

On vehicles with high voltage dischargetube bulbs

Headlight Adjuster


09/01/28 17:52:17 32SMG631_155

Make any steering wheeladjustments before you start driving.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

Pull the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way up.

Push the lever down to lock thesteering wheel in position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustments


Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control ofthe vehicle and be seriouslyinjured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheelonly when the vehicle isstopped.

LEVER

09/01/28 17:52:24 32SMG631_156

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

Two ignition keys come with yourvehicle. You should keep one ofthem in a safe place, away from thevehicle, as a spare.They fit all the locks on your vehicle.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

Your two ignition keys are also fittedwith remote transmitters; see page

for an explanation of theoperation.159

Keys and Locks


Remote Transmitter

152

KEYNUMBERTAG

IGNITION KEYSWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

09/01/28 17:52:33 32SMG631_157

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart your engine, contact yourdealer.

(EU models)EC DirectivesThis immobilizer system complieswith the R & TTE (Radio equipmentand Telecommunications TerminalEquipment and the mutualrecognition of their conformity)Directives.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.


Immobilizer System

(South African model)

153

09/01/28 17:52:42 32SMG631_158

－

－

－

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system (on sometypes) and the cigarette lighter inthis position.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

On some types, the headlights comeon automatically in this position.

The ignition switch has threepositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), and ON (II).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in Park.

The engine can be started with thekey in this position by pressing theENGINE START button (see page

on petrol models with manualtransmission and automatictransmission, page on petrolmodels with i-SHIFT, and page

on diesel models).

390

392

393

Ignition Switch


ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

LOCK (0)

154

09/01/28 17:52:50 32SMG631_159

CONTINUED

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. You will also seethe symbol ‘‘ ,’’ or the symbolwith an ‘‘IGNITION KEY’’ messageon the multi-information display.Remove the key to turn off thebeeper and the warning symbol.

To lock the doors and the tailgate,push the top of the master door lockswitch on the driver’s door, pull thelock tab rearward on the driver’sdoor, or use the key on the outsidelock on the driver’s door.

Pushing the bottom of the masterdoor lock switch or pushing forwardthe lock tab on the driver’s door willunlock all doors and the tailgate.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.


Ignition Switch, Door Locks

Power Door Locks

155

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control ofthe vehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

09/01/28 17:52:58 32SMG631_160

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull thelock tab rearward and close the door.To lock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, pull andhold the outside door handle, andpull the lock tab rearward or pushthe top of the master door lockswitch, then close the door.

When you lock the doors and thetailgate with the key or the remotetransmitter, all outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel flash three times to verify thedoors and the tailgate are locked andthe security system has set (seepage ).

The security system activates afteryou lock the doors and the tailgatewith the lock tab on the driver’s dooror the master door lock switch (seepage ).

Each door has a lock tab next to theinner door handle. Pushing forwardor rearward the lock tab on eachpassenger’s door only locks andunlocks that door.

When the door is unlocked, you cansee the red indicator on the lock tabnext to the inner door handle.

All doors and tailgate lock or unlockwhen you use the key to lock orunlock the driver’s door.

Pushing the bottom of the masterdoor lock switch will unlock all doorsand the tailgate.

To unlock the driver’s door from theoutside, turn the key and release it.If you turn it again, all doors and thetailgate unlock.

Only the driver’s door unlocks whenyou use the driver’s door lock tab.

319

319

On vehicles with security system

On some types


Door Locks

156

RED INDICATOR

To unlock

To lock

09/01/28 17:53:08 32SMG631_161

CONTINUED

The super locking will not set if anydoor or the tailgate is not fully closed.It will be set even if the bonnet, orany window is open.

With the super locking set, themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door and the lock tabs on alldoors are disabled.

You can also set the super lockingwith the remote transmitter. To set it,push the LOCK button twice within5 seconds (see page ).

To cancel the super locking, unlockthe driver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

Only the remote transmitter canreset the security system. Unlockingthe driver’s door with the keyactivates the alarm.

The super locking helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.To set the super locking, turn thekey towards the front of the vehicletwice within 5 seconds.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, the master doorlock switch is disabled. It is notdisabled if the driver’s door is closed.If you try to lock an open driver’sdoor by pulling the lock tab rearwardwith the outside handle pulled, thetabs on all doors pop out.

160

On vehicles with ultrasonic sensor

Door Locks


Super Locking(For some types)

Lockout Prevention

157

09/01/28 17:53:18 32SMG631_162

The outside door handle is locatednext to the rear window.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position (lever isdown), the door cannot be openedfrom the inside regardless of theposition of the lock tab. To open thedoor, push the lock tab forward anduse the outside door handle.

If you set the super locking with thewindows open, the ultrasonic sensormay activate the alarm unexpectedlywhen the system senses strongvibrations on the vehicle or loudsound.

On vehicles with ultrasonic sensor

Door Locks


Childproof Door Locks

158

If there are persons inside thevehicle with the superlocking set, they cannotunlock the doors from theinside.

Make sure there is no personinside the vehicle beforesetting the super locking.

09/01/28 17:53:25 32SMG631_163

－

－

Press this button to lockall doors and the tailgate. When youpush the LOCK button, all outsideturn signals and both indicators inthe instrument panel flash threetimes to verify the doors and thetailgate are locked and the securitysystem (if equipped) has set. Youcannot lock the doors and thetailgate if any door or the tailgate isnot fully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

You cannot unlock the doors and thetailgate if the key is in the ignitionswitch.

Press this button tounlock all doors and the tailgate.When you push the UNLOCK button,all outside turn signals, and bothindicators in the instrument panelflash once.

If you do not open any door or thetailgate within 30 seconds, the doorsand the tailgate automatically relockand the security system (ifequipped) sets.

Press this button once to unlock thedriver’s door. Push it twice to unlockthe remaining doors and the tailgate.

The front ceiling light (if the lightswitch is in the Door position) andrear ceiling light (if the light switchis in the centre position) will comeon when you press the UNLOCKbutton. If you do not open any dooror the tailgate within 30 seconds, thelights fade out. If you relock thedoors and tailgate with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the lights will go offimmediately.

CONTINUED

On some types

Remote Transmitter


LOCK

UNLOCK

159

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

09/01/28 17:53:33 32SMG631_164

You can set the super locking withthe remote transmitter. To set thesuper locking, push the LOCKbutton twice within 5 seconds.

The super locking will not set if anydoor or the tailgate is not fully closed.It will be set even if the bonnet orany window is open.

See page for information on thesuper locking.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.To cancel the super locking, push

the UNLOCK button on the remotetransmitter, or unlock the driver’sdoor with the key.

157

Remote Transmitter


Super Locking(For some types)

Remote Transmitter Care

160

If there are persons inside thevehicle with the superlocking set, they cannotunlock the doors from theinside.

Make sure there is no personinside the vehicle beforesetting the super locking.

09/01/28 17:53:42 32SMG631_165

CONTINUED

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

To replace the battery: Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

1.

3.

2.

Remote Transmitter


Replacing the TransmitterBattery

161

TABSCREW

BATTERY

09/01/28 17:53:51 32SMG631_166

＋

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the side facing down.

Install the parts in reverse order.

EC DirectivesThis keyless entry system complieswith the R & TTE (Radio equipmentand Telecommunications TerminalEquipment and the mutualrecognition of their conformity)Directives.This symbol on the battery

means that this product mustnot be treated as householdwaste.

An improperly disposed of batterycan be harmful to the environmentand human health.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.

4.

5.


Remote Transmitter

(EU models) (South African model)

162

09/01/28 17:54:00 32SMG631_167

The tailgate will lock or unlock whenyou lock or unlock the driver’s doorwith the key, the remote transmitter,the master door lock switch, or thelock tab on the driver’s door.

To open the tailgate, push therelease, then lift up. To close thetailgate, use the inner handle to pullit down, then press down on the backedge.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.66

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Tailgate

163

HANDLERELEASE

09/01/28 17:54:06 32SMG631_168

Push the release lever to the lowerright as shown.

If the power door lock system cannotunlock the tailgate, unlock itmanually. In this case, you cannotopen the tailgate with the release.

To open the tailgate, access thetailgate release lever from inside thevehicle.

If you need to open the tailgatemanually, it means there is aproblem with the tailgate. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Place a cloth on the edge of thecover, then use a small flat-tippedscrewdriver to remove the cover onthe back of the tailgate.


Tailgate

Opening the Tailgate Manually

164

Lock

Unlock(Open)

09/01/28 17:54:13 32SMG631_169

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

15 16

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat cushion.

Front Seat Adjustments

Seats


Driver’s seat is shown.

SEAT-BACK ANGLEADJUSTMENTLEVER

09/01/28 17:54:20 32SMG631_170

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

16

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

Make sure to pull the lever upwardor downward to its full range.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the centre of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe centre of the restraint.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

When a passenger is seated in therear seating position, make sure therear head restraint is adjusted to itshighest position.

Seats


Head RestraintsDriver’s Seat Height Adjustment

166

09/01/28 17:54:29 32SMG631_171

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

To remove a head restraint forfolding down the rear seat, cleaningor repair, pull it up as far as it will go.Push the release button and pull therestraint out of the seat-back.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.


Seats

Adjusting the Head Restraint Removing the Head Restraint

167

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

Front CUSHION

LEGS

SEAT-BACK RELEASE BUTTON

CUSHION

SEAT-BACK

RELEASEBUTTON

LEG

Rear

Centre head restraint is shown.

09/01/28 17:54:37 32SMG631_172

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.

It also helps protect the occupantsagainst whiplash and injuries to theneck and upper spine.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

On some models

Seats

Active Head Restraints


09/01/28 17:54:46 32SMG631_173

The rear seat armrest is in thecentre of the rear seat. Pivot it downto use it.

A beverage holder is located in thearmrest.

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest.

Make sure the passenger’s hands orfingers are away from the armrestbefore pushing it down.

Rear Seat Armrest(For some types)Front Seat Armrest

Seats


Armrests

169

09/01/28 17:54:53 32SMG631_174

The left and right rear seat-backscan be folded down separately tomake more luggage space.

You can also lift up each of the rearseat cushions separately to makeroom for luggage (see page ).

With only half the seat-back foldedor the seat cushion folded up, youcan carry only one passenger in therear outer seating position. Youcannot use the seat belt properly onthe rear centre seating position inthis case.

Remove any items from the seatbefore you fold down the seat-backor fold up the seat cushion.

Make sure that there are no items onthe passenger compartment floorbefore you fold down the seat-back.

Push the armrest back in place.

Put the outer shoulder belt in theclip on each side.

Lower the head restraint to itslowest position.

Pull up on the release lever on theoutside of the seat-back.

Fold the seat back forward.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

172

Seats


Folding the Rear Seats Folding Down the Seat-back

170

CLIP

09/01/28 17:55:05 32SMG631_175

Reverse this procedure to return theseat-back to the upright position. Pullon the seat-back to make sure it islatched. If the seat-back is notlatched fully, the seat belt will notwork properly and you will see thered indicator behind the releaselever as shown.

If the rear head restraints get caughton the front seat backs and youcannot fold down the rear seat-backfully, you can remove the headrestraints (see page ).

Always replace the rear headrestraints when the seat-backs arereturned to the upright position.

167

CONTINUED

Seats


Make sure the seat-backs arelatched securely beforedriving.

REDINDICATOR

09/01/28 17:55:12 32SMG631_176

Push the armrest back in place.

Make sure the seat cushion is lockedsecurely and the seat leg ispositioned properly.

To return the seat-cushion to itsoriginal position, pull up the seat legfully, then push down the seatcushion slowly while holding it byhand.

Make sure all items in the luggagearea are secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (See

on page ).

Put the outer shoulder belt in theclip on each side (see page ).

Pull up the seat cushion and pushit against the seat-back, then folddown the seat leg to lock the seatcushion. Make sure the seatcushion is locked securely.

1.

2.

3.

170

382

Seats


Lifting Up the Seat Cushion

CarryingLuggage

172

SEAT LEG

09/01/28 17:55:20 32SMG631_177

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be in the ON (II) position touse the heaters.

Push the front of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe back of the switch. This will keepthe seat warm.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.In the LO setting, the heater runs

continuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Seat Heaters (For some types)


SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

09/01/28 17:55:27 32SMG631_178

The luggage area cover can beremoved to give you more luggageheight.

To remove the cover, take off thehooks from the tailgate, slide thecover towards the rear, then lift itstraight up.

To install the cover, set the mount-ing rods to the recesses and slide thecover towards the front until it clipsinto place. Make sure it is securelylatched so it will not come loosewhile you are driving.

Lower the tailgate and put the hooksback in place.

Luggage Area Cover (For some types)


HOOK MOUNTING ROD

09/01/28 17:55:34 32SMG631_179

－

CONTINUED

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down lightly and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Pull back on theswitch and hold it to close thewindow.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes or 45 seconds (on sometypes) after you turn off the ignitionswitch. In this period, the auto

function will be enabled only on thedriver’s window. Opening eitherfront door cancels this function.

The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open any of the passengers’windows, push down lightly on theappropriate switch, and hold it untilthe window reaches the desiredposition. To close the window, pull

back lightly on the window switch.Release the switch when the windowgets to the position you want.

To open the driver’s or thefront passenger’s window fully, pushthe window switch firmly down, thenrelease it. The window automaticallygoes down all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To close the driver’s or the frontpassenger’s window fully, pull backthe window switch firmly, thenrelease it. The window automaticallygoes all the way up. To stop thewindow from going all the way up,push down on the window switchbriefly.


Power Windows


AUTO

175

WARNING:

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingerscan cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengersare away from the windowsbefore closing them.

MAIN SWITCH

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

09/01/28 17:55:42 32SMG631_180

－ If either of thefront windows runs into any obstaclewhile it is closing automatically, itwill stop, and then reverse direction.To close the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

The indicators inside the switchescome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

When you push the MAIN switch in,the switch is off, and the passengers’windows cannot be raised or lowered.To cancel this feature, push on theswitch again to get it to pop out.Keep the MAIN switch pushed inwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

To open or close the driver’s or thefront passenger’s window partially,push down or pull back on thewindow switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

Power Windows


AUTO REVERSE

176

09/01/28 17:55:48 32SMG631_181

Both of the front and rear sunshadescan be opened. The front sunshadeis rolled up in the centre holder fromfront to rear, and the rear sunshadefrom rear to front at the same time.Use the switch on the front ceiling tooperate the sunshades. You mustturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to operate thesunshades.

To open the sunshades, push on therear of the switch and hold it.Release the switch when thesunshades reach the desired position.Push on the front of the switch andhold it to close them. Release theswitch to stop the operation.


CONTINUED

Sunshades (For some types)


Opening or closing thesunshade on someone’shands or fingers may causeinjury.

Make sure all hands andfingers are clear of thesunshade before opening orclosing it.

WARNING:

09/01/28 17:55:54 32SMG631_182

－－To open the sunshadesfully, push on the rear of the switchfirmly, then release it. Thesunshades automatically open all theway. To stop the sunshades fromopening, push on the switch briefly.

To close the sunshade fully, push onthe front of the switch firmly, thenrelease it. The sunshadesautomatically close all the way. Tostop the sunshades from closing,push on the switch briefly.

To open or close the sunshadespartially, push on the rear or front ofthe sunshade switch lightly and holdit. The sunshade will stop when yourelease the switch.

If either of thefront and rear sunshades runs intoany obstacle while they are closingautomatically, each sunshade willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the sunshades, remove theobstacle, then use the sunshadeswitch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing wheneach sunshade is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the sunshades before closingthem.

The sunshades have a key-off delay.You can still open and close thesunshades for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either front door.

Sunshades (For some types)


AUTO AUTO REVERSE

178

09/01/28 17:56:01 32SMG631_183

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

There is also a sensor on the back ofthe mirror. Items hung on the mirrormay block this sensor and affect itsperformance.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this feature.

On some types

Mirrors


TABSENSORINDICATOR

AUTO BUTTON

09/01/28 17:56:08 32SMG631_184

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L (leftside) or R (right side).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the centre (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the rear window demisterbutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on as a reminder. Press thebutton again to turn the heaters andthe demister off.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors Power Mirror Heaters

Mirrors


SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

REAR WINDOWDEMISTER/HEATED MIRRORBUTTON

09/01/28 17:56:16 32SMG631_185

Door mirrors can be folded by thefolding switch next to the selectorswitch, which enables you to parkyour vehicle in a limited parkingspace easily. Make sure you fold outthe mirrors before you start driving.With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, press the folding switchto fold up both outside mirrors simul-taneously. To fold out, press theswitch again.

Never drive your vehicle with theoutside mirrors folded.

Folding Door Mirrors(On some types)

Mirrors


09/01/28 17:56:22 32SMG631_186

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper willsound if the vehicle is driven withthe parking brake on.

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display.

78

Parking Brake


PARKING BRAKE LEVER

09/01/28 17:56:28 32SMG631_187

＊

＊

＊

Interior Convenience Items


CIGARETTELIGHTER

: For some types

COAT HOOK

CENTRE CONSOLE

GLOVE BOX

ASHTRAY

UNDER-FLOORLUGGAGE AREA

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

CENTRE POCKET

SUN VISORBEVERAGE HOLDER

BEVERAGE HOLDER

REAR ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

VANITY MIRROR

09/01/28 17:56:33 32SMG631_188

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the centre console side.Close it with a firm push.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the position lights are on.

You can store beverage bottles andcans in the glove box, and keep themcool with the air conditioning system.To keep the inside of the glove boxcool, open the glove box, then openthe air vent on the upper side byturning the dial anticlockwise. Turnon the air conditioning (see pages

and ), and set the modecontrol to ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’position.

206 211

Glove Box Cool Box(On some types)



An open glove box can causeserious injury to yourpassenger in a crash, even ifthe passenger is wearing theseat belt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

DIAL

GLOVE BOX

Open

Close

09/01/28 17:56:41 32SMG631_189

The centre console maincompartment is under the armrest.To use it, pull up on the lever and liftup the armrest.

The centre lower consolecompartment can be used for thebeverage holders or as a storagespace. To open the compartment,slide the lid backward.

Your vehicle has a multi-functioncentre console. It includes beverageholders, storage compartments, anarmrest, a cigarette lighter, aremovable ashtray, and seat heaters(if equipped).

The cool air is diverted from the airconditioning system into the glovebox through the air vent.

Use only resealable containers orkeep unopened cans in the glove box.Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery and electricalcomponents in the glove box andinside the dashboard. Make sure toclose the air vent by turning the dialclockwise when it is not used.If you use the heating, the warmedair is diverted into the glove box withthe air vent opened.

CONTINUED

Console CompartmentsCentre Console



09/01/28 17:56:50 32SMG631_190

The front beverage holder is in thecentre console compartment. To usethe beverage holder, slide the lidbackward, and move the partitionforward until it stops.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you open or close the

doors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the centre armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

There is a partition in thecompartment. Slide it backward touse the compartment as a storagespace. You can also remove theashtray by pulling it straight up toextend the compartment.

To close the compartment, slide thelid forward.

On vehicles with rear seat armrest

Beverage Holders



BEVERAGE HOLDERS

Front

Rear

09/01/28 17:56:59 32SMG631_191

Your vehicle has one or twoaccessory power sockets dependingon the model. One is on the left sidein the luggage area and the other isin the console compartment.This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

To use it, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON(II) position. It will not power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

It is recommended that thisaccessory socket is used for genuineHonda accessories.

Make sure to put the socket coverback in place to prevent any smallforeign objects from getting into thesocket.

Accessory Power Socket



For some types

09/01/28 17:57:06 32SMG631_192

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

To use a coat hook, slide it outslightly, then pull it down.

Make sure the coat hook is pulled upwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

To open the centre pocket, pull upthe lid.

Sun VisorCoat HookCentre Pocket



COAT HOOK

SUN VISOR

09/01/28 17:57:15 32SMG631_193

You can also lower this lid to thebottom of the storage area to extendthe luggage space. Open the lid, pullit toward you fully to disengage thelid from the support rods, then lowerthe lid on the bottom of the storagearea.

There is a storage area under thefloor in the luggage area. To keepthe lid open, hook the strap to theanchor on the back of the luggagearea cover (if equipped).

On some types, the compact sparetyre is stored in this area.

Pull up the vanity mirror cover to useit.

The lights come on when you pull upthe cover.

CONTINUED

On some types

On vehicles with adjustable luggage areafloor lid

Under-floor Storage AreaVanity Mirror



09/01/28 17:57:25 32SMG631_194

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) positionfor the cigarette lighter to work. Toheat up the lighter, push it in. It willpop out when it is ready for use. Donot hold the lighter in while it isheating up, you could cause it tooverheat.

To lower the lid:



Cigarette Lighter

190

CIGARETTELIGHTER

Pull outthe lid.

Lowerthe lid.

09/01/28 17:57:32 32SMG631_195

Use the ashtray only for cigarettes,cigars, and other smoking materials.To prevent a possible fire anddamage to your vehicle, don’t putpaper or other things that can burnin the ashtray.

Open the front ashtray by lifting thelid up. To remove the ashtray foremptying or making thecompartment bigger, open theconsole compartment by sliding thelid backwards, then lift the ashtraystraight up.

If you push in the cigarette lighterwithout the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position, it will not pop out. To returnthe cigarette lighter in place, youmust turn the ignition switch on. Donot try to pull it out forcibly.



Ashtray

191

ASHTRAY

ASHTRAY

09/01/28 17:57:38 32SMG631_196

The front ceiling light has a two-position switch. In the DOORposition, the light comes on whenyou open any door. In the OFFposition, the light does not come on.To select the door position, push thebutton to pop it out.

The front ceiling light also containstwo spotlights. Push the button nextto the light to turn it on and off. Youcan use the spotlights at all times.

The rear ceiling light has a three-position switch; ON, Door Activated,and OFF. In the Door Activated(centre) position, the light comes onwhen you:

The front ceiling light (with theswitch in the DOOR position) alsocomes on when you unlock the doorwith the key or the remotetransmitter, and when you removethe key from the ignition switch.

Interior Lights


Ceiling Lights

192

OFF

ON

DOOR ACTIVATED

Rear

DOOR POSITION SELECT BUTTON

Front

09/01/28 17:57:46 32SMG631_197

The courtesy light between the sunvisors comes on when you turn theposition lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the instrumentpanel brightness control knob on thedashboard with the ignition switch inthe ON (II) position (see page ).

The ignition switch light comes onwhen you open the driver’s door, andfades out in about 30 seconds afteryou close the door.

Open any door.

After all the doors are closed tightly,the front and rear ceiling lights dimslightly, then fade out in about 30seconds.

If you leave any door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling lights will go off after 3minutes.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door,the light fades out in about 30seconds.

Unlock the doors and the tailgatewith the key or remote transmitter.

148

CONTINUED

Interior Lights


Courtesy LightIgnition Switch Light

193

09/01/28 17:57:55 32SMG631_198

On some typesIn addition to the courtesy light onthe ceiling, the driver’s and frontpassenger’s ambient foot light comeson.

Interior Lights


09/01/28 17:57:59 32SMG631_199

＊

＊

The climate control system in yourvehicle provides a comfortabledriving environment in all weatherconditions.

Climate control system is standardon some models.

The standard audio system on somemodels has many features. Thissection describes those features andhow to use them.

The security system helps todiscourage vandalism and theft ofyour vehicle.

.................................Interface Dial . 196........................Vents and Heating . 197

...............Climate Control System . 203Sunlight and Temperature

...................................Sensors . 219................................Audio System . 220

Audio System (on vehicles.....without navigation system) . 221

Audio System (on vehicles with...................navigation system) . 263..................Protecting Your Discs . 312................Remote Audio Controls . 315

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 316..........................Setting the Clock . 317

............................Security System . 319...............................Cruise Control . 322

................Parking Sensor System . 325...Hands-Free Telephone System . 330

Features

Features 195

09/01/28 17:58:04 32SMG631_200

Your vehicle has the interface dial onthe dashboard to operate the climatecontrol system, audio system andnavigation system. Most functions ofthese systems can also be controlledwith the appropriate buttons, dials,and knobs on the dashboard, butsome functions can be accessed orselected with the interface dial only.For more information, refer to eachsystem’s appropriate section.

This dial consists of an upper part(selector) and a lower part (dial).Turn the dial left or right to select orscroll through a list or item(s) on thescreen and adjust the level orcondition. Push the selector to theleft, right, up, and down to scrollthrough and select a list or item(s).The selected item will be highlightedon the screen. To confirm the itemor enter the setting, push on thecentre of the selector (ENTER).

Interface Dial

Features

On vehicles with navigation systemonly

196

DIAL

SELECTOR

09/01/28 17:58:09 32SMG631_201

CONTINUED

If your vehicle does not have airconditioning, it can be installed atany time. Your dealer can install agenuine Honda climate controlsystem that meets Honda’s highquality standards and is designed toexactly fit your vehicle. Pleasecontact your dealer for moreinformation.

The engine must be running for theheater to generate hot air.

Proper use of the heating and airflowcontrol system can make the interiorcomfortable, and keep the windowsclear for the best visibility.

The direction of airflow from thevents in the centre and each cornerof the dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust the airflow from each ventin the centre and passenger’s side,move the tab in the centre of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.

The driver’s side vent can be openedand closed with the upper and lowerflaps. To open it, push in the flap. Toclose the vent, pull out the flap. Toadjust the airflow from the vent,push in the flap to open it, then movethe flap up-and-down and rotate thevent.

On vehicles without air conditioning

Vents and Heating

Features 197

Centre VentsDriver’s Side

FLAP

TABS

09/01/28 17:58:18 32SMG631_202

The passenger’s side vent can beopened and closed with the dialunderneath it.

Vents and Heating

Features198

TABPassenger’s Side

DIAL

09/01/28 17:58:23 32SMG631_203

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Turning the temperature control dialclockwise increases the temperatureof the airflow.

Select the fan speed by pressing thetop or bottom of the fan speedcontrol switch ( or ). The fanspeed is shown in vertical bars onthe display.

These two buttons control thesource of air going into the system.In fresh air mode , air comesfrom outside the vehicle. Inrecirculation mode , theinterior air recycles through thesystem.

Airflow ControlsTemperature Control Dial

Fan Control

Fresh Air and Recirculation Buttons

Vents and Heating

Features 199

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

MODE BUTTON

FAN CONTROL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/MIRROR HEATER BUTTON

FRESH AIR BUTTON

Left-hand drive type is shown.

WINDSCREENDEMISTER BUTTON

09/01/28 17:58:32 32SMG631_204

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windscreen. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode can cause the windows to fogup.

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.

This button directs the main airflowto the windscreen for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anymode selection you may have made.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode. For faster defrosting,manually set the fan speed to high.You can also increase airflow to thewindscreen by closing the side ventson the dashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor and corner vents, and thedemister vents at the base of thewindscreen.

Air flows from the centreand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flows from the floor andcorner vents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Vents and Heating

Features

Mode Button Windscreen Demister Button

200

09/01/28 17:58:45 32SMG631_205

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Press the AUTO on thetemperature control dial.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.You will see AUTO and theselected temperature in theinformation display.

The ventilation system draws inoutside air, circulates it through theinterior, then releases it throughvents near the rear window.When you turn on the rear window

demister, the heated door mirror isalso turned on automatically. Set the temperature control dial to

the lower limit.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

This button turns the rear windowdemister on and off (see page ).

The system automatically selects theproper combination of heated air andventilation to maintain the selectedtemperature. The system alsoadjusts the fan speed and airflowlevels.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

149

Features

Vents and Heating

Using the Auto HeaterVentilationRear Window Demister Button

201

09/01/28 17:58:54 32SMG631_206

If you press OFF button, the heatingand airflow control system shuts offcompletely.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Select .The system automaticallyswitches to fresh air mode.

Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

Select .

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents. Toclose the driver’s side vent, pull outthe flip, and on the passenger’s sidevent, rotate the wheel below it. Thissends more warm air to thewindscreen demister vents. Once thewindscreen is clear, select the freshair mode to avoid fogging thewindows.


To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed orhigh for faster defrosting.Select and fresh air mode.When you select , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial so the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindscreen, close the corner vents.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Vents and Heating

Features

To Turn Everything OffTo Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

To Defog and Defrost

202

09/01/28 17:59:04 32SMG631_207

On vehicles with air conditioning system

On vehicles with dual temperaturecontrol system

CONTINUED

The automatic climate controlsystem in your vehicle picks theproper combination of airconditioning, heating, and ventilationto maintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and airflow levels.

To activate the climate controlsystem, the engine must be running.

The direction of airflow from thevents in the centre and each cornerof the dashboard is adjustable.

The driver’s side vent can be openedand closed with the upper and lowerflaps. To open it, push in the flap. Toclose the vent, pull out the flap. Toadjust the airflow from the vent,push in the flap to open it, then movethe flap up-and-down and rotate thevent.

You can adjust the temperatures ofthe driver’s side and the passenger’sside independently (see page ).

In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver and passenger.

217

Climate Control System

Features 203

FLAP

Driver’s Side Vent

09/01/28 17:59:12 32SMG631_208

In addition to the standard airconditioning controls, the climatecontrol system in your vehicle can beoperated using the voice controlsystem. See the navigation systemmanual for complete details.

To adjust the airflow from each ventin the centre and passenger’s side,move the tab in the centre of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.The passenger’s side vent can beopened and closed with the dialunderneath it.

On vehicles with navigation system


Features

Voice Control System

204

Passenger’s Side VentCentre Vents TABS TAB

DIAL

09/01/28 17:59:19 32SMG631_209

CONTINUED


Features 205

09/01/28 17:59:23 32SMG631_210


Features

Without navigation system

206

Without dual temperature control system With dual temperature control system

OFF BUTTON


RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

MODE BUTTON

FRESH AIRBUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

FANCONTROL AUTO BUTTON

FANCONTROL


OFF BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEMISTER/MIRROR HEATERBUTTON

Left-hand drive types are shown.

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

WINDSCREENDEMISTER BUTTON

AIRCONDITIONINGBUTTON

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

AIRCONDITIONINGBUTTON

AUTOBUTTON


FAN CONTROL

FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

09/01/28 17:59:33 32SMG631_211

To put the automatic climate controlin fully-automatic mode:

Press the AUTO on thetemperature control dial.

Set the desired temperature byturning the temperature controldial. You will see AUTO and theselected temperature in thedisplay. On vehicles with dualtemperature control system, youcan also set the passenger’s sidetemperature.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

When the indicator in the dualbutton is on, the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature can becontrolled independently (see page

).



1.

2.

217



Features

Automatic Climate Control To Turn Everything Off

207

09/01/28 17:59:43 32SMG631_212

▲ ▼


On vehicles without dual temperaturecontrol system

The driver and passenger can selectindependent temperature settings.Press the DUAL button. When theindicator in the button is lit, turn thedial to adjust the temperature on thedriver’s side. On the Passenger’sside, press either side ( or ) ofthe temperature control button onthe front passenger’s door armrest.When the indicator is off, both sidesadjust to the same temperature.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully-automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control dial below theoutside temperature.

Turning the temperature control dialclockwise increases the temperatureof the airflow.


Features

Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Temperature Control

208

PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTON

09/01/28 17:59:52 32SMG631_213

▲ ▼




When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).



The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.


Select the fan speed by pressing thetop or bottom of the fan speedcontrol switch ( or ). The fanspeed is shown in vertical bars onthe display.

Press the DUAL button to selectdual temperature control mode (seepage ).

You can set the temperatures for thedriver’s side and the passenger’s sideseparately when this button ispressed (indicator is on). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature with the driver’sside temperature control dial.

217

CONTINUED

Recirculation Button


Fan Control

Dual Button


Features 209

09/01/28 18:00:04 32SMG631_214


When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease airflow to the windscreenby closing the corner vents on thedashboard.



This button turns the rear windowdemister off and on (see page ).

When you turn on the rear windowdemister, the heated door mirror isalso turned on automatically.

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.





149

Windscreen Demister Button Rear Window Demister ButtonMode Button


Features210

09/01/28 18:00:17 32SMG631_215

With navigation system


Features 211

Without dual temperature control system With dual temperature control system

SIDE DISPLAY CLIMATE CONTROL DISPLAY CLIMATE CONTROL DISPLAY

OFF BUTTON

FRESH AIR BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

FAN CONTROL





OFF BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/MIRROR HEATER BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON AUTO BUTTON

FANCONTROL

MODE BUTTON

FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

SIDE DISPLAY

Left-hand drive types are shown. RECIRCULATION BUTTON

WINDSCREEN DEMISTERBUTTON

09/01/28 18:00:28 32SMG631_216

If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.



In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

When the indicator in the dualbutton is on, the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature can becontrolled independently (see page

).On vehicles with dual temperaturecontrol system, you can also set thepassenger’s side temperature.

In addition to the standard airconditioning controls, the climatecontrol system in your vehicle can beoperated using the voice controlsystem. See the navigation systemmanual for complete details.

To put the automatic climate controlin fully-automatic mode:

Press the AUTO on thetemperature control dial.

Set the desired temperature byturning the temperature controldial. You will see AUTO and theselected temperature in theinformation display.

1.

2.

217


To Turn Everything Off


Features


Automatic Climate Control

212

09/01/28 18:00:40 32SMG631_217

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully-automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

When you make any manualselection, the current settings of theclimate control system appear on theupper part of the navigation display.The climate control display will gooff about 5 seconds after you stopmaking a manual selection. Toconfirm your manual selection on thenavigation display, push theCLIMATE button on the navigationcontrol panel.

You can also manually select thefunctions of the climate controlsystem on the navigation displaywith the interface dial. Each timeyou push the interface dial down, theselected mode switches between thefan control and the mode selection.In the fan control mode, turn theinterface dial to select a fan speed,and in the mode selection, turn thedial to select a mode. The selectedmode is highlighted on the screen.

Refer to page on how to movethe interface dial.

196

CONTINUED

Semi-automatic Operation


Features 213

MANUAL SELECTION

09/01/28 18:00:46 32SMG631_218

Press the CLIMATE button to viewthe climate control display. PushENT on the centre of the interfacedial to turn the air conditioning onand off. You will see A/C ON or A/COFF in the display. Pushing the A/Cbutton on the side panel also turnsthe air conditioning on and off.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control dial below theoutside temperature.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).



The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.




Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button



Features214

09/01/28 18:00:56 32SMG631_219

▲ ▼

Press the CLIMATE button to viewthe climate control display. Pushdown the selector on the interfacedial to select the fan control mode.Turning the interface dial to increaseor decrease the fan speed andairflow. The fan speed is shown invertical bars on the display. You canalso select the fan speed by pressingthe top or bottom of the fan speedcontrol switch ( or ). You can alsoselect the fan speed by turning the

interface dial.

Press the CLIMATE button to viewthe climate control display, thenselect the mode display by pushingdown the selector on the interfacedial. Turning the interface dialselects the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.

You can set the temperatures for thedriver’s side and the passenger’s sideseparately when this button ispressed (indicator is on). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature with the driver’sside temperature control dial.

CONTINUED


Fan Control Mode Control

Dual Button


Features 215

09/01/28 18:01:05 32SMG631_220



You can also use the MODE buttonon the side panel to select the vents.Each time you press the MODEbutton, the selected mode ishighlighted on the display.



This button turns the rear windowdemister off and on (see page ).

When you turn on the rear windowdemister, the heated door mirror isalso turned on automatically.


When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease airflow to the windscreenby closing the corner vents on thedashboard.



149


Features

Rear Window Demister ButtonWindscreen Demister Button

216

09/01/28 18:01:16 32SMG631_221

▲ ▼

The temperatures of the driver’s sideand the passenger’s side can becontrolled independently when theindicator in the DUAL button is on.

To adjust the driver’s side, turn thetemperature control dial on theclimate control panel. To adjust thepassenger’s side, press either side( or ) of the temperature controlbutton on the front passenger’s doorarmrest.

Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appear in the display(in the side display on vehicles withnavigation system). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature by adjusting thedriver’s temperature control dial.

CONTINUED


Features

Dual Temperature Control

Temperature Control Dials

217

Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side

09/01/28 18:01:23 32SMG631_222

▲ ▼

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s side, press the DUALbutton, then turn the temperaturecontrol dial on the control panel. Toset the passenger’s side to adifferent value than the driver’s side,press either side ( or ) of thetemperature control button on thefront passenger’s door armrest. Youcan adjust the passenger’s sidewithout pressing the DUAL buttonfirst.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit or its upper limit, it will bedisplayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.


Features218

09/01/28 18:01:27 32SMG631_223

The climate control system has twosensors: a sunlight sensor on top ofthe dashboard, and a temperatureand humidity sensor next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors


Features 219

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

09/01/28 18:01:32 32SMG631_224

The audio system is standardequipment on some models. Readthe appropriate pages as shownbelow for the operation of the audiosystem installed in your vehicle.

On vehicles without navigationsystem, see page to .

On vehicles with navigation system,see page to .

In addition to the standard audiocontrols, the audio system in yourvehicle can be operated using thevoice control system. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

221 262

263 311

On vehicles with navigation systemVoice Control System

Audio System

Features220

Without navigation system

With navigation system

Left-hand drive model is shown.

09/01/28 18:01:40 32SMG631_225

Audio System (on vehicles without navigation system)

Features

Playing the Radio

221

SCAN BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

Left-hand drive model is shown.SEEK/SKIP BAR

09/01/28 18:01:46 32SMG631_226

－

－

－The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noisereduction turns on automatically.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK bar, then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

To Play the Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN


Features222

09/01/28 18:01:54 32SMG631_227

－－

－

Select the desired band, AM, LWor FM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix frequencies each.

If you aretravelling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

Press the A. SEL button. You will seeA. SEL flashing in the display, andthe system goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. The system storesthe frequencies of 6 FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM or LW,and two frequencies on FM.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of 6 stations on each AM andLW, and 12 stations on FM.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To turn off auto select

AUTO SELECTPreset


Features 223

09/01/29 17:56:27 32SMG631_228

With Radio Data System (RDS)


Features224

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

TA/PTY BUTTON


09/01/28 18:02:09 32SMG631_229

－

－

－

－

Alternative frequency function on oroff

Regional programme on or off

Automatic traffic program on or off

News programme on or off

Program service function on or off

The RDS functions turns onautomatically when you turn thesystem on. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS stations, thefrequency is displayed in theinformation display and the stationname will be displayed in the audiodisplay. Then, the system willautomatically keep selecting thefrequency with the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry thesame programs. This can save youthe trouble of retuning to obtain the

same station as long as you are in thesame RDS network area.

You can turn on or off the RDSfunction and select the RDSprogrammes. To switch the functionand select the programme, press thepower/volume knob for more than 2seconds with the audio system on.You will hear a beep. Press any ofthe preset buttons (1 through 6) toselect the function. Each presetbutton has the following function.Pressing the preset button switchesthe function between on and off (24H and 12H on the clock mode).

With the FM band selected, you cankeep listening to the same stationeven if its frequency changes as youenter different regions while you aretravelling.

With your audio system, you canutilize many convenient featuresprovided by the radio data system(RDS).

CONTINUED

On some countriesRadio Data System (RDS) Preset 1: AF ON/OFF

Preset 2: REG ON/OFF

Preset 4 A-TP ON/OFF:

Preset 5: NEWS ON/OFF

Preset 6: CLOCK 24H/12H

Preset 3: PS ON/OFF


Features 225

09/01/28 18:02:18 32SMG631_230

－－

－

－

－

－

To turn on the RDS, select 1 AF ONby pressing the preset 1. To turn offthe RDS, select 1 AF OFF. Press thepower/volume knob again to storethe setting.

This function automatically selects afrequency with the same programmein the RDS network area.

With this function, youcan switch the clock display between24-hours and 12-hours.

When the signals of the RDS stationbecome so weak that the system canno longer follow the station, thesystem will hold the last tunedfrequency and the display willchange from the station name to thefrequency.

In some countries, you cannot utilizefeatures provided by RDS as theRDS function is not provided for allstations.

This function keeps the regionalprogramme and does not change thefrequency even if the signal becomestoo weak.

This function shows theradio station name which you arelistening to.

Thisfunction automatically tunes to theradio station which is broadcastingthe traffic information.

Thisfunction automatically tunes to theradio station which is broadcastingnewscasts.

AF (Alternative Frequency) CLOCK

REG (Regional Programme)

PS (Programme ServiceDisplay)

A-TP (Automatic TrafficInformation Programme)

NEWS (News Programme)


Features226

09/01/28 18:02:27 32SMG631_231

If the station you are listening to isan RDS station, the frequencydisplay will disappear and the stationname or PTY information will bedisplayed. Press the TA/PTY buttonfor more than 2 seconds to switchthe display between the name ofnetwork/station and the PTYinformation. For more informationon the PTY, see page .

You can receive traffic informationwhile you are listening to a disc ortape (if equipped). If the system istuned to a TP station before playinga disc or tape, the system will standby for traffic announcements withthe TA/PTY button pressed (TAindicator is on) and the system willswitch from disc or tape to the trafficannouncement when it begins. Youwill see TA-INFO in the display. Thesystem will return to the disc or tapemode when the traffic information isfinished.

When you press and release the TA/PTY button, TA comes on in thedisplay and the system stands by fortraffic announcements.

When the automatic trafficinformation program (A-TP ON) isselected, TP will come on in thedisplay. This indicates that the trafficreports can be received from thetraffic information broadcastingstation.

A-TP cross-references otherprogramme services that broadcasttraffic information, and the trafficreports can be received throughanother programme service in theRDS network area.

You can also switch to the normalaudio mode while you are listening tothe traffic information by pressingthe TA/PTY button. It does notcancel the TA standby function.

228

CONTINUED

Programme Service Name Display TA (Traffic Announcement) StandbyFunction


Features 227

09/01/28 18:02:35 32SMG631_232

To adjust the volume of the trafficannouncement, turn the power/volume knob while theannouncement is broadcasting. Theadjusted volume level will be stored,then that level will be used on thenext traffic announcement. If youadjust the volume below theminimum level, the default level(level 9) will be used the next time.The volume of the PTY NEWS orthe PTY ALARM function can alsobe adjusted (see page ).

If your vehicle’s battery goes dead,or is disconnected, the trafficannouncement volume level will bereset to the default setting (level 9).

To turn off the TA function, pressthe TA/PTY button again. TA will goout from the display.

AFFAIRS: Topical programsexpanding upon the news.

NEWS: Short accounts of facts,events, publicly expressed views,reportage, etc.

When the TA/PTY button is pressedfor more than 2 seconds until youhear a beep, the PTY displayfunction comes on. This functionshows you the program type of theselected RDS station. For example, ifthe station is broadcasting drama,DRAMA is shown in the display. If itis a station of scientific programs,SCIENCE is shown. The principalPTYs are shown as follows.

Pressing the TA/PTY button will notturn off the TA function while youare listening to the trafficinformation. It will just switch to theselected audio playing mode.

If you use seek or auto select withthe TA function on, the systemsearches only TP stations.

230


Features

PTY (Programme Type) DisplayFunction

228

09/01/28 18:02:43 32SMG631_233

INFORMATION: Generalinformation and advice.SPORT: Programmes concernedwith any aspect of sports.EDUCATION: Educationalprogrammes.DRAMA: All radio plays and serials.CULTURES: Programmesconcerned with any aspect ofnational or regional culture.SCIENCE: Programmes aboutnature, science, and technology.VARIED: Light entertainmentprogrammes.POP MUSIC: Commercial music ofpopular appeal.ROCK MUSIC: Contemporarymodern music.EASY: Light music.

CLASSICS: Traditional classics.OTHER MUSIC: Other types ofmusic, such as R & B, Reggae.WEATHER: Weather information.FINANCE: Programmes concernedwith economy.CHILDREN: Programmes forchildren.

LIGHT MUSIC: Light classics;classical music for non-specialistappreciation.

RELIGION: Programmes concernedwith religion.DOCUMENTARY: Documentaryprogrammes.LEISURE: Programmes abouthobbies and recreational activities.

SOCIAL: Social affairs programmes.FOLK MUSIC: Folk music.

OLDIES M: Oldies music, ‘‘Goldenage’’ based programmes.

NATION M: National music.COUNTRY: Country music.JAZZ MUSIC: Jazz music.

TRAVEL: Programmes concernedwith travel.

PHONE IN: Programmes consistingof listener’s message.

CONTINUED


Features 229

09/01/28 18:03:01 32SMG631_234

To activate this function, press theTA/PTY button for more than 2seconds and select NEWS. Thesystem will hold the last tuned FMstation/network PTY while you arelistening to the disc. With thisfunction on, playing disc isinterrupted and the system switchesfrom disc mode to the FM newscastwhen the newscast is broadcastingfrom the FM station.

You can change the volume level ofthe interrupted newscast. Refer topage for how to adjust thevolume level.

When the programme is changed toanother programme or thefrequency cannot be received for 10seconds due to a weak signal, thesystem will return to the disc modeautomatically.

If the selected RDS station does nottransmit PTY data, NO PTY isdisplayed. When the selected stationis not an RDS station, NO RDS isdisplayed for about 5 seconds.

The PTY setting mode is cancelled ifno further steps are taken within 5seconds after selecting the desiredPTY with the TUNE knob.

Some stations may broadcast theprogrammes with different contentsfrom their PTY code.

In the PTY search mode, the tuningstep is set to 50 kHz while searchingthe FM band. This step changes to100 kHz when the AF or TA functionis activated.

When you turn the TUNE knob, thedisplay will show different PTYs (seethe PTYs list on the previouscolumn).

After you select the desiredprogramme type, the system willsearch for a station with the samePTY code as the selectedprogramme type. When you use thisfunction for the first time, NEWSwill appear as it was preset at thefactory.After your desired PTY is displayed,press either side of the SEEK/SKIPbutton within 5 seconds. The systemwill go into the PTY search modeand search for a station of theselected PTY. If there is no stationavailable in the selected PTY, NOPTY is displayed for about 5 secondsand the PTY search mode iscancelled.

228

PTY/News Interrupt Function

Features


230

09/01/28 18:03:09 32SMG631_235

Your audio system has anotherinterrupt function (including TAfunction). The first activatedinterrupt function has priority overthe others and the indication of theother interrupt function goes out. Toactivate the other interrupt function,turn off the current interruptfunction.

PTY code ‘‘ALARM’’ is used foremergency announcements, such asnatural disasters. When this code isreceived, ‘‘ALARM’’ comes on thedisplay and the volume is changed.When the alarm is cancelled, thesystem will return to the normaloperation mode.

PTY Alarm


Features 231

09/01/28 18:03:13 32SMG631_236

－

－

－

－

－

Press the SOUND (TUNE) knobrepeatedly to display the BASS,TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, andSVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation) settings.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

This audio system has the speedsensitive volume compensation(SVC) system. There are fourcompensation levels; LOW, MID(medium), HIGH and OFF. Thesystem monitors the vehicle speedand changes the volume level as thevehicle speed goes up. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio controlpanel (see page ). The audiosystem illuminates when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, even if the radio is off.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the power/volumeknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches centre,you will see a ‘‘C’’ in the display.

Adjusts the volume levelaccording to the vehicle speed.

Adjusts the balance,or side-to-side strength of the sound.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the bass.

148

Adjusting the Sound Audio System Lighting

SVC

BALANCE

FADER

TREBLE

BASS

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC) System


Features232

09/01/28 18:03:23 32SMG631_237

Playing a Disc


Features 233

DISC SLOT SCAN BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTONCD BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

EJECT BUTTON

TUNE KNOB


POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

09/01/28 18:03:29 32SMG631_238

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA standard. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay. The numbers of the folderand track playing are shown in thedisplay on the disc player. You canselect up to 255 tracks or folders.

Video CDs and DVD discs will notwork in this unit.

The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:

Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:

Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

In a disc compressed in WMAstandard, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds the DRM file in adisc, you will see ‘‘CD FORMAT’’ inthe display for a few seconds. Thesystem searches the next availablefolder or file and plays it.

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps

Bitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsYou operate the disc player with the

same controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay. The number of the trackplaying and the elapsed time areshown in the display. You can alsoselect the displayed information withthe TITLE button (see page ).The system will continuously play adisc until you change modes.

235

To Play a Disc


Features234

09/01/28 18:03:41 32SMG631_239

＞Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes.

You cannot load and play 8-cm(3-inch) discs in this system.

The display shows the first 11characters of the selected text data(the current folder, file name, etc.).With the folder or file name, you willsee the FOLDER or TRACKindicator in the display.

When you press and release theTITLE button while a disc withouttext data is playing, you will see ‘‘NOINFO’’ on the display.

If a disc is compressed in MP3 orWMA format, you can see the foldername, the file name, the artist tag,the album tag and the track tag inthe display. Each time you press theTITLE button, the display changes.

If the text data has more than 11characters, you will see the first 10characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the displayshows the next 11 characters. Youcan see up to about 21 characters ofthe text data.

If you press and hold the TITLEbutton again, the display shows thefirst 11 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.

When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

If a disc (CD-DA) has text data, youcan see the disc name, the trackname, and the artist tag in thedisplay. Each time you press theTITLE button, the display changes.

CONTINUED

To Load a Disc TITLE Button


Features 235

09/01/28 18:03:50 32SMG631_240

－

－

In MP3 or WMA modeTo

select a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right until it clicksonce to skip to the next folder, and tothe left to move to the beginning ofthe current folder. Turn it again toskip to the beginning of the previousfolder. Turning the TUNE knobmore than two clicks skips severalfolders.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use theTUNE knob to select folders in thedisc and use the SEEK/SKIP bar tochange files.

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA mode).Press and release the side toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track or file,press and hold the or sideof the SEEK/SKIP bar.

You will also see the text data in thefollowing conditions.

When the folder or the file ischanged.

When you change the audio modeto play discs in MP3 or WMA andthe system begins to play.

When you insert a disc with textdata or compressed in MP3 orWMA, and the system begins toplay.

The display can show you up to the11 characters at a time, butdepending on the letter size, youmay not see all 11 characters.

When you turn on the audio systemnext time, the system keeps yourselection with the TITLE button.

FOLDER SELECTION

SEEK/SKIP

To Change or Select Tracks/Files


Features236

09/01/28 18:04:00 32SMG631_241

－－－

CONTINUED

In MP3 or WMA modeTo continuously replay

a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see RPT in the display.Press and hold the RPT button toturn it off.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar also turns off the repeatfeature.

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3 orWMA. To activate folder repeatmode, press the RPT buttonrepeatedly. You will see F-RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current folder. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.Pressing the RDM button, orselecting a different folder with theTUNE knob also turns off the repeatfeature.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal play.

This feature plays thetracks (all files in each holder inMP3 or WMA mode) within a disc inrandom order. To activate randomplay, press and release the RDMbutton repeatedly. In MP3 or WMAmode, press the RDM buttonrepeatedly to select Within a DiscRandom Play. You will see RDM inthe display. Press the RDM buttonagain to return to normal play.


Features

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT) FOLDER-REPEAT

RANDOM (Random within adisc)

237

09/01/28 18:04:06 32SMG631_242

－－

－

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal play.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom Folder Random Play to Withina Disc Random Play, then to normalplaying.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar also turns off the scanfeature.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within a folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed in MP3 or WMA. Toactivate folder random play, pressthe RDM button. You will seeF-RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play bypressing and holding the RDMbutton, or you select a differentfolder with the TUNE knob.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc (all files in the selected folder inMP3 or WMA mode). To activate thescan feature, press and hold theSCAN button until you hear a beep.You will see SCAN in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach track/file on the disc/folder.Press and hold the SCAN button toget out of scan mode and play thelast track sampled.

This feature, whenactivated, samples all the first files ineach folder on the disc in therecorded order from the mainfolders. To activate the folder scanfeature, press and release the SCANbutton repeatedly. You will seeF-SCAN in the display. The systemwill then play the first file in thehighest level folder for about 10seconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then play the followingfirst files for 10 seconds each. Whenit plays a file that you want tocontinue listening to, press theSCAN button again.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE knob alsoturns off the scan feature.

In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode


Features

FOLDER-RANDOMSCAN

F-SCAN

238

09/01/28 18:04:14 32SMG631_243

－＋

－＋

CONTINUED

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the disc player.

To play the tape when a disc isplaying, insert a tape in the player(optional). If a tape is in the player,press the AUX button. Press the CDbutton again to switch back to thedisc player.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

An optional six disc changer isavailable for your vehicle. This discchanger uses the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc player or theradio.

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the disc changer, press theCD/AUX button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 1(DISC ) button or the preset 2(DISC ) button. To select theprevious disc, press the preset 1(DISC ), or the preset 2 (DISC )to select the next disc in sequence.


Features

To Stop Playing a Disc Operating the Optional DiscChanger

239

09/01/28 18:04:23 32SMG631_244

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay. An MD player or changer is available

for your vehicle as optionalequipment. This MD player/changeruses the same controls used for thein-dash disc player or the radio.Follow the instructions that camewith the unit.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.312


Features

Operating the Optional MDPlayer/Changer(For some types)

Protecting Discs

240

09/01/28 18:04:28 32SMG631_245

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

ErrorMessage

Cause Solution

313

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information, see page 313.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.For more information, see page 313.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.


Features

Disc Player Error Messages

241

09/01/28 18:04:37 32SMG631_246




SolutionCauseErrorMessage

313

Press the magazine eject button and pull it out.If the message does not disappear or themagazine cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.Press the magazine eject button and pull it out.Check for an error message, and insert themagazine again. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error


Features

Optional Disc Changer ErrorMessages

242

CDC ERROR

09/01/28 18:04:45 32SMG631_247

(For some types)Playing an iPod


Features 243

SCAN BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

SKIP BAR

TUNE KNOB

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON


09/01/28 18:04:51 32SMG631_248

＊

＊

The audio system reads and playsplayable sound files on the iPod. Thesystem cannot operate an iPod as amass storage device. The system willonly play songs stored on the iPodwith iTunes.

iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

This audio system can operate theaudio files on the iPod with the samecontrols used for the disc player. Toplay an iPod, connect it to the USBadapter cable equipped with yourvehicle by using your dock connector,then press the CD/AUX button. Theignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.The iPod can also be recharged withthe ignition switch in these positions.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest firmware. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit. For more information, consultyour dealer.

Use the latest firmware.:

ModeliPod 5GiPod classiciPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod touchiPhone

FirmwareVer. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.0 or moreVer. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or moreVer. 1.1.1 or more


Features

To Play an iPod

244

09/01/29 17:56:37 32SMG631_249

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

In AAC format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, theaudio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,and then skips to the next file.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

Open the lid of the USB adaptercable socket. Insert the USBadapter cable connector into itsecurely.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Connecting an iPod


Features 245

NOTE:DOCK CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB ADAPTER CABLE SOCKET

09/01/28 18:05:10 32SMG631_250

＊

＊

＞

Each time you press the TITLEbutton the display mode switchesbetween the album name, the songname, the artist name, or name off(which turns off the text display).

When the iPod is connected and theiPod mode is selected on the audiodisplay, ‘‘iPod’’ is shown in thedisplay. After loading, you will seeHonda mark on the iPod. Thatmeans the operation is allowed onlywith the vehicle’s audio unit controls.

The display may be changeddepending on models orfirmware versions.

If ‘‘iPod’’ does not appear in the audiodisplay, check the connections, andtry to reconnect the iPod a few times.

If the system still does not recognizethe iPod, it may need resetting.Disconnect the iPod and reset itfollowing the iPod’s instructions.

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when the display on the iPodallows to disconnect it. Alwaysconfirm the notice on the iPod whento disconnect it and make sure tofollow the maker’s instructions todisconnect the dock connector fromthe USB adapter cable.

The display shows up to 11characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 11characters, you will see the first 10characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 11characters are shown.

:

Text Data Display Function


Features246

Sample Display

OK to disconnect.

09/01/28 18:05:19 32SMG631_251

－

CONTINUED

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod isplaying to select passages andchange files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP bar,the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press andrelease the side of the bar, toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current file. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SKIP bar.

After making a selection, wait for afew seconds until the display returnsto the previous screen. The iPodmenu is set. Pressing the TUNEknob cancels this setting modebefore returning to the normaldisplay.

Turn the TUNE knob to select anitem. After making a selection, waitfor a few seconds until the displayreturns to the previous screen. Thesystem will then play the first file onthe selected item.

If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.

You can also select a file from anylist on the iPod menu: playlists,artists, albums and songs, by usingthe TUNE knob. Push the TUNEknob to switch the display to an iPodmenu, then turn the TUNE knob toselect a desired list.


Features

To Change or Select Files To Select a File from iPod Menu

SKIP

247

Press the TUNEknob.

09/01/28 18:05:28 32SMG631_252

－

－

－

You can select any type of repeat andshuffle modes by using the RPT andRDM buttons.

To continuously replaya song, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press it again to turn it off.

Press andrelease the RDM button to play thesongs in random order. You will seeRDM in the display. Press and holdthe RDM button to return to normalplay.

This feature,when activated, plays all songs ineach album in random order. Toactivate shuffle album, press theRDM button twice. You will see F-RDM in the display. Press andrelease the RDM button to return tonormal play.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.

Features


To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:

REPEAT

SHUFFLE ALL

SHUFFLE ALBUM

248

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:05:34 32SMG631_253

Disconnect the dock connector ofthe iPod from the USB adapter cable.Make sure to follow the maker’sinstructions to disconnect it.

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton. Press the CD/AUX button toswitch to the disc mode (if a disc isloaded). Press the CD/AUX buttonagain to switch back to the iPodmode.

If you reconnect the same iPod, theaudio unit may begin playing whereit left off, depending on the iPodspecification.

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .250

Features


To Stop Playing Your iPod iPod Error Messages

249

09/01/28 18:05:40 32SMG631_254

If there is a problem with your iPod,an error message will appear. Thechart on the right explains the errormessages you may see. Disconnectthe iPod, and reconnect it. If there isstill a problem, the error messagewill reappear. Take your vehicle to adealer.

ErrorMessage

Cause Solution

USB ROM Error

Abnormal power source

No files in iPod

Use of unsupported iPod

Recognition failure ofiPod

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.Appears when the overcurrent protectionfeature of the system stops supplying power toUSB because an incompatible device isconnected. Disconnect the device. Then, turnthe audio system off, and turn it on again. Donot reconnect the device that caused the error.Appears when the iPod is empty. Store somefiles in the iPod.Appears when an unsupported iPod isconnected. See page 244 for the specificationinformation for iPods. If it appears when asupported iPod is connected, update the iPodfirmware to the newer version.Appears when the system does notacknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

iPod Error Messages


Features250

USB ERROR

BAD USB

NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

CHECK USB

09/01/28 18:05:46 32SMG631_255

(For some types)Playing a USB Flash Memory Device

Features


251

SCAN BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

SKIP BAR

TUNE KNOB

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON


09/01/28 18:05:52 32SMG631_256

＊

＊

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher. Some digital audio playersmay be compatible as well.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are:

This audio system can operate theaudio files on the USB flash memorydevice with the same controls usedfor the disc player. To play a USBflash memory device, connect it tothe USB adapter cable equipped withyour vehicle, then press the CD/AUX button. The ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.


Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit. For more information,consult your dealer.

:


To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Features252

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:06:02 32SMG631_257

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－CONTINUED

Maximum layers: 8

Supported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LC

Bitrate:48 320 kbps

The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:

Maximum layers: 8


Bitrate:48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.


Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio Layer3

Maximum layers: 8

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

Partition:Top partition only


Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9Partition:Top partition only

Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz


Even if recorded in MP3, WMA orAAC format, a file with unsupportedversion cannot be played. If thesystem finds it, the audio unitdisplays UNPLAYABLE, and thenskips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE, and then skips tothe next file.

Features


253

09/01/28 18:06:19 32SMG631_258

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Make sure to followthe USB flash memory device’sinstructions when you remove it.

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.


When the USB flash memory deviceis connected, ‘‘USB’’ is shown in thedisplay.

1. 2.


Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Features254

USB ADAPTER CABLEUSB ADAPTER CABLE SOCKET

09/01/28 18:06:26 32SMG631_259

－

－

＞

CONTINUED

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display shows you thetext data (folder, file, artist, album ortrack name) on a file.

The display shows up to 11characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 11characters, you will see the first 10characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 11characters are shown.


Use the SKIP bar while a USB flashmemory device is playing to selectpassages and change files.


Toselect a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right until it clicksonce to skip to the next folder, and tothe left to move to the beginning ofthe current folder. Turn it again toskip to the beginning of the previousfolder. Turning the TUNE knobmore than two clicks skips severalfolders.

Features


Text Data Display Function To Change or Select Files

SKIP

FOLDER SELECTION

255

09/01/28 18:06:34 32SMG631_260

－－－

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal play.

To continuously replayan MP3, WMA, or AAC file, pressand release the RPT button. You willsee RPT in the display. Press andhold the RPT button to return tonormal play.


This feature plays thetracks within a USB flash memorydevice in random order. To activaterandom play, press and release theRDM button repeatedly. You will seeRDM in the display. Press the RDMbutton again to return to normal play.

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3, WMA,or AAC. To activate folder repeatmode, press the RPT buttonrepeatedly. You will see F-RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current folder. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.Pressing the RDM button, orselecting a different folder with theTUNE knob also turns off the repeatfeature.

REPEAT RANDOMFOLDER-REPEAT


Features256

09/01/28 18:06:39 32SMG631_261

－－－

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE knob alsoturns off the scan feature.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal play.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom Folder Random Play to Withina Disc Random Play, then to normalplaying.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the USBflash memory device in the orderthey are recorded on USB flashmemory device. To activate the scanfeature, press the SCAN button untilyou hear a beep. You will see SCANin the display. You will get a 10second sampling of each track. Pressand hold the SCAN button to get outof scan mode and play the last tracksampled.


This feature, whenactivated, samples all the first files ineach folder on the USB flashmemory device in the recordedorder from the main folders. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press and release the SCAN buttonrepeatedly. You will see F-SCAN inthe display. The system will thenplay the first file in the highest levelfolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then playthe following first files for 10seconds each. When it plays a filethat you want to continue listening to,press the SCAN button again.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within a folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed in MP3, WMA, or AAC.To activate folder random play, pressthe RDM button. You will seeF-RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play bypressing and holding the RDMbutton, or you select a differentfolder with the TUNE knob.


Features

SCAN F-SCANFOLDER-RANDOM

257

09/01/28 18:06:47 32SMG631_262

Disconnect the USB flash memorydevice. On some devices, follow themaker’s instructions to disconnectthe device.

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton. Press the CD/AUX button toswitch to the disc mode (if a disc isloaded). Press the CD/AUX buttonagain to switch back to the USBmode.

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .259


Features

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

258

09/01/28 18:06:52 32SMG631_263

If there is a problem with your USBflash memory device, an errormessage will appear. The chart onthe right explains the errormessages you may see. Disconnectthe USB flash memory device, andreconnect it. If there is still aproblem, the error message willreappear. Take your vehicle to adealer.

ErrorMessage

Cause Solution

USB ROM Error


Use of unsupported files

No files in USB flashmemory device

Use of unsupported USBflash memory device

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.Appears when the overcurrent protectionfeature of the system stops supplying power toUSB because an incompatible device isconnected. Disconnect the device. Then, turnthe audio system off, and turn it on again. Donot reconnect the device that caused the error.Appears when the files in the USB flashmemory device are DRM or an unsupportedformat. This error message appears for about 3seconds, then plays the next song.Appears when the USB flash memory device isempty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC filesin the USB flash memory device. Save someMP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flashmemory device.Appears when an unsupported device isconnected. See page 252 for the specificationinformation for the USB flash memory device.If it appears when the supported device isconnected, reconnect the device.


Features


259

USB ERROR

BAD USB

UNPLAYABLE

NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

09/01/28 18:06:57 32SMG631_264

Playing a Tape (Optional for some types)


Features260

REPEAT BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR


09/01/28 18:07:02 32SMG631_265

△－

＊

＊

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Make sure the open side of the tapeis facing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator comeson to show you which side of thetape is playing. The indicates theside you inserted upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, press the preset 5 ( )button. When the player reaches theend of the tape, it will automaticallyreverse direction and play the otherside.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will come on in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing theNR button. Dolby remains off untilyou press the NR button again.

To remove the tape, press the ejectbutton on the tape player. If youwant to turn the player off, press thepower/volume knob or turn off theignition switch. The tape will remainin the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the tape player willbe in pause mode. Press the preset 5( ) button to resume play.

To switch to the radio or disc playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM or CD/AUX button. Tochange back to the tape player, pressthe CD/AUX button again.

You can remove the tape with theignition switch in any position, evenif the audio system is off.

To rewind the tape,push the preset 4 ( ) button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push thepreset 6 ( ) button. You will seeFF displayed. Press the preset 4, 5,or 6 button to take the system out ofrewind or fast forward.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

CONTINUED

To Play a Tape

To Stop Playing a Tape

FF/REWTape Search Functions

(Optional for some types)


Features 261

09/01/28 18:07:12 32SMG631_266

－

－

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam in the drive.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

Never try to insert a foreign objectinto the tape player.

Press the side of theSEEK/SKIP bar to find thebeginning of the current song orpassage. Press the side to findthe beginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.

The skip and repeatfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

Caring for the Tape PlayerSKIP

REPEAT


Features262

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:07:20 32SMG631_267

In addition to the standard audiocontrols, the audio system in yourvehicle can be operated using thevoice control system. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

Playing the RadioVoice Control System

Audio System (on vehicles with navigation system)

Features 263

SIDE DISPLAY AUDIO DISPLAY

PRESET BUTTONS

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB


AUDIO BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

TUNE BAR

09/01/28 18:07:28 32SMG631_268

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

Pushing the AUDIO button on thecontrol panel will also turn on thesystem.

You can operate the audio systemwith the control buttons on the audiopanel without displaying the audiocontrol display on the navigationscreen. The audio setting will beshown in the side display. When thenavigation system is activated, youwill also see the audio setting on theside display.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.On the audio control display of thenavigation system and the sidedisplay, the broadcasting stationname may also be displayed if theRDS is turned on (see page ).

To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton, or push up the selector onthe interface dial. Each time youpress the button or push up theselector, the band will change toFM1, FM2, AM (MW) and LW. Onthe FM band, STEREO will be

displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo (you will seeST on the side display).

Stereo reproduction on AM is notavailable. On the AM band, AMnoise reduction turns onautomatically.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

On the audio display of thenavigation screen, you can scroll thedisplay and enter the setting with theinterface dial. You will see theindicator , , , or

on the lower display. Thisindicates the direction to move theselector on the interface dial. For theinformation of how to use theinterface dial, see page .196

268

To Play the Radio

To Select a Station


Features264

09/01/28 18:07:37 32SMG631_269

－

－

▲▼

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and release the or

side of the SEEK bar. With theinterface dial, push the selector tothe right or to the left.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and theside to tune to a lower frequency.

To tune the radio with the interfacedial, push the selector down, thenturn the dial to select the tune mode.Press the ENT on the interface dial,then turn the selector to the desiredfrequency. To exit the tune mode,press the ENT on the interface dial.

CONTINUED

SEEK

TUNE


Features 265

09/01/28 18:07:43 32SMG631_270

－

－

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again or pushthe selector on the interface dial tothe right again.

Each preset button/iconcan store one frequency on AM(MW) and LW, and two frequencieson FM. To view the presetfrequencies, push the AUDIO button.

To store the frequency on a preseticon, push the AUDIO button to viewthe audio control display, then turnthe interface dial to select a desiredpreset icon. The selected preset iconwill be highlighted. Press and holdthe ENT on the dial for more than 2seconds to enter the setting.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of 6 stations on AM (MW)and LW, and 12 stations on FM.

Select the desired band, AM(MW), LW or FM. FM1 and FM2let you store two frequencies witheach the preset button.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.With the interface dial, push theselector down, then push it to theright to select the scan mode.

The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.Preset

SCAN


Features266

09/01/28 18:07:52 32SMG631_271

－ If you aretravelling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

Press the A.SEL button on the audiocontrol panel. You will see A. SEL onthe side display, and the system goesinto the scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix FM stations in the presetbuttons/icons.

To activate the auto select with theinterface dial, press the AUDIObutton to view the audio controldisplay, then push down theinterface dial, then turn it to selectA. SEL icon. Press the ENT on thedial to enter the setting. You will seeAUTO SEL flashing in the display,and the system goes into scan modefor several seconds.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

press theA.SEL button or the ENT on theinterface dial. This restores thepresets you originally set.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

To turn off auto select,

AUTO SELECT


Features 267

09/01/28 18:07:57 32SMG631_272

The RDS function turns onautomatically when you turn thesystem on. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, thefrequency is displayed in the sidedisplay, and the station name will bedisplayed in the audio display on thenavigation screen.

With the FM band selected, you cankeep listening to the same stationeven if its frequency changes as youenter different regions while you aretravelling.

With your audio system, you canutilize many convenient featuresprovided by the radio data system(RDS).

On some countriesRadio Data System (RDS)With Radio Data System (RDS)


Features268

INTERFACE DIAL

AUDIO BUTTON

TA/PTY BUTTON

09/01/28 18:08:06 32SMG631_273

Press the ENT on the dial to enterthe RDS setting. You will see the sixselectable RDS settings on thedisplay. Turn the interface dial toselect any of the RDS functions, thenpress the ENT on the dial to enteryour setting.

Selectable settings are described asfollows. Pushing the selector orturning the dial to the left or rightswitches the function between onand off.

Then, the system will automaticallykeep selecting the frequency withthe strongest signal from thefrequencies that carry the sameprogrammes. This can save you thetrouble of retuning to obtain thesame station as long as you are in thesame RDS network area.

You can turn the RDS function on oroff and select the RDS programmes.To use the function and select theprogramme, press the AUDIObutton on the control panel to viewthe audio display. Push down theselector on the interface dial, thenturn the dial to select RDS.

CONTINUED


Features 269

RDS SETTING

TA ON is selected.

09/01/28 18:08:12 32SMG631_274

－

－

－

－

－

Alternative frequencyfunction on or off

News programmeon or off

Trafficannouncement on or off

Regionalprogramme on or off

Programme servicefunction on or off

Automatic trafficprogramme on or off

This function automatically selects afrequency with the same programmein the RDS network area.

Thisfunction automatically tunes to theradio station which is broadcastingnewscasts.

This function will makethe system stand by for trafficannouncements. This function canalso be turned on or off by pressingthe TA/PTY button on the audiocontrol panel.

To turn on the RDS, select AF ONby turning the interface dial. To turnoff the RDS, select AF OFF. Pressthe ENT on the interface dial tostore the setting.

This function keeps the regionalprogramme and does not change thefrequency even if the signal becomestoo weak.

This function shows the radiostation name which you are listeningto.

AF ON/OFF:

NEWS ON/OFF:

TA ON/OFF:

REG ON/OFF:

PS ON/OFF:

A-TP ON/OFF:

AF (Alternative Frequency)

NEWS (News Programme)

TA (Traffic AnnouncementStandby)

REG (Regional Programme)

PS (Programme Service Display)


Features270

AF ON

09/01/28 18:08:22 32SMG631_275

－ Thisfunction automatically tunes to theradio station which is broadcastingthe traffic information.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop selecting the function. Pushingdown the selector also cancels thisselecting mode.

When the signals of the RDS stationbecome so weak that the system canno longer follow the station, thesystem will hold the last tunedfrequency and the display willchange from the station name to thefrequency.

When you press and release the TA/PTY button on the audio controlpanel, TA comes on in the displayand the system stands by for trafficannouncements.

When the automatic trafficinformation program (A-TP ON) isselected, TP will come on in thedisplay. This indicates that the trafficreports can be received from thetraffic information broadcasting

station.

A-TP cross-references otherprogramme services that broadcasttraffic information, and the trafficreports can be received throughanother programme service in theRDS network area.

In some countries, you cannot utilizefeatures provided by RDS as theRDS function is not provided for allstations.

If the station you are listening to isan RDS station, the frequencydisplay will disappear and the stationname or PTY information will bedisplayed. Press the TA/PTY buttonfor more than 2 seconds to switchthe display between the name ofnetwork/station and the PTYinformation. For more informationon the PTY, see page .

You can receive traffic informationwhile you are listening to a disc ortape (if equipped). If the system istuned to a TP station before playinga disc or tape, the system will standby for traffic announcements bypressing the TA/PTY button (TAindicator is on) and the system willswitch from disc or tape to the trafficannouncement when it begins. Youwill also see ‘‘TA INFO’’ in thedisplay. The system will return to thedisc or tape mode when the trafficinformation is finished.

272

CONTINUED

A-TP (Automatic TrafficInformation Programme)

Programme Service Name Display

TA (Traffic Announcement) StandbyFunction


Features 271

09/01/28 18:08:32 32SMG631_276

Press the AUDIO button on thecontrol panel to view the audiodisplay on the navigation screen,then push down the selector on theinterface dial to select the functiondisplay. Turn the dial to select thePTY, then press the ENT on theinterface dial.

To adjust the volume of the trafficannouncement, turn the power/volume knob while theannouncement is broadcasting. Theadjusted volume level will be stored,then that level will be used on thenext traffic announcement. Youcannot adjust the volume below theminimum level. The volume of thePTY NEWS or the PTY ALARMfunction can also be adjusted (seepage ).

You can also switch to the normalaudio mode while you are listening tothe traffic information by pressingthe TA/PTY button. It does notcancel the TA standby function.

If your vehicle’s battery goes dead,or is disconnected, the trafficannouncement volume level will bereset to the default setting (level 9).

To turn off the TA function, pressthe TA/PTY button again. TA will go

out from the display. You can alsoturn the TA function on or off on theaudio display on the navigationscreen (see page ).

Pressing the TA/PTY button will notturn off the TA function while youare listening to the trafficinformation. It will just switch to theselected audio playing mode.

If you use seek or auto select withthe TA function on, the systemsearches only TP stations.

This function shows you theprogramme type of the selected RDSstation. For example, if the station isbroadcasting drama, DRAMA isshown in the display. If it is a stationof scientific programmes, SCIENCEis shown. The principal PTYs areshown on page .

276

269

274

PTY (Programme Type) DisplayFunction


Features272

09/01/28 18:08:40 32SMG631_277

You will see the PTY setting: Groupand List. You can select the desiredPTY program either of the group orthe list. Select the setting by turningthe interface dial or pushing theselector to the right or left.

When the TA/PTY button on theaudio control panel is pressed formore than 2 seconds, the PTYdisplay function also comes on.

Select the list or group mode, thenpress the ENT on the interface dialto enter the setting. You will see theselectable items on the display. Pushthe selector up to move to the nextdisplay, and down to go back to theprevious display. Turn the interfacedial to select the desired PTYprogram. Press the ENT on the dialto enter your selection.

CONTINUED


Features 273

LIST MODE GROUP MODE

09/01/28 18:08:48 32SMG631_278

CURRENT AFFAIRS: Topicalprogrammes expanding upon thenews.

ROCK MUSIC: Contemporarymodern music.EASY LISTENING: Light music.LIGHT CLASSICS M: Light classics;classical music for non-specialistappreciation.SERIOUS CLASSICS: Traditionalclassics.

WEATHER/METR: Weatherinformation.FINANCE: Programmes concernedwith economy.CHILDREN’S PROGS: Programmesfor children.PHONE IN: Programmes consistingof listener’s message.TRAVEL/TOURING: Programmesconcerned with travel.

The principal PTYs are shown asfollows.

OTHER MUSIC: Other types ofmusic, such as R & B, Reggae.

NEWS: Short accounts of facts,events, publicly expressed views,reportage, etc.

JAZZ MUSIC: Jazz music.COUNTRY: Country music.NATION M: National music.OLDIES M: Oldies music, ‘‘Goldenage’’ based programmes.FOLK MUSIC: Folk music.SOCIAL: Social affairs programmes.RELIGION: Programmes concernedwith religion.DOCUMENTARY: Documentaryprogrammes.LEISURE: Programmes abouthobbies and recreational activities.

POP MUSIC: Commercial music ofpopular appeal.

VARIED SPEECH: Lightentertainment programmes.

SCIENCE: Programmes aboutnature, science, and technology.

CULTURES: Programmesconcerned with any aspect ofnational or regional culture.

DRAMA: All radio plays and serials.

EDUCATION: Educationalprogrammes.

SPORT: Programmes concernedwith any aspect of sports.

INFORMATION: Generalinformation and advice.


Features274

09/01/28 18:09:06 32SMG631_279

INFORMATION: Generalinformation and advice.CULTURE: Programmes concernedwith any aspect of national orregional culture.VARIED: Light entertainmentprogrammes.POP MUSIC: Commercial music ofpopular appeal.CLASSICS: Traditional classics.OTHER MUSIC: Other types ofmusic, such as R & B, Reggae.

After you select the desiredprogramme type, the system willsearch for a station with the samePTY code as the selectedprogramme type. When you use thisfunction for the first time, NEWSwill appear as it was preset at thefactory.

The PTY setting mode is cancelled ifno further steps are taken within 5seconds after selecting the desiredPTY with the interface dial.

Some stations may broadcast theprogrammes with different contentsfrom their PTY code.

In the PTY search mode, the tuningstep is set to 50 kHz while searchingthe FM band. This step changes to100 kHz when the AF or TA functionis activated.

After your desired PTY is displayed,press either side of the SEEK/SKIPbar within 5 seconds. The systemwill go into the PTY search modeand search for a station of theselected PTY. If there is no stationavailable in the selected PTY, NOPTY is displayed for about 5 secondsand the PTY search mode iscancelled.

If the selected RDS station does nottransmit PTY data, NO PTY isdisplayed. When the selected stationis not an RDS station, NO RDS isdisplayed for about 5 seconds.

CONTINUED

PTY Group


Features 275

09/01/28 18:09:17 32SMG631_280

To activate this function, press theAUDIO button on the control panelto view the audio display on thenavigation screen, then push downthe selector on the interface dial toselect the function display. Turn thedial to select the PTY, then press theENT on the interface dial.

The PTY display function also comeson by pressing and holding the TA/PTY button on the audio controlpanel for more than 2 seconds.

Turn the interface dial to selectNEWS, then press the ENT to enterthe selection. Push the selector orturn the dial to select ON, then pressthe ENT to enter the setting. Youwill see NEWS in the audio displayand the side display.

The system will hold the last tunedFM station/network PTY while youare listening to the disc. With thisfunction on, playing disc isinterrupted and the system switchesfrom disc mode to the FM newscastwhen the newscast is broadcastingfrom the FM station.

You can change the volume level ofthe interrupted newscast. Refer topage for how to adjust thevolume level.

When the programme is changed toanother programme or thefrequency cannot be received for 10seconds due to a weak signal, thesystem will return to the disc modeautomatically.

Your audio system has anotherinterrupt function (including TAfunction). The first activatedinterrupt function has priority overthe others and the indication of theother interrupt function goes out. Toactivate the other interrupt function,turn off the current interruptfunction.

PTY code ‘‘ALARM’’ is used foremergency announcements, such asnatural disasters. When this code isreceived, ‘‘ALARM’’ comes on thedisplay and the volume is changed.When the alarm is cancelled, thesystem will return to the normaloperation mode.

272

PTY/News Interrupt Function

PTY Alarm


Features276

09/01/28 18:09:25 32SMG631_281

－

－

－

－

You can adjust the sound on thenavigation screen. To adjust thesound, push the AUDIO button onthe control panel, then push downthe selector. Turn the interface dialto select the (sound mode),then press the ENTER on the dial toenter the sound grid.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

To adjust each setting, turn theinterface dial to select the settingyou want to adjust, then press theENT on the dial. The current settingis shown on the display.

CONTINUED

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

Adjusting the Sound


Features 277

09/01/28 18:09:34 32SMG631_282

－

In balance and fader setting, theright lower display shows you thecurrent setting of the sound strengthcoming from each speaker. In bassand treble setting, the display showsyou the setting with the vertical bars.

Turn the interface dial to the right orthe left to adjust the sound level,then press ENT to enter your setting.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio controlpanel and the side display (see page

). The audio system illuminateswhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, even if the radiois off.

Adjusts the volume levelaccording to the vehicle speed.

This audio system has the speedsensitive volume compensation(SVC) system. There are fourcompensation levels; LOW, MID(medium), HIGH and OFF. Thesystem monitors the vehicle speedand changes the volume level as thevehicle speed goes up. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

To select any of the four settings,turn the interface dial to select SVC,then press the ENT on the dial. Thecurrent setting is shown on thedisplay. Turn the interface dial to theright or the left to select the setting,then press the ENT to enter it.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

148

Audio System Lighting

SVC

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC) System


Features278

09/01/28 18:09:41 32SMG631_283

Playing a Disc


Features 279

SIDE DISPLAYAUDIO DISPLAY

EJECT BUTTONCD BUTTON

To select REPEAT, RANDOM, SCAN, SOUND

REPEAT BUTTON

TUNE BAR

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

SEEK/SKIP BAR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

DISC SLOT


TITLE BUTTON

09/01/28 18:09:48 32SMG631_284

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toload or play discs, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.


This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA standard. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ on the audio display and theside display. In WMA format,‘‘WMA’’ will appear on each display.You can select a folder up to 99 andplay a track up to 255. If the disc hasa complex structure, it will be a whileto read the disc before the systembegins to play it.

Video CDs and DVD discs will notwork in this unit.


In a disc compressed in WMAstandard, the DRM (digital rightsmanagement) file cannot be played.If the system finds the DRM file in adisc, you will see ‘‘CD FORMAT’’ inthe display for a few seconds. Thesystem searches the next availablefolder or file and plays it.

Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers


Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-session

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bitrateand multi-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

To Play a Disc


Features280

09/01/28 18:09:58 32SMG631_285

－

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it.

You cannot load and play 8-cm(3-inch) discs in this system.

When playing a CD with data text,the track and album titles are alsoshown. When playing a disc in MP3or WMA, the album name, the filenumber and name, the foldernumber and name, and the elapsedtime are shown. The system willcontinuously play a disc until youchange modes. If the disc was notrecorded with this information, it willnot be displayed.

When Playing a CD without data text,the number of the track playing andthe elapsed time are shown in thedisplay.

You can operate the audio systemwith the control buttons on the audiopanel without displaying the audiocontrol display on the navigationscreen. The audio setting will beshown in the side display. When thenavigation system is activated, youwill also see the audio setting on theside display.

Press the AUDIO button on thecontrol panel to show the audiodisplay of the navigation screen. Youcan scroll the display and enter thesetting with the interface dial. Youwill see the indicator , ,

, or on the lower display.This indicates the direction to movethe selector on the interface dial. Forthe information of how to use theinterface dial, see page .

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use theTUNE bar to select folders in thedisc and use the SEEK/SKIP bar tochange files.

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA mode).Press and release the side, toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track or file,press and hold the or sideof the SEEK/SKIP bar.

196

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/FilesTo Load a Disc

SEEK/SKIP


Features 281

09/01/28 18:10:08 32SMG631_286

－

▲▼

On the track list, a track name willnot be displayed if the disc doesn’thave the text data. In this case, onlythe track number is displayed.

To exit the track list, press theAUDIO button.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipto the next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of the currentfolder. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

You can also select a track from thetrack list on the audio display. Pressthe AUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push up the selector onthe interface dial to select the tracklist. The current track is highlighted.To select a track, turn the interfacedial, then press the ENT on the dialto enter your selection.

Using the interface dial, you can seethe list of all the files and folderswithin a disc. While playing an MP3/WMA disc, press the AUDIO button.The currently playing folder and fileinformation comes on the screen.

In MP3 or WMA mode

Using a Track List

FOLDER SELECTION


Features282

09/01/28 18:10:16 32SMG631_287

CONTINUED

Push up the selector on the interfacedial to show the folder list. Turn theknob on the interface dial, highlightthe folder you want to see theinformation within, and press ENTon the dial.

You can see the list of all the files inthe selected folder. Turn the knobon the interface dial, then press ENTon the dial to set your selection.

If the root folder has some additionalfolders in the lower layer, they willbe listed on the screen.


Features 283

CURRENT FOLDER

CURRENT TRACK

09/01/28 18:10:23 32SMG631_288

－－


To continuously replaya track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see RPT in the side display.Press and hold the RPT button againto turn it off.

You can also select the repeatfunction on the audio display. Pressthe AUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Turn theinterface dial to select the trackrepeat. Press the ENT on the dial toenter your selection. You will seeTRACK REPEAT on the display. Toturn off this feature, select the trackrepeat as previously described, thenpress the ENT again. Pressing theRPT button on the control panelrepeatedly also cancels this function.

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3 orWMA. To activate folder repeatmode, press the RPT buttonrepeatedly. You will see F-RPT in theside display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE bar also turnsoff the repeat feature.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal playing.

In MP3 or WMA mode

Features


REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT) FOLDER-REPEAT

284

09/01/28 18:10:30 32SMG631_289

－

－

You can also select the folder repeatfunction on the audio display. Pressthe AUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Turn theinterface dial to select the folderrepeat. Press the ENT on the dial toenter your selection. You will seeFOLDER REPEAT on the display.To turn off this feature, select thefolder repeat as previously described,then press the ENT again. Pressingthe RPT button on the control panel

repeatedly also cancels this function.

This feature plays thetracks (all files in each folder in MP3or WMA mode) within a disc inrandom order.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within a folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed in MP3 or WMA. Toactivate Folder Random play, pressthe AUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Turn theinterface dial to select the folderrandom. Press the ENT on the dialto enter your selection. You will seeFOLDER RANDOM on the display.To turn off this feature, select thefolder random as previouslydescribed, then press the ENT again.

To activate Random Play, press theAUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Turn theinterface dial to select the trackrandom. Press the ENT on the dial

to enter your selection. You will seeTRACK RANDOM on the display.To turn off this feature, select thetrack random as previouslydescribed, then press the ENT again.

In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED

RANDOM (Random within adisc)

FOLDER-RANDOM

Features


285

09/01/28 18:10:37 32SMG631_290

－

－Selecting a different folder with theTUNE bar also deactivates thisfunction.

The SCAN functionsamples all tracks on the disc in theorder they are recorded on the disc(all files in MP3 or WMA mode). Toactivate the scan feature, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the side display. Youwill get a 10 second sampling of eachtrack/file on the disc. Press theSCAN button again to get out of scanmode and play the last track sampled.


You can also select the scan featureon the audio display. Press theAUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Push theselector to the right to select thescan feature. You will see TRACKSCAN blinking on the display. Toturn off this feature, push theselector to the right again.

This feature,when activated, samples the first fileof each folder for 10 seconds. Toscan a folder, press the SCAN buttonrepeatedly. You will see F-SCAN andthe folder number blinking on theside display.

To listen to the rest of the folder,press and hold the SCAN buttonuntil you hear a beep. If you do not,the system advances to the nextfolder, plays 10 seconds of it, andcontinues with the remaining foldersin the same way. When the systemhas finished sampling the first file ofall folders, folder scan is cancelled,and the last file played continues toplay.

In MP3 or WMA mode

SCAN

FOLDER SCAN

Features


286

09/01/28 18:10:45 32SMG631_291

An optional six disc changer isavailable for your vehicle. This discchanger uses the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc player or theradio.

You cannot select the controls on theaudio display of the navigationsystem. The audio setting will bedisplayed only in the side display.The text data cannot be displayed inthe side display, so you can see thedisc and track/file numbers only.

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the disc player.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the tape when a disc isplaying, insert a tape in the player(optional). If a tape is in the player,press the AUX button. Press the CDbutton again to switch back to thedisc player.

CONTINUED

Features


Operating the Optional DiscChanger

To Stop Playing a Disc

287

09/01/28 18:10:53 32SMG631_292

－＋

－＋

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.An MD player or changer is availablefor your vehicle as optionalequipment. This MD player/changeruses the same controls used for thein-dash disc player or the radio.Follow the instructions that camewith the unit.

To select the disc changer, press theCD/AUX button. The disc andtrack/file numbers will be displayed.To select a different disc, use thepreset 1 (DISC ) button or thepreset 2 (DISC ) button. To selectthe previous disc, press the preset 1(DISC ), or the preset 2 (DISC )to select the next disc in sequence.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay.

312

Features


Protecting DiscsOperating the Optional MDPlayer/Changer(For some types)

288

09/01/28 18:11:00 32SMG631_293




ErrorMessage

SolutionCause

313

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information, see page 313.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation. Formore information, see page 313. If the disccannot be pulled out, or the error message doesnot disappear after the disc is ejected, see yourdealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

Disc Player Error Messages

Features


289

09/01/28 18:11:08 32SMG631_294




SolutionCauseErrorMessage

313

Press the eject button, and remove the disc(s).Check for an error message. Insert the disc(s)again. If the message does not disappear or thedisc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer.Press the eject button, and remove the disc(s).Check for an error message. Insert the disc(s)again. If the message does not disappear or thedisc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

Optional Disc Changer ErrorMessages

Features


290

CDC DISC

CDC ERR

09/01/28 18:11:16 32SMG631_295

Playing an iPod

Features


291

REPEAT BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

AUDIO BUTTON


USB ICON

iPod ICON


SKIP BAR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

MAP BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

09/01/28 18:11:23 32SMG631_296

＊

＊

The audio system reads and playsplayable sound files on the iPod. Thesystem cannot operate an iPod as amass storage device. The system willonly play songs stored on the iPodwith iTunes.

iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

This audio system can operate theaudio files on the iPod with the samecontrols used for the disc player. Toplay an iPod, connect it to the USBadapter cable equipped with yourvehicle by using your dock connector,then press the CD/AUX button. Theignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.The iPod can also be recharged withthe ignition switch in these positions. You can select the AUX mode by

using the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest firmware. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit. For more information, consultyour dealer.

Use the latest firmware.:

ModeliPod 5GiPod classiciPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod touchiPhone

FirmwareVer. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.0 or moreVer. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or moreVer. 1.1.1 or more

To Play an iPod


Features


292

09/01/29 17:56:49 32SMG631_297

CONTINUED

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.


In AAC format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, theaudio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,and then skips to the next file.


Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

1.

2.

3.

Features


Connecting an iPod

293

NOTE:


USB ADAPTERCABLE

DOCK CONNECTOR

09/01/28 18:11:42 32SMG631_298

＊

＊

When the iPod is connected and theiPod mode is selected on the audiosystem, ‘‘iPod’’ is shown in the sidedisplay. If you selected the audiodisplay by pressing the AUDIObutton, you will see the iPod andUSB icons on the screen. Afterloading, you will see the Hondamark on the iPod. That means theoperation is allowed only with thevehicle’s audio unit controls.

The display may be changeddepending on models orfirmware versions.

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

If the system still does not recognizethe iPod, it may need resetting.Disconnect the iPod and reset itfollowing the iPod’s instructions.

The current file number is displayedin the side display. Pressing theAUDIO button displays the artist,album and track (file) names on thenavigation screen.

:

Features


294

Sample Display

OK to disconnect.

09/01/28 18:11:48 32SMG631_299

－

CONTINUED

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod isplaying to select passages andchange files.



You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when the display on the iPodallows to disconnect it. Alwaysconfirm the notice on the iPod whento disconnect it and make sure tofollow the maker’s instructions todisconnect the dock connector fromthe USB adapter cable.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the side display and theaudio display show NO DATA.

You can also change files with theinterface dial. Press the AUDIObutton to show the audio display onthe navigation screen. Push theselector on the interface dial to theright side to skip forward and to theleft side to skip backward.


Features

To Change or Select Files

SKIP

295

SKIP DIRECTION SKIP DIRECTION

09/01/28 18:11:56 32SMG631_300

If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.

You can also select a file from any ofthe iPod menus: playlists, artists,albums and songs, by using theinterface dial. Press the AUDIObutton to display the audio display onthe navigation screen. Push up theselector on the interface dial todisplay the iPod menu. Turn theinterface dial to select a desired list.

Press ENT on the interface dial todisplay the items on that list, thenturn the interface dial to select adesired list. Pushing the selector onthe interface dial up or down movesa selection to the top or bottom ofthe screen items. Press ENT on theinterface dial to set your selection.

Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio display on the screen.


Features

To Select a File from iPod Menu

296

09/01/28 18:12:02 32SMG631_301

－

－

CONTINUED

You can select any type of repeat andrandom modes on the audio menu.Press the AUDIO button to displaythe audio display, then push downthe selector on the interface dial todisplay the audio menu. Turn theinterface dial to select an audiomode: repeat, album random, andtrack random. Press ENT on theinterface dial to set your selection.

To cancel the selected mode, pressENT on the interface dial again whilethe highlighted mode is selected onthe audio display.

This featurecontinuously plays a file.To turn it off, press ENT on theinterface dial again.

You can also select the repeatfeature with the RPT button on thecontrol panel. Press and release theRPT button. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off.

Pressing either side of the SKIP barchanges the file while keeping therepeat feature.

This featureplays all available files from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. You will seeTRACK RANDOM on the screen.To turn it off, have this modehighlighted and press ENT on theinterface dial again.

Features


To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM

297

Push down the selector.

09/01/28 18:12:12 32SMG631_302

－Disconnect the dock connector ofthe iPod from the USB adapter cable.Make sure to follow the maker’sinstructions to disconnect it.

This featureplays all available albums from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. The files in eachalbum are played in the recordedorder. You will see ALBUMRANDOM on the screen.

To turn it off, have this modehighlighted and press ENT on theinterface dial again.

You can also select another list fromthe iPod menu while keeping therandom function.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.


If you reconnect the same iPod, theaudio unit may begin playing whereit left off, depending on the iPodspecification.

If you see an error message in theside display, see page .299


Features

To Stop Playing Your iPodALBUM RANDOM

iPod Error Messages

298

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:12:21 32SMG631_303

If you see an error message in theside display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

SolutionErrorMessage

Cause

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.Appears when the overcurrent protectionfeature of the system stops supplying power toUSB because an incompatible device isconnected. Disconnect the device. Then, turnthe audio system off, and turn it on again. Donot reconnect the device that caused the error.Appears when the iPod is empty. Store somefiles in the iPod.Appears when an unsupported iPod isconnected. See page 292 for the specificationinformation for iPods. If it appears when asupported iPod is connected, update the iPodfirmware to the newer version.Appears when the system does notacknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

USB ROM Error


No files in iPod

Use of unsupported iPod

Recognition failure ofiPod

iPod Error Messages

Features


299

USB ERR

BAD USB

NO SONG

FORMAT

CHECK-USB

09/01/28 18:12:26 32SMG631_304


Playing a USB Flash Memory Device

Features300

REPEAT BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

AUDIO BUTTON


USB ICON


FOLDER BAR

SCAN BUTTON

MAP BUTTON

SKIP BAR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

CANCEL BUTTON

09/01/28 18:12:34 32SMG631_305

＊

＊

CONTINUED

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are:

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher. Some digital audio playersmay be compatible as well.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.


Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

This audio system can operate thesound contents from a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the in-dash discplayer. To play a USB flash memorydevice, press the CD/AUX button.The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit. For more information,consult your dealer.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

:

Features


To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice


301

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:12:46 32SMG631_306

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－


Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio Layer3

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)



Maximum layers: 8


Bitrate:48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)


Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9

Maximum layers: 8

The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:

Bitrate:48 320 kbpsSupported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LC

Maximum layers: 8

Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz


In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

Even if recorded in MP3, WMA orAAC format, a file with unsupportedversion cannot be played. If thesystem finds it, the audio unitdisplays FORMAT in the side display,and then skips to the next file.


1.


Features

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

302


09/01/28 18:13:02 32SMG631_307

－

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flashmemory device is playing to selectpassages and change files.



Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.

When the USB device is connectedand the USB mode is selected on theaudio system, ‘‘USB’’ is shown in theside display. It also shows the folderand file numbers. Pressing theAUDIO button displays the USB icon,the folder and file names, and theelapsed time in the navigation screen.

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Make sure to followthe USB flash memory device’sinstructions when you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the side display and the audio displayshow NO DATA.

2.

CONTINUED


Features

To Change or Select Files

SKIP

303

USB ADAPTER CABLE

09/01/28 18:13:10 32SMG631_308

－

▼

▲

You can also change files with theinterface dial. Press the AUDIObutton to show the audio display onthe navigation screen. Push theinterface dial to the right side to skipto the beginning of the next file, andto the left side to skip to thebeginning of the current file.Pushing it to the left again skips tothe beginning of the previous file.

Toselect a different folder, press andrelease either side of the FOLDERbar. Press the side to skip tothe next folder, and press the

side to skip to the beginning tothe previous folder.

You can also select a folder or filefrom the list by using the interfacedial. Press the AUDIO button toshow the audio display on thenavigation screen.


Features

To Select a File from Folder and FileLists

FOLDER SELECTION

304

SKIP DIRECTION SKIP DIRECTION

09/01/28 18:13:17 32SMG631_309

To go back to the normal playingdisplay, press the AUDIO button.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio mode display.

Push up the selector on the interfacedial to switch the display to thefolder list, then turn the interfacedial to select a folder.

Press ENT on the interface dial tochange the display to the file list,then turn the interface dial to selecta file. Press ENT on the interfacedial to set your selection.

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes on the audiomenu screen. Press the AUDIObutton to show the audio display onthe navigation screen. Push downthe selector on the interface dial todisplay the audio menu items.

CONTINUED

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:


Features 305

Push down the selector.

09/01/28 18:13:24 32SMG631_310

－

－

－

－Turn the interface dial to select aplay mode: folder random, trackrandom, folder repeat, track repeat.Press ENT on the interface dial toset your selection.

To cancel the selected mode, pushdown the selector on the interfacedial to display the audio menu on theaudio display. Turn the interface dialto select the highlighted play mode,

then press ENT on the interface dialto turn off that selected mode.

This featurereplays all the files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.Pressing either side of the FOLDERbar also turns off this feature.

Thisfeature plays the files in the selectedfolder in random order.

This featureplays all the files in random order.

You can also select the folder repeatfeature with the RPT button on thecontrol panel. Press and release theRPT button repeatedly. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. Pressingeither side of the SKIP bar also turnsoff this feature.

You can also select the track repeatfeature with the RPT button on thecontrol panel. Press and release theRPT button. Press and hold the RPTbutton to turn it off.


Features

FOLDER REPEAT

FOLDER RANDOM

TRACK RANDOM

TRACK REPEAT

306

09/01/28 18:13:32 32SMG631_311

－－

Disconnect the USB flash memorydevice. On some devices, follow themaker’s instructions to disconnectthe device.

This functionsamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature, pushthe selector on the interface dial tothe right repeatedly. You will seeFOLDER SCAN on the screen. Youwill also see F-SCAN on the sidedisplay and the folder numberblinking. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each first file in thefolder(s). Push the selector on theinterface dial repeatedly to get out ofthe scan mode. The system plays thelast file sampled.

You can also select the folder scanfeature with the SCAN button on thecontrol panel. Press and release theSCAN button repeatedly.Press and hold the SCAN button toget out of the folder scan mode andplay the last file sampled.

Pressing either side of the FOLDERor SKIP bar also turns off the feature.

This functionsamples all files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the scan feature, pushthe selector on the interface dial tothe right. You will see TRACKSCAN on the screen. You will alsosee SCAN on the side display andthe file number blinking. You will geta 10 second sampling of each file inthe folder. Push the selector on theinterface dial repeatedly to get out ofthe scan mode. The system plays thelast file sampled.

You can also select the scan featurewith the SCAN button on the controlpanel.Press and release the SCAN button.Press and hold the SCAN button toget out of the scan mode and playthe last file sampled.


If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

If you see an error message in theside display, see page .308


Features

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

FOLDER SCANTRACK SCAN


307

09/01/28 18:13:41 32SMG631_312

If you see an error message in theside display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.

ErrorMessage

Cause Solution

USB ROM Error


Use of unsupported files

No files in USB flashmemory device

Use of unsupported USBflash memory device

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.Appears when the overcurrent protectionfeature of the system stops supplying power toUSB because an incompatible device isconnected. Disconnect the device. Then, turnthe audio system off, and turn it on again. Donot reconnect the device that caused the error.Appears when the files in the USB flashmemory device are DRM or an unsupportedformat. This error message appears for about 3seconds, then plays the next song.Appears when the USB flash memory device isempty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC filesin the USB flash memory device. Save someMP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flashmemory device.Appears when an unsupported device isconnected. See page 301 for the specificationinformation for the USB flash memory device.If it appears when the supported device isconnected, reconnect the device.



Features308

USB ERR

BAD USB

FORMAT

NO SONG

FORMAT

09/01/28 18:13:46 32SMG631_313


Features

Playing a Tape (Optional for some types)

309

The audio display is notavailable.

SIDE DISPLAY

PRESET BUTTONS

CD/AUX BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB


09/01/28 18:13:52 32SMG631_314

△

＊

＊

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Make sure the open side of the tapeis facing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator comeson to show you which side of thetape is playing. The indicates theside you inserted upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, press the preset 5 ( )button. When the player reaches theend of the tape, it will automaticallyreverse direction and play the otherside.

You cannot select the controls on theaudio display of the navigationsystem. The audio setting will bedisplayed only in the side display.The text data cannot be displayed inthe side display, so you can see thedisc and track/file numbers only.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will come on in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing theNR button. Dolby remains off untilyou press the NR button again.

To remove the tape, press the ejectbutton on the tape player. If youwant to turn the player off, press thepower/volume knob or turn off theignition switch. The tape will remainin the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the tape player willbe in pause mode. Press the preset 5( ) button to resume play.

To switch to the radio or disc playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM or CD/AUX button. Tochange back to the tape player, pressthe CD/AUX button again.

You can remove the tape with theignition switch in any position, evenif the audio system is off.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

To Play a Tape To Stop Playing a Tape(Optional for some types)

Features


310

09/01/28 18:14:00 32SMG631_315

－－

－

To rewind the tape,push the preset 4 ( ) button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push thepreset 6 ( ) button. You will seeFF displayed. Press the preset 4, 5,or 6 button to take the system out ofrewind or fast forward.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.

The skip and repeatfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

Press the side of theSEEK/SKIP bar to find thebeginning of the current song orpassage. Press the side to findthe beginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

Damaged tapes can jam inside thedrive or cause other problems. Seepage for information on tapeplayer care and protection.

262

Tape Search FunctionsFF/REW

REPEAT Caring for the Tape Player

SKIP

Features


311

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:14:07 32SMG631_316

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labelledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.


When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centreto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc player.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the disc to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

General Information Protecting Discs

Features

Protecting Your Discs

312

09/01/28 18:14:17 32SMG631_317

The in-dash disc player/changer hasa sophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED


Features

Additional Information onRecommended Discs

313

Sealed

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

Bubbled/Wrinkled

With Label/Sticker

Using PrinterLabel Kit

With PlasticRing

09/01/28 18:14:28 32SMG631_318

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

This audio unit cannot play a Dual-disc .

4. 5.


Features314

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

09/01/28 18:14:39 32SMG631_319

▲ ▼ ＋－

＋

－

＋

－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM, AM (MW),LW, disc (if a disc is loaded), or atape (if equipped). You can selectFM1 and FM2 when the auto selectfeature is not used.

To activate the seek function, pressand hold the top ( ) or bottom ( )of the CH button until you hear abeep. The system searches up ordown from the current frequency tofind a station with a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack file in MP3 or WMA modeeach time you press the top ( ) ofthe CH button. Press the bottom( ) to return to the beginning of thecurrent track or file. Press it twice toreturn to the previous track or file.You will see the track number (filenumber in MP3 or WMA mode) andthe elapsed time. On vehicles withnavigation system, the informationshows in the side display.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press and release thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next preset station on theband you are listening to. Press andrelease the bottom ( ) to go back tothe previous station.

If an iPod or a USB flash memorydevice is plugged into the system,you can also select AUX.

CONTINUED

Features

Remote Audio Controls (For some types)

315

CH BUTTON MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON

09/01/28 18:14:48 32SMG631_320

＋

－

＋

－

＋

－

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can usethe seek function to select folders.Press and hold the top ( ) of theCH button until you hear a beep, toskip forward to the first file of thenext folder. Press the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous folder.

If you are playing an audio unit in theauxiliary input jack, or playing a USBflash memory device or iPod in theUSB adapter cable (if equipped),press and release the top ( ) of theCH button to skip forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press thebottom ( ) to skip backward to thebeginning to the current file. Press ittwice to return to the previous file.

If you are playing a tape in theoptional tape player, press the top( ) of the CH button to advance tothe next selection. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousselection. The system senses a silentperiod, then resumes playing.

The auxiliary input jack is in theconsole compartment. The systemwill accept auxiliary input fromstandard audio accessories.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the CD/AUX button to select it.

Features

Auxiliary Input Jacks(For some types)

Remote Audio Controls (For some types), Auxiliary Input Jack

316

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

09/01/28 18:14:55 32SMG631_321

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you mayneed to set the clock.

To set the time, press the CLOCK(AM/FM) button until the clockdisplay begins to blink, then releasethe button. The displayed timebegins to blink.

Change the hour by pressing the H(preset 1) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minute by pressing the M(preset 2) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again toenter the set time.

CONTINUED

On vehicles with audio system(without navigation system)

Setting the Clock

Features 317

CLOCK BUTTONHOUR (H) BUTTON

MINUTE (M) BUTTON

RESET (R) BUTTON


09/01/28 18:15:04 32SMG631_322

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing the Rbutton sets the clock back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, the clock setsforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00

Change the hour by pressing the Hbutton until the numbers advance tothe desired time. Change the minuteby pressing the M button until the

numbers advance to the desired time.

To set the time, turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position todisplay the time.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theCLOCK button until you hear a beep,then pressing the R (preset 3) buttonsets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, the clock sets forwardto the beginning of the next hour.

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00

On vehicles without audio system


Setting the Clock

Features318

HOUR (H)BUTTON

MINUTE (M)BUTTON

RESET (R)BUTTON

09/01/28 18:15:13 32SMG631_323

To turn off an activated systembefore 30 seconds have elapsed,unlock the driver’s door with theignition key or the remotetransmitter.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds (the beeping alarmon vehicles with ultrasonic sensor)and the turn signal lights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the audio displayunit. This alarm continues for 30seconds, then the system resets.

To set the ultrasonic sensor alongwith the security system, you shouldlock the doors and the tailgate withthe key or the remote transmitter.

The security system setsautomatically 15 seconds (25seconds on vehicles equipped withthe ultrasonic sensor activated) afteryou lock the doors, bonnet, andtailgate. For the system to activate,you must lock the doors and thetailgate from the outside with thekey or remote transmitter. Thesecurity system indicator on theinstrument panel starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

On vehicles with the ultrasonicsensor, only the remote transmittercan turn off the security system.Unlocking the driver’s door with thekey cannot turn off the securitysystem and activates the alarm.

CONTINUED

Security System (For some types)

Features 319


On vehicle withmanualtransmission ori-SHIFT

On vehicle withautomatictransmission

09/01/28 18:15:20 32SMG631_324

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system will not set ifthe bonnet, tailgate, or any door isnot fully closed. If the system will notset, check the door and tailgatemonitor on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ), to see if thedoors and tailgate are fully closed.Since it is not part of the monitordisplay, manually check the bonnet.

Once the security system is set,opening any door or tailgate (withoutusing the key or the remotetransmitter), or the bonnet, willcause the system to alarm. It alsoalarms if the audio unit is removedfrom the dashboard or the wiring iscut.

When you lock the doors and thetailgate with the key or the remotetransmitter, all outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel flash three times to verify thedoors and the tailgate are locked andthe security system has set. Whenyou unlock them, these lights flashonce.

The security system also sets afteryou open the driver’s door, then lockthe doors and the tailgate with thelock tab or master door lock switchon the driver’s door while pulling theoutside door handle.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger inside the locked vehicleturns the ignition switch on.

When you set the super lockingalong with the security system, thealarm is not activated if someonetries to open a door with the locktabs or the master door lock switch.

101

On vehicles with super locking system


Features320

09/01/28 18:15:28 32SMG631_325

The ultrasonic sensor is onlyactivated when the security systemis set by the key or the remotetransmitter. It monitors the interiorof the vehicle and activates the alarmif someone intrudes into thepassenger compartment through awindow, or moves in thecompartment.

If you set the security system withthe windows open, the ultrasonicsensor may activate the alarmunexpectedly when the systemsenses strong vibrations on thevehicle or loud sound.

Whether the ultrasonic sensor isactivated or not, the security systemcan only be turned off by the remotetransmitter, not the key.

You can set the security systemwithout activating the ultrasonicsensor. Pull the driver’s outside doorhandle and pull the lock tab rearward.Release the handle, then close thedoor. The security system indicatoron the instrument panel comes onfor 3 seconds, then starts blinking.

Ultrasonic Sensor(For some types)

Features


321

ULTRASONIC SENSORS

09/01/28 18:15:35 32SMG631_326

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 40 km/h (25 mph)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openmotorways. It is not recommendedfor city driving, winding roads,slippery roads, heavy rain, or badweather.

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 40 km/h (25 mph).

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

1.

2.

3.Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control (For some types)

Features322

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen travelling on openmotorways in good weather.

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

CRUISEBUTTON

SET/DECEL BUTTON

09/05/29 11:01:52 32SMG631_327

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1.6 km/h (1 mph).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal untilyou reach the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph).

While the cruise control system isactivated, the shift up or downindicator does not work (see page

).398

On vehicles with manual transmission

CONTINUED


Features

Changing the Set Speed

323

09/01/28 18:15:53 32SMG631_328

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 40 km/h (25 mph), then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on, and the vehicle willaccelerate to the same cruisingspeed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes cruise control tocancel.


Features

Resuming the Set SpeedCancelling Cruise Control

324

09/01/28 18:16:01 32SMG631_329

Your vehicle has a parking sensorsystem. The system lets you knowthe approximate distance betweenyour vehicle and most obstacleswhile you are parking. When thesystem is on and your vehicle isnearing an obstacle, you will hear abeeping and see parking sensorindicators on the multi-informationdisplay.

All obstacles may not always besensed. Even when the system is on,you should look for obstacles nearyour vehicle to make sure it is safe topark.

Before moving your vehicle, makesure that the indicator in the buttoncomes on. If it is off, the parkingsensor system cannot be activated.

To activate the system, push thebutton on the dashboard with theignition switch in the ON (II)position. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when the system is on.You will hear a beep. To turn thesystem off, push the button again.

If the parking brake is set (manualtransmission, i-SHIFT) or the shiftlever is in the Park position(automatic transmission), theparking sensor system will not beactivated even with the ignitionswitch in the ON (II) position.

CONTINUED

Parking Sensor System (For some types)

Features 325

09/01/28 18:16:08 32SMG631_330

When you turn the system on, abeeper sounds once.

The system has only two rear cornersensors and two rear centre sensors.

The rear centre sensors work onlywhen the shift lever is in reverse (R),and the vehicle speed is less than 8km/h (5 mph).

The corner sensors work only whenthe shift lever is in reverse (R), andthe vehicle speed is less than 8 km/h(5 mph).

When the system senses an obstacle,the appropriate indicator comes on,and a beeper sounds as shown in thefollowing tables.

Indicators and Beeper Operationon the Multi-information Display


Features326

09/01/28 18:16:14 32SMG631_331

Example shown: Obstacle is at the left rear of thevehicle

Steady Increased Rapid Continuous

Continuous

Distance

Indicator

Distance

Indicator

Beep Rate

Beep Rate Increased Rapid

About 35 cm(14 in)or less

About45-60 cm(18-24 in)

About35-45 cm(14-18 in)

About45-60 cm(18-24 in)

About35-45 cm(14-18 in)

About 35 cm(14 in)or less

About60-110 cm(24-43 in)

Lower left indicator stays on

Bottom indicator stays on

Features


Rear Corner Sensor Operation Rear Centre Sensor Operation

327

09/01/28 18:16:24 32SMG631_332

The system may not functionproperly under these conditions:

The sensors are covered withsnow, ice, mud, etc.

When the vehicle is on a roughroad, on grass, or on a hill.

After the vehicle has been sittingout in hot or cold weather.

When the system is affected bysome electrical equipment ordevices generating an ultrasonicwave.

When operating the vehicle in badweather.

The range of the corner sensors andthe rear centre sensors are limited.Each corner sensor is capable ofsensing an obstacle only when yourvehicle is about 60 cm (24 in) orcloser.The rear centre sensors sense anobstacle that is behind your vehicleabout 1.1 m (43 in) or closer.

Do not put any accessories on oraround the sensors.


Features328

Within about 60 cm (24 in) Within about 1.1 m (43 in)

09/01/28 18:16:34 32SMG631_333

The system may not sense thin orlow objects, or sonic-absorptivematerials such as snow, cotton, orsponge.

The system cannot sense objectsdirectly under the bumper.

If the system develops a problem,you will see all indicators or theindicators with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. You will hear a beep at thefirst time when the warning symbolis displayed.

If there is a problem in any of thesensors, the appropriate sensorindicator(s) will come on and stay onin this warning symbol. In this case,the remaining sensors can beoperated properly.

Very often, a sensor covered withmud, ice, snow, etc. is the cause ofthis display. Check the sensors first.If the indicators stay on or thebeeper does not stop, have thesystem checked by your dealer.

If you install a towbar on yourvehicle, this may cause the alarmwhen the parking sensor system isactivated.

When you tow a trailer, do not turnon the parking sensor system. Thetrailer behind your vehicle will causethe alarm to be activated.

If there is a problem with theparking sensor system and/or abeeper sounds continuously, youmay turn off the system temporarilyand stop a beeper by pressing theparking sensor system button.


Features

System Malfunction

329

09/01/28 18:16:42 32SMG631_334

Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFTsystem. The HFT system uses aClass 2 Bluetooth, which means themaximum range between yourphone and vehicle is 10 meters (30feet).

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

To use the HFT system, your phonemust have approved Bluetoothcapability along with the Hands FreeProfile. This type of phone isavailable through many phonemakers and network operators.

The available language is set toEnglish as the default setting whenyour vehicle leaves the factory. Thevoice of the HFT system is set tofemale.

Here are the main features of theHFT system. Instructions for usingthe HFT system begin on page .

HFT system recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

Your vehicle is equipped with theHands-Free Telephone (HFT)system. HFT system uses Bluetoothtechnology as a wireless linkbetween it and your Bluetoothcompatible mobile phone. When youare in your vehicle and your phone islinked to the HFT system, you’llenjoy hands-free phone use. TheHFT system is available in any of thefive languages; English, French,Italian, German, and Spanish. Tochange the language, see page .

335

364

335

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Voice Control

Visit

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

Features

www.hondahandsfree.com

330

09/01/28 18:16:50 32SMG631_335

When the HFT system is in use, thesound comes through the vehicle’sfront audio system speakers. If theaudio system is in use whileoperating either of HFT buttons ormaking a call, the HFT system over-rides the audio system. To changethe volume level, use the audiosystem volume knob, or the steeringwheel volume controls.

Here are the main components ofthe HFT system:

The HFT system microphone is onthe ceiling console. The microphoneis shared with the navigation system.

You can also store the desirednumber to the HFT system directlyfrom your mobile phone using thereceive contact function in the HFTsystem.

Before selling or discardingyour vehicle, make sure to delete thestored phone data.

Your vehicle’s HFT system has themobile phonebook import function.This allows you to import yourmobile phonebook to the HFTsystem. Using the navigation system,you can make a call directly andstore a desired number in the HFTsystem from the list shown on thenavigation display. For moreinformation on how to import thephonebook or to make a call, seepage .

The HFT system can store up to 50names and phone numbers in itsphonebook. With a linked phone, youcan then automatically dial any nameor number in the phonebook.

With a linked phone, the HFTsystem allows you to send andreceive calls in your vehicle withoutholding the phone.

The Bluetooth word mark andlogos are registered trademarksowned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. andany use of such marks by HondaMotor Co., Ltd. is under licence.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

355



Features

Audio System

Microphone

Phonebook

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

331

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:17:00 32SMG631_336

Here is the function of each HFTbutton:

HFT Talk: This button is usedbefore you give a command, toanswer incoming calls, and toconfirm system information.

HFT Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

Press and release the button, thenwait for a beep before giving acommand.

To operate the HFT, use the HFTTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. Onvehicles with navigation system,below the HFT buttons is anotherset of voice control buttons for thenavigation, climate control, and audiosystems.

HFT Buttons


Features332

On vehicle without navigation system

HFT TALK BUTTON

HFT BACK BUTTON

HFT TALKBUTTON

HFT BACKBUTTON

09/01/28 18:17:07 32SMG631_337

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

－

－

＊

Signal Strength Indicates thenetwork signal strength of thecurrent phone. Five bars equalsfull strength.

ROAM Status Indicates yourphone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicatesthe power currently remaining inyour phone’s battery. Five barsequals full battery strength.

HFT Mode Symbol Indicateswhen the HFT system is activated.

Phone Dialing Indicates thenumber you entered or thenumber of the incoming call.

Some phones do not send thisinformation to the HFT system.

When you are operating the HFT,you will see this information on themulti-information display:

:



Features 333

PHONE DIALING

BATTERYLEVEL STATUS

HFTMODE

ROAMSTATUS

SIGNALSTRENGTH

09/01/28 18:17:16 32SMG631_338

When you are operating the HFT,dialing or receiving calls with theaudio system in use, you will see‘‘TEL’’ on the audio display.

When you are operating the HFT,dialing or receiving calls with theaudio system in use, you will see thesymbol on the navigation display.

The ‘‘ ’’ indicator will bedisplayed on the audio display or theside display (on vehicles withnavigation system) if compatible cellphone is linked to the HFT system.

You will also see ‘‘TEL’’ on the sidedisplay.


Information Display


Features334

09/01/28 18:17:24 32SMG631_339

CONTINUED

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

To enter a command, press theTalk button. Then, after the beep,say your command in a clear,natural tone.

The HFT system is operated by theHFT Talk and Back buttons on theleft side of the steering wheel. Thenext few pages provide instructionsfor all basic features of the HFTsystem.

All phones may not operateidentically, and some may causeinconsistent operation of the HFTsystem.

For best system operation, set theclimate control fan speed to low,and direct the centre vents awayfrom the microphone in the ceiling.

Give a voice command in a clearnatural speaking voice withoutpausing between words ornumbers. If the system cannotrecognize your command becauseof the background noise, speaklouder.

If the microphone picks up voicesother than yours, the system maynot interpret your voicecommands correctly.

Close the windows.

Features

Using Voice ControlHow to Use the HFT System


335

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:17:32 32SMG631_340

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, or 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFT systemis speaking. The HFT system willthen begin listening for your nextcommand.

If the HFT system does notrecognize a command, itsresponse is, ‘‘Pardon.’’ If it doesn’trecognize the command a secondtime, its response is, ‘‘Pleaserepeat.’’ If it doesn’t recognize thecommand a third time, it plays theHelp prompt.

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Handsfree help.’’

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’


Features336

09/01/28 18:17:38 32SMG631_341

The incoming notification of theHFT system can be set to a ring tone,a prompt, or no notification.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Systemoptions are setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Wouldyou like an audible notification ofan incoming call?’’

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.If nothing is said while the HFTsystem is listening for a command,the HFT system will time out andstop its voice recognition. Thenext time you press the Talkbutton, the HFT system beginslistening from the point at which ittimed out.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press and release theTalk button, wait for the beep, andsay, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFTsystem begins from its main menu.

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFT system goesback to its main menu. Forexample, when you store the name,‘‘Eric,’’ the HFT system responseis, ‘‘Eric has been stored.’’ Thenext time you press the Talkbutton, you will be at the mainmenu.

1.

2.

To set up the system, do this:

CONTINUED

Setting Up the System


Features 337

09/01/28 18:17:46 32SMG631_342

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, theHFT system response is, ‘‘Wouldyou like the notification to be aring tone or a prompt?’’ If you say‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFTsystem returns to its main menu.Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no ringtone or prompt playback during anincoming call. The audio systemwill still be mute, and a messagewill be displayed.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘A ring tone will beused.’’ or ‘‘An incoming callprompt will be used.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, theHFT system response is, ‘‘Securitywill not be used. The system setupis complete.’’

If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set yourpasscode. Refer to the settingprocedure in the next column.

If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you willhear a ring tone through the audiospeakers to announce an incomingcall. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ youwill hear this message toannounce an incoming call: ‘‘Youhave an incoming call.’’

The HFT system responsecontinues ‘‘A security option isavailable to lock the hands freesystem. Each time the vehicle isturned on, a password would berequired to use this system. Wouldyou like this security option turnedon?’’

3.

4.

5.

6.


Features338

09/01/28 18:17:53 32SMG631_343

The HFT system will accept anumeric, four-digit password thatyou can use for security purposes.

Follow the system setupprocedure from the step 1 throughthe step 5 as described previously.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’

The HFT system response is‘‘What is the four-digit number youwould like to set as yourpassword?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitpassword you want to use. Forexample, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFTsystem response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Isthis correct?’’

Once a password is set, you can lockthe HFT system so it only operatesafter the password is entered.

The HFT system will prompt youfor your password each time theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and you press theTalk button. You will only beasked for the password once perignition cycle. If the password isset, its response is ‘‘The system islocked. What is the four-digitpassword?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Thesystem is now locked. Each timethe vehicle is turned on, thepassword will be required to usethe system. The system setup iscomplete. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, theHFT system response is, ‘‘Securitywill not be used. The system setupis complete.’’

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

6.

To set your password, do this:

To enter your password, do this:

CONTINUED

Setting Your Password


Features 339

09/01/28 18:18:03 32SMG631_344

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say your four-digitpassword. For example, say ‘‘1, 2,3, 4.’’

If the password is correct, theHFT system response is ‘‘Mainmenu.’’

If the password is not correct, theHFT system response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4 isincorrect. Please try again.’’ Go backto step 2.

If you forget your password and youcannot activate the HFT system,consult your dealer to cancel thepassword.

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith Hands Free Profile must bepaired to the HFT system before youcan make and receive hands-freecalls.

HFT system does not allow you topair your phone if the vehicle ismoving.

During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFT systemwith this procedure, refer to yourphone’s operating manual, or talkto your phone retailer.

Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFT system.

For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.

2.

3.

Pairing Your Phone NOTE:


Features340

09/01/28 18:18:12 32SMG631_345

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘Phone setup optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Thepairing process requires operationof your mobile phone. For safety,only perform this function whilethe vehicle is stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note thiscode. It will be requested by thephone.’’

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Search mode. Thephone will search for the HFTsystem. When it comes up, selectHands-Free Telephone Systemfrom the list of options displayedon your phone.

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘A new phone hasbeen found. What would you liketo name this phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitcode you want to use. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is thiscorrect?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is‘‘Searching for a Bluetooth phone.Make sure the phone you aretrying to pair is in discovery mode.’’

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

CONTINUED


Features 341

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:18:19 32SMG631_346

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘The name has beenchanged. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Phone setup options are status,pair, edit, delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Whichphone would you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’The HFT system response is‘‘What is the new name for Eric’sphone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

1.

2.

3.

4.7.

8.

To rename a paired phone, do this:


Features342

09/01/28 18:18:27 32SMG631_347

To delete a paired phone, do this: To list all paired phones, do this:Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFT system response is,‘‘Phone setup options are status,pair, edit, delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whichphone would you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Wouldyou like to delete Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is‘‘Preparing to delete Eric’s phone.’’Say ‘‘OK’’ to continue. Otherwise,say ‘‘Go back,’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, theHFT system response is ‘‘Thephone has been deleted. Returningto the main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Goback,’’ or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone willnot be deleted.


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFT system responds by listingthe name of each paired phone.When all phones paired to thesystem have been read, the HFTsystem response is ‘‘The entire listhas been read. Returning to themain menu.’’

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

CONTINUED


Features 343

09/01/28 18:18:35 32SMG631_348

To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Searching for the next phone.’’The HFT system then disconnectsthe linked phone and searches foranother paired phone. If no otherphones are found, the first phoneremains linked.

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFT system phonebook. You canalso redial the last number called.During a call, the HFT system allowsyou to talk up to 30 minutes after youremove the key from the ignitionswitch. Continuing a call withoutrunning the engine may dischargeand weaken the vehicle’s battery.

You can also dial by operating thenumber keys on your phone directly(see page ).

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Anexample of the HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘Eric’s phone is linked.Battery strength is three bars.Signal strength is five bars, andthe phone is roaming. Returning tothe main menu.’’

Some phones do not send thestatus information to the HFTsystem.

1.

2.

1.

347

Making a Call


Features344

09/01/28 18:18:43 32SMG631_349

To make a call using a name in the HFTsystem phonebook, do this:

To make a call using a phone number,do this:


With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT system responseis ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call,dial, or continue to add numbers.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Calling’’ or ‘‘Dialing.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob, or the steeringwheel volume controls.

You can also make a call directlyfrom the list shown on thenavigation display.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

1. 1.

2.

3.

4.2.

CONTINUED


Features 345

09/01/28 18:18:51 32SMG631_350

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Calling’’or ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob, or thesteering wheel volume controls.

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Redial.’’ The HFT system responseis, ‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob, or the steeringwheel volume controls.


To use the dial option with theHFT system, say or select ‘‘Dial’’from the Information screen.

4.

3.

1.

To make a call using the navigationdisplay (on vehicles with navigationsystem), do this:


Features346

09/01/28 18:18:58 32SMG631_351

CONTINUED

The navigation display will changeas shown above. Enter a callnumber.

To make a call, press the selectoron the interface dial to the right.


Make sure to stop your vehiclesafely.

Select a call number from yourphone, or dial the numbersdirectly.


You can also make a call by dialingwith the number keys on the phonewhich has been paired to the HFTsystem.

Never try to dial from yourphone directly if the vehicle ismoving.

2.

3.

4.

2.

3.

1.To make a call:

Features


Dialing Directly from the Phone

347

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:19:07 32SMG631_352

＃

To send a name during a call, do this:

To send a number during a call, do this:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whatname or number would you like tosend?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’ The HFTsystem response is ‘‘Would youlike to send account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

The HFT system allows you to sendnumbers or names during a call. Thisis useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can alsoprogramme account numbers intothe HFT system phonebook for easyretrieval during menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whatname or number would you like tosend?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

To send a hash ( ), say‘‘hash.’’ To send a star (*), say‘‘star.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

3.

Features


Sending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call

348

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:19:16 32SMG631_353

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFT system to your phone,or from your phone to the HFTsystem.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’The audio switches from the HFTsystem to the phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’The audio switches from yourphone to the HFT system.

If your phone has call waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press and release theTalk button to answer it. When youdo this, the original call is placed onhold. To return to the original call,press the Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the new call,disregard it, and continue with youroriginal call. If you want to hang upthe original call and answer the newcall, press the Back button.

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFT systeminterrupts the audio system (if it ison), and plays the incoming callnotification, if activated. To answerthe call, press the Talk button andbegin speaking. If you don’t want toanswer the call, press the Backbutton.

1.

2.

To transfer a call from the HFT systemto your phone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFT system, do this:

CONTINUED


Features

Transferring a CallReceiving a Call

349

09/01/28 18:19:25 32SMG631_354

The HFT system phonebook canstore up to 50 names with theirassociated numbers. These can beany types of numbers. For example,you can store a phone number anduse it to make a call, or you can storea name tag and use it to call.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whatname would you like to store?’’

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit,delete, receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Mute isactive.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Mute iscancelled.’’

If you get into the vehicle while youare on the phone, a call will betransferred automatically to the HFTsystem when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.

1.

2.

1.

2.

To add a name, do this:

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:

Features

Setting Up the PhonebookMuting a Call


Automatic Transferring

350

09/01/28 18:19:34 32SMG631_355

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Eric’’. The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘What is the numberfor Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’The HFT system response is ‘‘123456 7891.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Eric hasbeen stored. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whatname would you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘What is the newnumber for Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFT system response is,‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit,delete, receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Thenumber has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

1.

2.

3.

4.

3.5.

4.

5.

To edit the number of a name, do this:

CONTINUED


Features 351

09/01/28 18:19:44 32SMG631_356

To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit,delete, receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whatname would you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Thename has been deleted. Returningto the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘Would you like todelete Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFT system response is,‘‘The Phonebook options are store,edit, delete, receive contact, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFT system responds by listingthe names in the phonebook.When the end of the list isreached, the HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘The entire list hasbeen read. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.


Features352

09/01/28 18:19:52 32SMG631_357

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit,delete, receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFT system responds by listingthe names in the phonebook.When it says the name you want tocall, for example, Eric, press theTalk button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’The HFT system response is,‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Calling.’’Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob, or the steeringwheel volume controls.

You can store the desired number inthe HFT system phonebook directlyfrom your cellular phone.

Your phone may not havethis capability. You can see yourphone’s owner’s manual forinformation.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Storing a Phone Number Directlyfrom Your Phone


Features 353

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:19:58 32SMG631_358

To store a phone number from yourphone:

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘Phonebook optionsare store, edit, delete, receivecontact and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Receivecontact.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘The receive processrequires operation of yourBluetooth device. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped. Hands freetelephone is now waiting toreceive a contact from a Bluetoothdevice.’’

Select a desired number from thelist on your phone, and transmit/send (individual steps will vary foreach type of phone, refer to yourphone’s owner’s manual) viaBluetooth. The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘One phone numberhas been received for this contact.What name would you like to storefor the mobile number? To discardthis number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Neil at work.’’ The HFTsystem response is, ‘‘Neil at workwill be stored. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or‘‘No.’’ If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ the HFTsystem response is, ‘‘Neil at workhas been stored. Would you likehands free telephone to receiveanother contact?’’ Go to step 6.

If you say ‘‘No,’’ the HFT systemresponse is ‘‘Returning to the mainmenu.’’

If you want to continue to storeany other numbers, press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘Hands free telephoneis now waiting to receive a contactfrom a Bluetooth device.’’

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.


Features354

09/01/28 18:20:06 32SMG631_359

Select a desired number from thelist on your phone, and transmit/send (individual steps will vary foreach type of phone, refer to yourphone’s owner’s manual) viaBluetooth. The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘One phone numberhas been received for this contact.What name would you like to storefor the mobile number? To discardthis number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Susan at work.’’ The HFTsystem response is, ‘‘Susan atwork will be stored. Is thiscorrect?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or‘‘No.’’ The HFT system responseis ‘‘Susan at work has been stored.Would you like hands freetelephone to receive anothercontact?’’

If you do not want to continue tostore any other numbers, pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘No.’’ The HFTsystem response is ‘‘Returning tothe main menu.’’

The cellular phonebook optionallows you to store up to 1,000 namesand 10,000 phone numbers in thephonebook of Bluetooth Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System fromyour cellular phonebook. Themaximum names and numbers to bestored varies on the data size. Withthe HFT system, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Your phone may not havethis capability. You can see yourphone’s owner’s manual forinformation. To use this optionalfunction, your phone must becompatible with the PhonebookAccess Profile (PBAP) or theSynchronization Profile (SYNCH).

8.

9.7.

10.


CONTINUED

Cellular Phonebook Options


Features 355

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:20:14 32SMG631_360

PIN Number: This option allows youto add, change, or remove a PINnumber for any phonebook that hasbeen imported.

Import: This option allows you tostore the phonebook of your mobilephone in the HFT system. When youlink your phone to the HFT systemand select this option, the systemwill start importing and loading thephonebook.

To use the mobile phonebook withthe HFT system, say or select‘‘Mobile Phonebook’’ from theInformation screen. If any phonebook is not stored and

your phone is not linked to the HFTsystem, Mobile Phonebook is grayedout.

The navigation display will change asshown above.

Features


356

09/01/28 18:20:21 32SMG631_361

HFT system does not allow you topair your phone if the vehicle ismoving.

Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFT system.

For information on linking to theHFT system, see page .

You can import the phonebook ofyour mobile phone in the HFTsystem. Link your phone to the HFTsystem and select ‘‘Import’’ from the‘‘Choose an option’’ screen. Whenthe message ‘‘The import wassuccessful.’’ is displayed, push in onthe Interface Dial to select ‘‘OK.’’

Search: This option allows you tosearch the phone numbers stored inthe HFT system. When you enterkeyword for a person’s name, suchas the first name or last name, thesystem will find the number youwant and let you make calls.

Delete: This option allows you todelete the stored phonebook fromthe HFT system. When you link yourphone to the HFT system and selectthis option, the system willautomatically delete the phonebookof the linked phone from the HFTsystem (see page ).

Before selling or discardingyour vehicle, make sure to delete theimported phonebook data.

360

340

To import the mobile phonebook

CONTINUED


Features 357

NOTE:

NOTE:

Example

09/01/28 18:20:30 32SMG631_362

Enter the keyword for a person’sname, such as the first name or lastname, using the Interface Dial. If thesystem does not find an exact match,say or select ‘‘LIST’’ when you finishentering the keyword.

The system will display a list ofperson’s names, with the closestmatch to the name you entered atthe top of the list.

Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list. If the phonebook youselect has a PIN icon, you will needthe four-digit PIN number to accessthe phonebook. The following screenwill appear.

Enter the PIN number to access thephonebook. You cannot access a PINprotected phonebook if you do notuse the correct PIN number.

You can search the stored numberby entering keywords to make callsby using the HFT system.

Select ‘‘Search’’ from the ‘‘Choose anoption’’ screen. The display willchange as shown above.

To search the imported phonebook


Features358

IMPORTEDPHONEBOOK

IMPORTED DATE

PIN ICON

09/01/28 18:20:39 32SMG631_363

－ The following category icons willappear:

Select the number (1 6) of thedesired person from the list.

Up to three category icons aredisplayed in the right side of the list.These category icons indicate howmany numbers are stored for theperson. If a name has more thanthree category icons, ‘‘ ’’ isdisplayed.

…

CONTINUED


Features 359

Home

Mobile

Preference

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

09/01/28 18:20:50 32SMG631_364

To delete the imported phonebookTo store in the Bluetooth Hands-FreeTelephone System

You can delete the storedphonebook from the HFT system.Link your phone to the HFT systemand select ‘‘Delete’’ from the‘‘Choose an option’’ screen. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list, then press ENTER.

Say or select ‘‘STORE IN Hands-Free Telephone’’ from the ‘‘Choose anumber to call’’ screen. The screenshown above will appear.

Select the desired number from thelist to store it in the HFT system.

After selecting a person, the systemwill display a list of the person’sphone numbers.

Select the desired number from thelist to make a call.


Features360

09/01/28 18:20:59 32SMG631_365

To add, change, or remove a PINnumber from any phonebook

To add a PIN number

You can add, change or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.Select ‘‘PIN Number’’ from the‘‘Choose an Option’’ screen. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Select the phonebook you wish toadd the PIN number to. When youselect the phonebook without aPIN icon, the display will changeas shown above.

After you select the phonebook, thefollowing screen appears.

Select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message ‘‘Theimported phonebook has beendeleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ tocomplete the deletion.

1.

CONTINUED


Features 361

09/01/28 18:21:08 32SMG631_366

To change a PIN number

Enter the four-digit PIN number.You will be asked to re-enter thePIN to verify.

Select the phonebook that youwish to change the PIN numberfor. The display will change asshown above.

Enter your current PIN number.2. 1. 2.


Features362

09/01/28 18:21:15 32SMG631_367

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Thisprocess will clear all paired phones,clear all entries in the phonebook,and clear the password andrestore the defaults in the systemsetup. Is this what you would liketo do?’’

This operation clears the HFTsystem of your password, yourpaired phones, and all names in theHFT system phonebook. Clearing isrecommended before you sell yourvehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Systemoptions are setup and clear.’’

Enter your new four-digit PINnumber. You will be asked to re-enter the PIN to verify.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is‘‘Preparing to clear all pairedphones, all phonebook entries, andthe password, and restore thedefaults in the system setup. Thismay take up to 2 minutes tocomplete. Say OK to proceed,otherwise say go back or cancel.’’

1.

2.

3.

3.

To clear the system, do this:

CONTINUED


Features

Clearing the System

363

09/01/28 18:21:23 32SMG631_368

？

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ TheHFT system response in the newselecting language is ‘‘You haveselected French. Name tags thatwere stored while in anotherlanguage will not be accessible inFrench mode. Would you like tocontinue?’’, then the systemrepeats the response in thecurrently selected language.

For example, change from English toFrench.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘English, French,Italian, German, or Spanish ’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘OK’’ toproceed, or say ‘‘Go back’’ or‘‘Cancel.’’

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ the HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘Please wait while thesystem is cleared.’’ This may takeup to 2 minutes to complete, thenthe HFT system response is, ‘‘Thesystem has been cleared.Returning to the main menu.’’

1.

2.4.

5.

To select any of the five languages;English, French, Italian, German, andSpanish, do this:


Features

Changing Language

364

09/01/28 18:21:30 32SMG631_369

＜＞

＜＞

CONTINUED

The HFT system response in theselected language is, for example,‘‘What is the French name for

Paul’s phone ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone’’ in theselected language. The HFTsystem response is, ‘‘What is theFrench name for Pat’sphone ?’’ Press and release theTalk button. Say ‘‘Pat’s phone.’’After all paired phones missing aFrench name tag are re-recorded,the HFT system will prompt in theselected language, ‘‘Returning tothe main menu.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout French name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFTsystem response in the selectedlanguage is ‘‘For the system toidentify phones that were pairedwhile in another language, thephone names need to be re-recorded.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ in theselected language (in French inthis example). If there are nopaired phones without Frenchname tags, the HFT systemresponse in the selected languageis ‘‘The language has beenchanged,’’ then ‘‘Returning to themain menu.’’ After this response,the system recognizes yourcommands in the selectedlanguage only.

4.3.


Features 365

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:21:35 32SMG631_370

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ in theselected language. If there are nopaired phones without Englishname tags, the HFT systemresponse is ‘‘The language hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’ in the selectedlanguage.

If there are paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFT systemresponse is ‘‘The language has beenchanged. For the system to identifyphones that were paired while inanother language, the phone namesneed to be re-recorded.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout English name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘English’’ inthe currently selected language.The HFT system response in thenew selecting language is, ‘‘Youhave selected English. Name tagsthat were stored while in Frenchmode will not be accessible inEnglish mode. Would you like tocontinue?’’, then the systemrepeats the response in thecurrently selected language.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage’’ in the currently selectedlanguage. The HFT systemresponse in the currently selectedlanguage is, ‘‘English, French,German, Italian, or Spanish?’’

2. 3.

1.

To change from French to English, dothis:

Features


366

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:21:41 32SMG631_371

＜＞

＜＞

When using voice control, the HFTsystem call is placed on hold, or theHFT system stops its voicerecognition. The HFT system callwill continue when voice controlcommand is ended. To operate theHFT system again, press the Talkbutton. Then after the beep, say theappropriate command.

For example, change from English toFrench.

The HFT system says, forexample, ‘‘What is the Englishname for Paul’s phone ?’’ Pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone’’ in theselected language. The HFTsystem response is ‘‘What is theEnglish name for Pat’sphone ?’’ Press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Pat’s phone.’’ After all pairedphones missing an English nametag are re-recorded, the HFTsystem will say ‘‘Returning to themain menu.’’

If you want to continue, followsteps 3 and 4 in page .

The HFT system response in thenew selecting language is ‘‘Youhave selected French. Name tagsthat were stored while in anotherlanguage will not be accessible inFrench mode. Would you like tocontinue?’’ The system alsorepeats the response in thecurrently selected language.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘French’’ inthe selecting language. In this case,say in French.

In addition, you cannot use the HFTsystem while receiving a PTY alarm.

1.

2.

4.

365

To select a language quickly, do thefollowing.

CONTINUED


Features

HFT System LimitationsQuick Language Selection

367

09/01/28 18:21:50 32SMG631_372

For additional conformanceinformation: www.jciblueconnect.com/faq

Hereby,declares that this

is in compliancewith the essential requirements andother relevant provisions of Directive1999/5/EC.

www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/EU_DoC.pdf

Johnson Controls Automotive,Hands-Free

Telephone System

For information of DoC(Declaration of Conformance)

Except EU models

EU models


Features368

09/01/28 18:21:54 32SMG631_373

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know what fuelto use and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your vehicle,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 370.................Fuel Recommendation . 370

............................Petrol models . 370

............................Diesel models . 370.........Service Station Procedures . 371

....................................Refueling . 371Opening and Closing

.............................the Bonnet . 373...................................Oil Check . 374

.............Engine Coolant Check . 376........................Fuel Cutoff Switch . 378

...............................Fuel Economy . 379...Accessories and Modifications . 380

.........................Carrying Luggage . 382

Before Driving

Before Driving 369

09/01/28 18:21:58 32SMG631_374

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 1,000 km (625 miles).During this period:

Avoid hard braking for the first300 km (200 miles).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon Premium/Super unleaded petrolwith a Research Octane Number(RON) of 95 or higher.

Your vehicle is designed to use onlyDiesel Fuel (also known asAutomotive gas oil and Derv).

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

You need to use the proper fuel forEN590 and also vary the fueldepending on the season.The quality of diesel fuel (Derv) canvary in different countries, and onlyclean and good quality fuel should beused.

Your vehicle is not designed to useBiodiesel (pure or highconcentration more than specified byEN590). For more information, askyour dealer.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded petrol with 91 ResearchOctane Number (RON) or higher.

Petrol of the recommendedResearch Octane Number (RON)may not be available in some areas.In this case, petrol of a lower octanemay be used temporarily if it doesnot cause engine ‘‘knocking.’’ Thiswill result in decreased engineperformance.Using petrol containing lead willdamage your vehicle’s emissions con-trols and engine. This contributes toair pollution.

On vehicles with manual transmissionBreak-in Period Fuel RecommendationPetrol models

Diesel modelsExcept for European and Russiamodels

European and Russia models

Before Driving

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

370

09/01/28 18:22:11 32SMG631_375

Park with the left side closest tothe service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingthe upper handle under the lowercorner of the dashboard.

Select the proper fuel according tothe regional or climate condition.Use of inadequate fuel may reduceengine power. In this case, thesymbol ‘‘PGM-FI’’ may appear on themulti-information display.

For proper fuel selection, ‘‘DIESEL’’is marked on the fuel fill cap.

Your vehicle is designed to use onlyUltra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel (alsoknown as Automotive gas oil andDerv).

Your vehicle is not designed to useBiodiesel. For more information, askyour dealer.

The quality of diesel fuel (Derv) canvary in different countries, and onlyclean and good quality fuel should beused.

You need to use proper Ultra LowSulfur Diesel fuel and vary the fueldepending on the season.

Select the proper fuel according tothe regional or climate condition.Use of inadequate fuel may reduceengine power. In this case, thesymbol ‘‘PGM-FI’’ may appear on themulti-information display.

For proper fuel selection, ‘‘Ultra LowSulfur DIESEL’’ is marked on thefuel fill lid.

Serious damage may occur if petrolis used in diesel engines.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Refueling

(South African model)

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Diesel models

371

09/01/28 18:22:23 32SMG631_376

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.

Place the fuel fill cap in the holderon the fuel fill door. To preventthe fuel fill cap from becoming lost,it is attached to the fuel filler witha tether.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Thisleaves some room in the fuel tankfor the fuel to expand withtemperature changes.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once.

4.

5.

6.

3.

Before Driving

Service Station Procedures

372

Fuel is highly flammable andexplosive. You can be burnedor seriously injured whenhandling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flameaway.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

TETHER

HOLDER

TETHER

HOLDER

Diesel models

Petrol models

09/01/28 18:22:32 32SMG631_377

Put your fingers between the frontedge of the bonnet and the frontgrille. The bonnet latch handle isabove the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push thishandle up to release the bonnet.Lift the bonnet.

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the bonnetrelease handle under the lowercorner of the dashboard. Thebonnet will pop up slightly.

If the bonnet latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open thebonnet without lifting the handle,the mechanism should be cleanedand lubricated.

Pull the support rod out of its clipby holding the grip, and insert theend into the designated hole in thebonnet.

1. 2. 3.

CONTINUED

Opening and Closing the Bonnet


Before Driving 373

BONNET RELEASE HANDLE LATCH GRIP CLIP

SUPPORT ROD

09/01/28 18:22:40 32SMG631_378

To close the bonnet, lift it up slightlyto remove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the bonnet toabout 30 cm (a foot) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

Do not press the engine coverforcibly. This may damage theengine cover and component parts.

All engines consume oil as part oftheir normal operation, therefore,the engine oil level must be checkedregularly, for example whenrefuelling. Always check the oilbefore a long journey.

The amount of oil consumeddepends on how the vehicle is drivenand the climatic and road conditionsencountered. The rate of oilconsumption can be up to 1 litre per1,000 km/625 miles. Consumption islikely to be higher when the engineis new.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Make sure the engine is warmed upand the vehicle is parked on levelground. Turn off the engine and waitapproximately 3 minutes beforechecking the oil level.

1.

On Diesel models


Before Driving

Oil Check

374

DIPSTICK1.4 engine model

09/01/28 18:22:48 32SMG631_379

Remove the dipstick carefully, soyou do not spill the oil. Spilled oilcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED


Before Driving 375

DIPSTICK

Diesel models DIPSTICK

LOWER MARK

UPPER MARK

1.8 engine model 1.4 engine model

09/01/28 18:22:56 32SMG631_380

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page

on petrol models, on dieselmodels.459 461

463


Before Driving

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Adding Engine Oil On petrol models

376

RESERVE TANK

MINMAX

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

1.4 engine model

Diesel models1.8 engine model

09/01/28 18:23:04 32SMG631_381

The coolant level in the expansiontank should be checked only whenthe engine and the cooling systemare cold. Make sure it is between theMAX and MIN lines. If it is belowthe MIN line, see

on page .

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

465

444

Adding EngineCoolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

On Diesel models


Before Driving 377

MIN

Diesel modelsEXPANSION TANK

RESERVE TANK

MAX LINEMIN LINE

MAX

MIN

RESERVE TANK

MAX

1.8 engine model with automatictransmission

1.8 engine model with manualtransmission

09/01/28 18:23:11 32SMG631_382

The fuel cutoff switch is behind thedriver’s side corner vent. To accessthe switch:

After the switch has activated, itmust be reset by pressing the buttonbefore the engine can be restarted.

In a collision or sudden impact, thisswitch automatically cuts off the fuelsupply to the engine.

Open the driver’s door.

Pry the lower front side of the sidepanel under the door seal, thenpull out the side panel carefully.

Remove the side panel of thedashboard carefully.

Locate the fuel cutoff switchbehind the corner vent.1.

3.

2.

4.

Fuel Cutoff Switch (For some types)

Before Driving378

Leaking fuel can ignite orexplode, causing you to beseriously or fatally injured.

Always check for fuel leaksbefore resetting the switch.

SIDE PANEL

Right-hand drive type is shown. FUEL CUTOFF SWITCH

09/01/28 18:23:20 32SMG631_383

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceschedule. See

(see page).

an underinflated tyrecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy and reduces the chanceof corrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use the cruise control (onsome types) when appropriate.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Combine several short trips intoone.

444

For example,

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Fuel Economy

Before Driving 379

09/01/28 18:23:27 32SMG631_384

Your dealer has genuine Hondaaccessories that allow you topersonalize your vehicle. Theseaccessories have been designed andapproved for your vehicle.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows as these may interferewith proper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

570

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving380

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability,and performance, and causea crash in which you can behurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories andmodifications.

09/01/28 18:23:36 32SMG631_385

Larger or smaller wheels and tyrescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Some examples are:

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving 381

09/01/28 18:23:42 32SMG631_386

＊

＊

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxDoor and seat-back pocketsLuggage area, including the rearseats when folded, and under-floorluggage areaConsole compartmentCentre pocketRoof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much luggage,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tyres, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of luggage, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Before Driving

Carrying Luggage

382

: For some types

LUGGAGE AREA

REAR DOOR POCKET

FRONT DOOR POCKET

CENTRE POCKET

GLOVE BOX

CENTRE CONSOLE

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

UNDER-FLOOR LUGGAGE AREA

PASSENGER’S SEAT-BACK POCKET

(P.185)

(P.184)

(P.185)

(P.189)

09/01/28 18:23:52 32SMG631_387

When you load luggage, the totalweight of the vehicle, all passengers,luggage and towbar must not exceedthe maximum permissible weight.The load for the front and rear axlesalso must not exceed the maximumpermissible axle weight.Refer to page for the maximumpermissible weight and maximumpermissible axle weight.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, and proper operation of theseats. Do not stack items higherthan the back of the front seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Do not put any items on top of theluggage area cover. They canblock your view and be thrownaround the vehicle during a crash.

588

Load Limits Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Luggage

Before Driving 383

Overloading or improperloading can affect handlingand stability and cause acrash in which you can behurt or killed.

Follow all load limits andother loading guidelines inthis manual.

09/01/28 18:23:59 32SMG631_388

Distribute luggage evenly on thefloor of the luggage area, placingthe heaviest items on the bottomand as far forward as possible.Try to secure the items with ropeor cord so they will not shift whileyou are driving.

If you fold down the seat-backs, orlift up the rear seats, tie downitems that could be thrown aboutthe vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.Try to secure the items with ropeor cord so they will not shift whileyou are driving. Do not stackitems higher than the back of thefront seats.

Refer to page for folding rearseats.

If you lift up the rear seats, followthe instructions above, and be sureto keep luggage height below thebottom of the window. If luggageis higher, it could interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Do not place items on the luggagearea cover, or stack objects higherthan the top of the back seat. Theycould block your view and bethrown about the vehicle during acrash or sudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your dealerfor further information.

Concerning means of lashing andretaining devices offered on theaccessory market, please contactyour dealer.

A normal bike rack must not befitted to the tailgate.

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the informationthat came with your roof rack.

66170

Carrying Luggage

Before Driving

Carrying Luggage in the LuggageArea or on a Roof Rack

carbon monoxidepoisoning

384

09/01/28 18:24:09 32SMG631_389

To secure luggage, use the four floorhooks in the luggage area. Makesure all stored items are securedbefore driving.

These hooks are also used to installa net for securing a flat tyre (seepage ).536

On vehicles with spare tyre

Carrying Luggage

Before Driving

Luggage Hooks

385

09/01/28 18:24:14 32SMG631_390

386

09/01/28 18:24:17 32SMG631_391

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual, automatic and i-SHIFTtransmissions. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour vehicle, the braking system, thevehicle stability assist (VSA) system,and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer.

........................Driving Guidelines . 388

........................Preparing to Drive . 389Starting the Engine

(Petrol models with manualtransmission and automatic

....................transmission) . 390Starting the Engine (Petrol

...............models with i-SHIFT) . 392Starting the Engine

.........................(Diesel models) . 393...................Manual Transmission . 395

..............Automatic Transmission . 400i-SHIFT (Automated Manual

...........................Transmission) . 406...........................................Parking . 418

.............................Braking System . 419...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 420

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)........................................System . 422

...............Hill Start Assist System . 424..........Deflation Warning System . 425

...............Driving in Bad Weather . 430...........................Towing a Trailer . 432

Driving

Driving 387

09/01/28 18:24:21 32SMG631_392

Curbs and steep inclines coulddamage the front and rearbumpers. Low curbs that do notaffect the average vehicle may behigh enough to hit the bumper onyour vehicle. The front or rearbumper may scrape when trying todrive onto an incline, such as asteep driveway or trailer ramps.

Your vehicle is designed to give youoptimum handling and performanceon well-maintained roads. As part ofthis design, your vehicle has aminimum of ground clearance.

Use caution if you ever drive yourvehicle on very rough or ruttedroads. You could damage thesuspension and underbody bybottoming out. Going too fast overparking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ canalso cause damage.

Driving Guidelines

Driving388

09/01/28 18:24:26 32SMG631_393

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the bonnet is fullyclosed.

Check that the tailgate is fullyclosed.

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Visually check the tyres. If a tyrelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

17

1.

2.

3.

4.

6.

7.

8.

9.5.

10.

11.

72

151

165

179

Preparing to Drive

Driving 389

09/01/28 18:24:36 32SMG631_394

Push the clutch pedal down all theway and shift the transmission toneutral.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Apply the parking brake.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Turn the ignition key to the ON(II) position.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 5 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 6.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, push the ENGINE STARTbutton. Do not hold the ENGINESTART button for more than 15seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start right away, pause

for at least 10 seconds beforetrying again.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled. See

on page .

1.

3.

4.

5.

2.

6.

7.

153

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Starting the Engine (Petrol models)

Driving

Manual Transmission andAutomatic Transmission

ImmobilizerSystem

390

ENGINE STARTBUTTON

M/T model is shown.

09/01/28 18:24:47 32SMG631_395

§

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air foundat altitudes above 2,400 meters(8,000 feet) adds to this problem.

If the outside temperature is belowfreezing, or if your vehicle has notbeen driven for several days, warmup the engine for a few minutesbefore driving (prohibited inGermany! 30 StVO).


Driving 391

09/01/28 18:24:51 32SMG631_396

§


on page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air foundat altitudes above 2,400 meters(8,000 feet) adds to this problem.

If the outside temperature is belowfreezing, or if your vehicle has notbeen driven for several days, warmup the engine for a few minutesbefore driving (prohibited inGermany! 30 StVO).

Make sure the shift lever is inneutral (N) with the brake pedalpressed, and the gear positionindicator shows N. If the shiftlever is not in neutral (N) positionor the brake pedal is not pressed,you cannot start the engine.

Turn the ignition key to the ON(II) position.

Press on the brake pedal andmove the shift lever to neutral.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.


Without touching the acceleratorpedal, push the ENGINE STARTbutton. Do not hold the ENGINESTART button for more than 15

seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start right away, pausefor at least 10 seconds beforetrying again.

Make sure the gear positionindicator shows the appropriate gearposition before driving the vehicle.

1.

3.

4.

5.

2.

153

i-SHIFT (Automated ManualTransmission)

ImmobilizerSystem


Driving392

ENGINE STARTBUTTON

09/01/28 18:25:01 32SMG631_397


Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway and shift the transmission toneutral.

Turn the ignition key to the ON(II) position. Wait until the glowplugs indicator turns off.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, push the ENGINE STARTbutton. Do not hold the ENGINESTART button for more than 15seconds at a time (20 seconds incold weather). If the engine doesnot start right away, pause for atleast 20 seconds before tryingagain.

In very cold climates the batterycharging and oil pressure indicatorsmay take several seconds to go off.Similarly, engine cranking times willalso increase.

In the interests of fuel economy, it isadvisable to start driving straightaway, remembering that harshacceleration or labouring the enginebefore the normal operatingtemperature has been reached candamage the engine.


on page .

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

153

CONTINUED

Cold Climates

Warming Up

ImmobilizerSystem

Starting the Engine (Diesel models)

Driving 393

ENGINE STARTBUTTON

09/01/28 18:25:11 32SMG631_398

The engine must not be run abovefast idle speed until the oilpressure warning indicator goesoff. This will ensure that theengine and turbocharger bearingsare properly lubricated beforebeing run at normal driving speeds.

To avoid the possibility of damagingthe turbocharger bearings throughinadequate lubrication, ALWAYSallow the engine to idle for 10seconds before turning off theengine.

Ignition Switching Off

Starting the Engine (Diesel models)

Driving394

09/01/28 18:25:15 32SMG631_399

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift fromany forward gear to reverse whilethe vehicle is moving at a certainspeed (see page ).

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Whenyou are not shifting, do not rest yourfoot on the clutch pedal. This cancause excessive clutch wear.

399

CONTINUED

Manual Transmission

Driving 395

09/01/28 18:25:21 32SMG631_400

Do not rest your hand on the shiftlever while driving; pressuretransmitted from your hand maycause premature wear to the gearselector mechanism.

Your vehicle is equipped with analuminium shift lever. If you leavethe vehicle parked outside for a longtime on a hot day, be careful beforemoving the shift lever. Because ofthe heat, the shift lever may beextremely hot. If the outsidetemperature is low, the shift leverfeels cold.

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear. Refer to themaximum allowable speeds charts.

On some models

Manual Transmission

Driving396

Rapid slowing or speeding-up can cause loss of controlon slippery surfaces. If youcrash, you can be injured.

Use extra care when drivingon slippery surfaces.

09/01/28 18:25:26 32SMG631_401

＊

＊

The speeds in this table are themaximum allowable speeds in eachgear. If you exceed these speeds, theengine speed will enter into thetachometer’s red zone. If this occurs,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter in theengine’s computer controls. Theengine will run normally when youreduce the rpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure thevehicle will not exceed the maximumallowable speed specified by thechart for the lower gear to avoidengine damage.

Gear

1st2nd3rd4th5th

Maximum allowablespeeds

57 km/h (36 mph)97 km/h (60 mph)

139 km/h (86 mph)172 km/h (107 mph)213 km/h (132 mph)

Gear

1st2nd3rd4th5th

Gear

1st2nd3rd4th5th


45 km/h (28 mph)84 km/h (53 mph)



40 km/h (24 mph)77 km/h (48 mph)


1.4 engine model

1.8 engine model

2.2 engine model (diesel)

The values shown are the speeds when theengine is at 4,500 rpm.

:

Maximum Allowable Speeds

Manual Transmission

Driving 397

09/01/28 18:25:34 32SMG631_402

The shift indicator guides shifttiming of the gear when you wouldlike to achieve good fuel efficiency.Better fuel economy will be obtained,if you change the gear when theshift indicator is on, and then youoperate the accelerator with theECO indicator on (see page ).

If there is a problem with the shift upor down indication system, both ofthe shift up and shift down indicatorswill not come on. Have your vehicleinspected by your dealer.

Road and traffic conditions mayrequire you to shift at times otherthan those indicated.

This indicator will not prompt todownshift to first gear. It is up to youto downshift to first gear to increaseengine braking. Avoid sudden enginebraking.

When the shift indicator comes on,the ECO indicator will turn off.Shifting when prompted by the shiftindicator, the ECO indicator willshow the current fuel economy.

The shift down indicator promptsyou to shift to a lower gear accordingto your acceleration when you areclimbing a hill or for fasteraccelerating on a level road.

90

Manual Transmission

Driving

Shift Up/Shift Down Indicators

398

The shift indicator is only aguide to help you achievebetter fuel economy. Neverrefer to the Shift Indicatorswhen road and trafficconditions are unsuitable orwhen it may distract you.

ECO INDICATOR

SHIFT DOWN INDICATOR

SHIFT UP INDICATOR

09/01/28 18:25:42 32SMG631_403

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the neutralgate, then shift to reverse.

If you are still unable to shift toreverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toreverse.

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

The manual transmission haslockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from any forward gear toreverse while the vehicle is movingat a certain speed. If you cannot shiftto reverse when the vehicle isstopped, do the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Reverse Lockout

Manual Transmission

Driving 399

09/01/28 18:25:50 32SMG631_404

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of apossible problem with thetransmission, you will see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or, the symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever, then pull the lever.You cannot shift out of Park whenthe ignition switch is in the LOCK(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

400

RELEASE BUTTONSHIFT LEVER POSITIONINDICATORS

SHIFT LEVER

09/01/28 18:25:58 32SMG631_405

－－

CONTINUED

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

3

3

3

3

This positionmechanically locks the transmission.Use Park whenever you are turningoff or starting the engine. To shiftout of Park, you must press on thebrake pedal and have your foot offthe accelerator pedal. Press therelease button on the front of theshift lever to move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and the release button on thefront of the shift lever to shift fromPark to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

405


Driving

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

401

09/01/28 18:26:05 32SMG631_406

－－－Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected. Use Dwhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain,or to provide engine braking whengoing down a steep hill. D can alsokeep the transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

3

3


Driving

Neutral (N) Drive (D) Drive (D )3

402

09/01/28 18:26:09 32SMG631_407

－－ To shift from second tofirst, press the release button on thefront of the shift lever. This positionlocks the transmission in first gear.By upshifting and downshiftingthrough 1, 2, D and D, you canoperate this transmission much likea manual transmission without aclutch pedal.

To shift to second,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with atrailer (if applicable).

3


Driving

First (1)Second (2)

403

09/01/28 18:26:16 32SMG631_408

The speeds in this table are themaximum allowable speeds in eachposition. If you exceed these speeds,the engine speed will enter into thetachometer’s red zone. If this occurs,you will feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter in theengine’s computer controls. Theengine will run normally when youreduce the rpm below the red zone.

Position

12

D

Before downshifting, make sure thevehicle will not exceed the maximumallowable speed specified by thechart for the lower gear to avoidengine damage.

Maximumallowable speeds

60 km/h (37 mph)106 km/h (65 mph)156 km/h (96 mph)3


Driving


404

09/01/28 18:26:21 32SMG631_409

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover. Using asmall flat-tipped screwdriver ormetal fingernail file, carefully pryon the edge of the cover to removeit.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the left side. Press thebrake pedal, and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

6.


Driving

Shift Lock Release

405

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

COVER

09/01/28 18:26:31 32SMG631_410

Your vehicle’s i-SHIFT (automatedmanual transmission) has sixforward speeds based on the 6-speedmanual transmission, and gearselection and clutch operation areelectronically controlled forsmoother shifting and better fueleconomy. With i-SHIFT, you canoperate the vehicle in either of thetwo driving modes: automatic andmanual.

In the manual mode, the selectedgear position number is displayednext to the speedometer on theupper display.

If you select the automatic mode,‘‘A’’ is displayed along with theselected gear position number nextto the speedometer on the upperdisplay and the REV indicator goesout. Pressing either paddle shifter ormoving the shift lever back or

forward will cause the transmissionto go into the manual mode. ‘‘A’’ willgo out, and only the selected gearposition number will be displayed.

In the manual mode, you can shift upor down manually with the shift leveror the paddle shifters, much like a6-speed manual transmission withoutoperating the clutch pedal. In theautomatic mode, the i-SHIFT allowsyou to drive the vehicle just like a6-speed automatic transmission. Pushing the shift lever to the left

side (A/M position) also switchesthe driving mode between theautomatic and manual modes.

i-SHIFT (Automated Manual Transmission)

Driving

Gear Position Indicator

406

Automatic mode is selected.GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

09/01/28 18:26:38 32SMG631_411

Before starting, make sure the gearposition indicator in the upperdisplay shows you that thetransmission is shifted properly.

If the gear position indicator blinks,the transmission cannot be shifted.Return the shift lever to neutral,pause, then move it again whilepressing the brake pedal.

The shift lever has three positions:neutral, reverse and driving positions.It must be in neutral and the brakepedal must be pressed to start theengine. You must also press on thebrake pedal when you move the shiftlever out from neutral to the drivingposition or reverse.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the segmentdisplay of the gear position indicatorcomes on, then it shows theappropriate shift lever position (N, R,or any other gear position that iscurrently selected). If the battery isnot well charged or goes dead, youmust move the shift lever to neutraland press on the brake pedal forabout 3 seconds to show the shiftlever position after reconnecting thebattery or jump starting. CONTINUED

Driving


Shifting

407

Upshift

Downshift

DRIVING POSITION

SEGMENT DISPLAY

09/01/28 18:26:46 32SMG631_412

When you are not shifting, do notmove the shift lever. Moving theshift lever can cause thetransmission to shift into neutralunexpectedly or to switch thedriving mode between theautomatic and manual modes.

If it is needed to stop briefly whiledriving, keep the transmission in anygear, press firmly on the brake pedal,and keep your foot off theaccelerator pedal. This prevents thevehicle from moving unexpectedlyand accidentally.

Make sure the gear positionindicator shows you the appropriategear position before starting. Thebrake pedal must be pressed, or thegear position indicator begins toblink and the transmission cannot beshifted.

To select the automatic mode, pushthe shift lever to the left side (A/Mposition) from the driving position. Pulling either of the paddle shifters

also selects the manual mode whenthe shift lever is in the drivingposition.

Push the shift lever forward orbackward from the driving positionto select the manual mode. Movingthe shift lever to the A/M positionalso switches to the manual mode.

With the ignition switch off, youcan move the shift lever, but thetransmission cannot be shifted.

Do not keep the vehicle stoppedby operating the accelerator pedalon an incline. This can damage theclutch system and thetransmission.

Do not press the brake andaccelerator pedals at the sametime. This can damage the clutchsystem and the transmission.


Driving408

PADDLESHIFTER

09/01/28 18:26:54 32SMG631_413

－

CONTINUED

If you move the shift lever fromneutral to the driving position orreverse without pressing the brakepedal, the gear position indicatorbegins to blink and the transmissioncannot be shifted. The controlsystem still allows you to start thevehicle by pressing and releasing thebrake pedal within about 25 seconds.

Make sure the gear positionindicator in the upper displayshows you the appropriate gearposition before starting the vehicle.

Before turning off the engine, thetransmission should be shifted tothe first gear when facing uphill.On a downhill slope, it should be inreverse gear.

If there is a problem in the i-SHIFTcontrol system while you are driving,the i-SHIFT system indicator comeson in the instrument panel. For moreinformation, see page .

To start driving the vehicle, releasethe parking brake and release thebrake pedal gradually, then press theaccelerator pedal slowly.

Use Neutral andpress on the brake pedal wheneveryou start the engine. If the shift leveris not in neutral (N) position or thebrake pedal is not pressed, youcannot start the engine. When youare moving the shift lever fromneutral to another gear, press on thebrake pedal and have your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If you need to restart a stalled engine,use neutral position (see page

for ).

As starting the vehicle is assisted bycreeping for smooth operation, youcan start out slowly on level groundwithout pressing the acceleratorpedal firmly. On uphill slopes, thiscreeping is not effective, and thevehicle may roll backward dependingon the circumstances. Make sure toset the parking brake if the vehicleshould roll back.

416

554


Driving

Neutral (N)

Jump Starting

409

09/01/28 18:27:01 32SMG631_414

－The i-SHIFT automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 6) for yourspeed and acceleration.

Come to a full stopbefore you shift into reverse. Youcan damage the transmission bytrying to shift into reverse with thevehicle moving.

Your vehicle has a reverse lockout toprevent the transmission fromshifting into reverse from anyforward gear. The transmission willnot enter into reverse gear while thevehicle speed is over 3 km/h (2mph) if you move the shift lever toreverse from neutral or any otherforward gear unexpectedly. Do nottry to shift into reverse with thevehicle moving to preventtransmission damage.

Make sure the gear positionindicator shows ‘‘R’’ before startingthe vehicle.

If you cannot shift into any gear fromneutral, the gear position indicatorwill blink in the upper display. Thismeans the transmission is in theneutral position regardless of theshift lever position. If this happens,return the shift lever to the neutralposition, pause, and then move it outfrom neutral while pressing on thebrake pedal.

If the driver’s door is open with theshift lever in the driving position orreverse and the engine running, thealarm sounds continuously and thegear position indicator blinks.

Do not move the shift lever to theneutral position while driving. Youwill lose engine braking and may losecontrol of the vehicle.

When you start the vehicle, theautomatic mode is selectedautomatically for smooth operation.You will see the ‘‘A’’ indicator alongwith the selected gear positionnumber in the upper display. Whiledriving, the transmissionautomatically upshifts from thelower gear to the higher gear andalso downshifts automatically.

When you accelerate from a stop,the transmission starts in the firstgear in the automatic mode. Beforestarting off, make sure the gearposition indicator shows the ‘‘A1’’position.

The transmission downshifts to thefirst gear as the vehicle comes to acomplete stop.


Driving

Driving in Automatic ModeReverse (R)

410

09/01/28 18:27:10 32SMG631_415

－

CONTINUED

To switch the driving mode betweenthe manual and automatic modes,push the shift lever to the left side(A/M position) from the drivingposition. You can also return to themanual mode by pushing the shiftlever forward or backward from thedriving position. Pulling eitherpaddle shifter on the steering wheelalso switches to the manual mode.

In the automatic mode, theautomatic mode indicator ‘‘A’’ isdisplayed along with the selectedgear position number in the upperdisplay, and the REV indicator goesout. If you change to the manualmode, ‘‘A’’ indicator goes out, andthe currently selected gear positionnumber remains.

When the control system releasesthe clutch to change a gear, you mayfeel deceleration depending on thedriving conditions.

You will hear a mechanical noise andfeel a vibration when thetransmission shifts up or down. Thisis normal; it is the transmissionshifting mechanically according tothe signals from the control system.

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.To downshift, push the shift leverbackward or pull the left side paddleshifter ( ). This will switch thedriving mode to the manual mode.To return to the automatic mode,push the shift lever to the left side(A/M position).

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

For faster acceleration while driving,you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.

Engine Speed Limiter


Driving 411

09/01/28 18:27:18 32SMG631_416

＋－

＋

－

When you select the manual mode,the automatic mode indicator ‘‘A’’ inthe upper display goes out, and thecurrently selected gear positionnumber remains. The REV indicatoralso comes on if the setting is on. Toreturn to the automatic mode, pushthe shift lever to the left side fromthe driving position. You will see ‘‘A’’along with the selected gear positionnumber in the upper display.

Each time you push or pull the shiftlever, or pull either paddle shifter,the transmission shifts one gear upor down. According to the drivingconditions, you can shift up or downmore than two gears at a time.

You can shift up or down manuallywith the shift lever or the paddleshifters. To enter the manual mode,move the shift lever to the A/Mposition, push the shift lever forwardor backward from the drivingposition, or pull either paddle shifterwith the shift lever in the drivingposition.

To shift up, push the shift leverforward. To shift down, pull the shiftlever backward.

You can also shift up or down withthe (right side) or (left side)paddle shifters on each side of thesteering wheel. To shift up, pull theright side paddle shifter ( ). Toshift down, pull the left side paddleshifter ( ).

In the manual mode, thetransmission keeps the selected gearin normal driving. There is noautomatic downshift when you pushthe accelerator pedal to the floor.But if you press the brake and thevehicle slows down to a certain

speed, the transmission downshiftsautomatically and selects the suitablegear to prevent the engine fromstalling.

If you try to downshift at a speedthat would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission does not downshift.When the vehicle speed slows tobelow the redline of the selectedlower gear position, the transmissiondownshifts, and the display showsthe selected lower gear positionnumber.

Also, if you try to shift up before theengine speed has reached theallowable engine speed in theselected higher gear, thetransmission will not shift up.


Driving

Driving in Manual Mode

412

09/01/28 18:27:26 32SMG631_417


Even though your vehicle’s gearoperation is controlled electronically,make sure the vehicle will notexceed the maximum allowablespeed specified in the table beforedownshifting.

The speeds in this table are themaximum allowable speeds in eachgear. If you exceed the maximumspeed for the gear you are in, theengine speed will enter into thetachometer’s red zone. If this occurs,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter in theengine’s computer controls. Theengine will run normally when youreduce the rpm below the red zone.

When you accelerate from a stop,the transmission starts in the firstgear, and you must manually upshiftbetween first and sixth gears.Downshifting also gives you morepower when climbing. Make sureyou upshift before the engine speedreaches the tachometer’s red zone.

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before down shifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

Do not drive in the higher gearswhen the vehicle speed is low.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effectiveemissions control.

The transmission downshifts to thefirst gear when the vehicle comes toa complete stop. Also it downshiftsautomatically to the first gear whenthe vehicle speed reaches about 5km/h (3 mph) or less.

CONTINUED


Driving 413

Rapid acceleration ordeceleration can cause lossof control on slipperysurfaces, and you can beinjured in a crash.

Use extra care when drivingon slippery surfaces.

09/01/28 18:27:34 32SMG631_418

＋

To start the vehicle in second gear,start the engine, then push the shiftlever forward once from the drivingposition or press the right sidepaddle shifter ( ) on the steeringwheel once. Make sure the gearposition indicator on the upperdisplay shows ‘‘2’’ before starting out.Starting out in the second gear willhelp to reduce wheel spin in deepsnow or on a slippery surface.

Although your vehicle is equippedwith the hill start assist system, thevehicle may roll backward for a shortdistance depending on thecircumstances. Make sure to set theparking brake when starting off anincline in case the vehicle should rollback. For more information aboutthe hill start assist system, see page

.

Gear

1st2nd3rd4th5th

Do not try to keep the vehicleposition on an uphill slope by usingthe stop-and-go operation. Thiscan damage the clutch system.

When you stop the vehicle withthe engine running on an uphillslope, never keep the vehiclestopped by operating theaccelerator pedal. This will causeexcessive clutch wear and damagethe clutch system and thetransmission.

The system continues starting in thesecond gear until the vehicle’s speedexceeds 15 km/h (9 mph).


45 km/h (27 mph)84 km/h (52 mph)


424

Starting in Second Gear


Driving

Driving on Hills

414

09/01/28 18:27:42 32SMG631_419

CONTINUED

Come to a complete stop and alwaysset the parking brake when you parkthe vehicle.

To stop briefly with the engine idling,keep the transmission in any gear,press firmly on the brake pedal, andkeep your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Before moving away, make sure thegear position indicator in the upperdisplay shows you the appropriategear position.

If you press the brake pedal and thevehicle slows down to a certainspeed, the control system releasesthe clutch and downshifts to a lowergear to prevent the engine fromstalling.

Before turning off the engine, makesure the gear position indicator inthe upper display shows you ‘‘A1’’ or‘‘1’’ on an uphill slope. On a downhillslope, make sure the gear positionshows ‘‘R.’’ For more information onparking tips, see page . If your vehicle gets stuck, ‘‘Rocking’’

your vehicle between forward andreverse gear or revving up theengine and allowing the wheels tospin freely at high speeds candamage the i-SHIFT transmission.Use a tow service to preventtransmission damage (see page ).

When the system receives the signalfrom ABS sensors that your vehicleis making a turn, the transmissiondoes not upshift in the automaticdriving mode.

The transmission cannot bedownshifted while the vehiclestability assist system (VSA) isactivated (see page ).

You can confirm the selected gearnumber even after you turn off theignition switch; the gear positionindicator stays on for severalseconds after the ignition switch isoff from the ON (II) position.

If the outside temperature is verylow, the transmission may notdownshift from the second gear tothe first gear while driving.

418

422

578


Driving

ParkingBraking or Stopping

Additional Driving Tips

415

09/01/28 18:27:52 32SMG631_420

If the gear position indicator doesnot show the appropriate gearposition, you cannot continue driving.See on page

.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if this indicatorcomes on and goes off repeatedly innormal driving.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving due to the clutch systemoverheating, it goes off when theclutch system temperature comesdown. If this indicator goes off whiledriving to your dealer, you cancontinue driving normally.

The symbol/message in the multi-information display also goes offalong with the i-SHIFT systemindicator.

If this indicator comes on and stayson while driving (in any gearposition), there may be problems inthe i-SHIFT control system oroverheating of the clutch system. Ifthis happens, avoid rapidacceleration, frequently shifting, anddriving at high speed, and have thevehicle checked by your dealer assoon as possible.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message in the multi-information display (see page ).108

578


Driving

i-SHIFT (AutomatedManual Transmission)System Indicator

Emergency Towing

416

09/01/28 18:27:59 32SMG631_421

Driving with the i-SHIFT systemindicator on can cause seriousdamage to the transmission and theclutch system.


Driving 417

09/01/28 18:28:02 32SMG631_422

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Make sure the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the luggage area or take themwith you.

Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot catalyticconverter could cause thesematerials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb, and put the transmission infirst gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb, and put the transmission inreverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Never install a sunshade betweenthe upper and lower displays on theinstrument panel. If you do, youcould cause heat damage to theupper display on a very hot day.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Before turning off the engine, makesure the gear position indicator inthe upper display shows you theappropriate gear position.

On vehicles with security system


Parking Tips

Parking

Driving418

09/01/28 18:28:13 32SMG631_423

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, increases wear, and reducestheir effectiveness. It also keepsyour brake lights on all the time,confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces theireffectiveness. Use the engine toassist the brakes by taking your footoff the accelerator and downshiftingto a lower gear.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

All four disc brakes have audiblebrake pad wear indicators.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System

Driving 419

09/01/28 18:28:21 32SMG631_424

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

If the ABS indicator comes on, theanti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional system,but without anti-lock. You shouldhave your dealer inspect your vehicleas soon as possible.

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On dry roads,you will need to press on the brakepedal very hard before the ABSactivates. However, you may feel theABS activate immediately if you aretrying to stop on snow or ice.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

569You should never pump the brake pedal.

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving420

09/01/28 18:28:29 32SMG631_425

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

569

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS cannot prevent the loss ofstability.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving 421

09/01/28 18:28:36 32SMG631_426

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes. When VSA activates, you will see the

VSA Activation indicator blink.

If the VSA system is off and youaccelerate from a stop, the vehiclemay pull, and it may take extra effortto return the steering wheel tocentre.

The VSA system indicator (see page) comes on and stays on when

there is a problem with the VSAsystem. The VSA activation indicatorwill also come on.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’or the symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

The VSA system indicator will alsocome on when there is a problem inthe hill start assist system. For moreinformation, see page .

83

424


VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving422

09/01/28 18:28:47 32SMG631_427

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

Driving with varying tyre or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tyres,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tyres (seepage ).

If you install winter tyres, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

This switch is next to the driver’sside vent. To turn the VSA systemon and off, press and hold it until youhear a beep.When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.Press and hold the switch again. Itturns the system back on.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

507

VSA OFF Switch VSA and Tyre Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving 423

09/01/28 18:28:55 32SMG631_428

Only on vehicles with i-SHIFTYour vehicle is equipped with the hillstart assist system to help start yourvehicle smoothly on uphill roads.

The vehicle may still roll backwardfor a short distance depending oncircumstances such as carryingluggage or towing a trailer. Makesure to set the parking brake in casethe vehicle should roll back.

The VSA system indicator will comeon when there is a problem in the hillstart assist system. With the VSAsystem indicator on, the hill startassist system will not activate.

While you release the brake pedal tostart on uphill roads, the hill startassist system will automatically keepthe brake system on for about 1second to prevent your vehicle fromrolling backward. For the system toactivate, the shift lever must be inany position but neutral.

Driving

Hill Start Assist System

424

09/01/28 18:29:01 32SMG631_429

Your vehicle is equipped with thedeflation warning system that turnson every time you start the engineand monitors the pressure in yourtyres while driving [over 25 km/h(15 mph)].

This system doesn’t monitor eachtyre pressure, but detects a decreasein air pressure by monitoring tyrerevolutions.

When a change in tyre revolutionsoccurs due to a decrease in tyrepressure, the indicator in theinstrument panel comes on. You willalso see the symbol/message on themulti-information display.

The deflation warning systemindicator may come on with a delayor may not come on at all when:

Two or more tyres are deflated atthe same time.One or more tyres are deflatedsignificantly.You drive on snowy or slipperyroads.The vehicle is parked, or drivenunder 25 km/h (15 mph) or athigh speed.

Your loading conditions are verydifferent from when initialisationwas done.

Your tyres are loaded heavier,such as when towing a trailer.

Snow chains are used.Using a compact spare tyre.

The deflation warning systemindicator may also come on when:

To use the system properly:

You accelerate/deacceleraterapidly or turn the steering wheelrapidly.Snow chains are used.

Your vehicle’s tyres must be theproper type and size, in goodcondition with adequate tread, andcorrectly inflated. Refer to page

for tyre inflation guidelines.You should initialise this system(see page ).

The deflation warning systemindicator may come on unexpectedlydue to the condition of your tyres orroad surfaces.

The deflation warning system hasnot been initialised.

The deflation warning system hasnot been initialised.

427

503

Driving

Deflation Warning System

425

09/01/28 18:29:15 32SMG631_430


When the deflation warningsystem indicator in the instrumentpanel is on, one of your vehicle’styres may be underinflated. Youwill also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ orthis symbol with a ‘‘CHECK TYREPRESSURE’’ message on themulti-information display.

You should stop and check yourtyres as soon as possible, andinflate them to the properpressure. If you think you cansafely drive a short distance to aservice station, proceed slowly tothe station, then inflate the tyre tothe recommended pressure. Referto page for tyre inflationguidelines. Then initialise thesystem (see page ).

If the tyre is flat, or if the tyrepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tyre with thecompact spare tyre (if equipped)(see page ). To use a tyrerepair kit, see page .

If the difference is significant oryou cannot make the deflationwarning system indicator and thesymbol/message on the multi-information display go out afterinflating the tyres to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

If there is a problem with thedeflation warning system, thisindicator begins to flash. It stopsflashing after approximately 1minute, then stays on. You willalso see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or thissymbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay.

When the deflation warningsystem indicator comes on alongwith the ABS, VSA system or VSAactivation indicator, there may bea problem with the ABS or VSAsystem. If this happens, have yourdealer check the system as soonas possible.

1.

2.

503

427

530537

Driving

Deflation WarningSystem Indicator


426

09/01/28 18:29:25 32SMG631_431

CONTINUED

The display shows the selectableitems. If you want to cancel‘‘INITIALISATION,’’ select‘‘CANCEL’’ by pressing the INFObutton, then press the SEL/RESET button to set. The displaygoes back to the ‘‘ ’’ display.

If you want to initialise thedeflation warning system, enterthe customizing mode (see page

). Then, after pressing theINFO button repeatedly until‘‘ ’’ is displayed, press theSEL/RESET button.

You should initialise the deflationwarning system when you:

Inflate the tyres to therecommended pressure.

Use the tyre repair kit (ifequipped).

Change or rotate the tyres (excepta compact spare tyre).

The deflation warning systemindicator and the symbol/messageon the multi-information stay on untilinitialising the deflation warningsystem.

1. 2.

115


Deflation Warning SystemInitialisation

Driving 427

09/01/28 18:29:35 32SMG631_432

After the initialisation iscompleted, you will see the abovedisplay for a few seconds, then thedisplay goes back to the settingdisplay. At the same time, thedeflation warning system indicatorwill go off.

If the initialisation is notsuccessful, you will see the abovedisplay for a few seconds, then thedisplay goes back to the settingdisplay. Repeat from step 3.

To initialise the deflation warningsystem, select ‘‘OK’’ by pressingthe INFO button, then press theSEL/RESET button to set.

3. 4. 5.


Driving428

09/01/28 18:29:42 32SMG631_433

To exit the customizing mode,select the exit mode shown aboveby pressing the INFO buttonrepeatedly, followed by the SEL/RESET button. The display goesback to the normal display.

After the initialisation, drive over25 km/h (15 mph) for about 10minutes.

6.

7.


Driving 429

09/01/28 18:29:46 32SMG631_434

－

Rain, fog, and snow conditions re-quire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your vehicle well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise control (onsome types) should not be used inthese conditions.

Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your vehicle longerto react, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few kilometers(miles) of driving while you adjust tothe change in driving conditions.This is especially true in snow. Aperson can forget some snow-drivingtechniques during the summermonths. Practice is needed to relearnthose skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Driving Technique

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving430

09/01/28 18:29:51 32SMG631_435

－－Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windscreen wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-screen washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windscreenwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windscreen or leave partsunwiped. Use the demister and airconditioning (on some types) to keepthe windows from fogging up on theinside (see pages and ).

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Check your tyresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘aquaplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tyres on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

210 216

Visibility Traction

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving 431

CAUTION: Do not drive on the roadwhere water is deep. Driving throughdeep water will cause damage to theengine and electrical equipment andthe vehicle will break down.

09/01/28 18:29:59 32SMG631_436

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir luggage. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

The total weight of the trailer andtowbar (with/without brakes) plusits luggage must not exceed themaximum towing weight. See page

.

The trailer nose load should neverexceed 75 kg (165 lbs). This is theamount of weight the trailer putson the towbar when it is fully-loaded. As a rule of thumb fortrailer weights of less than 750 kg(1,653 lbs), the trailer nose loadshould be 10 percent of the totaltrailer package.

588

Load Limits

Towing a Trailer

Driving432

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading yourvehicle and trailer can causea crash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

09/01/28 18:30:05 32SMG631_437

For example, if the trailer and itsload weigh 225 kg (500 lbs), thetrailer nose load should be 22.5 kg(50 lbs). Adjust trailer’s luggage tochange the trailer nose load. Startby putting approximately60 percent of the luggage towardthe front and 40 percent towardthe rear. With a trailer package ofmore than 750 kg (1,653 lbs), youmay need to adjust the luggageweight toward the rear. Neverload the trailer so the back isheavier than the front. This takesweight off your vehicle’s rear axleand reduces traction.

The maximum permissible weightmust not exceed the specified limitas shown on page .

The maximum permissible weightis total weight of the vehicle,driver, passengers, luggage andtowbar.

Please consider that theinstallation of optionals (and trailernose load when towing a trailer)will reduce the loading capacity.

Towing a load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The combined vehicle and trailerweights are the maximumpermissible weight and trailerweight with everything in and onthe trailer.

If you tow a trailer in mountainousconditions, remember to reduce10% of the combined vehicle andtrailer weights from the maximumtowing weight for every 1,000meters of elevation.

This weight will be estimated onnormal driving below 1,000 meterselevation.

The maximum towing weightmust not exceed the specified limitas shown on page .

The maximum loaded vehicleweight must not exceed thespecified limit as shown on page

.

588

588

588

Towing a Trailer

Driving 433

09/01/28 18:30:13 32SMG631_438

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and towbar,and that they cross under the trailernose and can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

If you are thinking of getting a trailerthat has brakes, be sure they areelectronically actuated. Do notattempt to tap into your vehicle’shydraulic system. No matter howsuccessful it may seem, any attemptto attach trailer brakes to yourvehicle’s hydraulic system will lowerbraking effectiveness and create apotential hazard.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Any towbar used on your vehiclemust be properly bolted to theunderbody.Refer to page for the towbarmounting points.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in this section. Also makesure that all equipment is properlyinstalled and maintained, and that itmeets the country’s regulationswhere you are driving.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtrailer nose load gauge, check thetotal weight, the weight at each axleand the trailer nose load the firsttime you set up a towing combination(a fully-loaded vehicle and trailer),then recheck the loads whenever theconditions change.

587

Safety Chains

Trailer Brakes

Towbars

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Checking Loads

Towing a Trailer

Driving434

09/01/28 18:30:23 32SMG631_439

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with the country’sregulations where you are driving.Check the requirements for theareas where you plan to tow, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.

You can get an optional trailerlighting connector for your vehiclefrom your dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem.

Always consult your dealer beforeconnecting the trailer lights to yourvehicle’s lighting system.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tyres, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The towbar, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

There may be laws requiring specialoutside mirrors when towing a trailer.Check the local laws in the country.Even if there are no legalrequirements, you should installspecial mirrors if you cannot clearlysee behind you, or if the trailercreates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

CONTINUED

Trailer Lights

Additional Trailer Equipment

Pre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

Driving 435

09/01/28 18:30:35 32SMG631_440

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmanoeuvre before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tyres and spare (ifequipped) are properly inflated,and the trailer tyres and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

Be sure to check regulationsconcerning the maximum speed ordriving restrictions for vehiclestowing trailers. If you are drivingacross several countries, checkeach country’s requirementsbefore leaving home, becauseregulations may vary.

Operating speed when towing atrailer is restricted to 100 km/h(62 mph).

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.

Do not exceed the limited speedwhen towing a trailer. At higherspeeds, the trailer may sway oraffect vehicle handling (see ‘‘

’’ in the next page foradditional gear information).

If you have an i-SHIFT (automatedmanual transmission), use theautomatic mode when towing atrailer. When you start or accelerateaway from a stop, the transmissionstarts in the first gear and iscontrolled for smooth operation.Selecting the gear is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting andbetter fuel economy according to thevehicle load and the trailer’s weight.

Driving Safely With a Trailer Towing Speeds and Gears

Drivingon Hills

Towing a Trailer

Driving436

09/01/28 18:30:43 32SMG631_441

CONTINUED

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and always apply enginebraking by shifting down. Whengoing down a steep hill, use the 1stgear to provide greater enginebraking.

Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Driving on an uphill road of morethan 12% slope is not recommendedfor your vehicle.

We recommend that you tow atrailer on the roads recommended bythe trailer association.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour high temperature indicator. Ifthe indicator remains on, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If you have an automatictransmission, use D position whentowing a trailer on level roads. D isthe proper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.

Either shift up or shift downindicator will come on at the besttime to shift to a higher or lowergear for the better fuel economy.

The shift down indicator will notprompt to downshift to first gear. Itis up to you to downshift to first gearto increase engine braking. Avoidsudden engine braking.

Road and traffic conditions mayrequire you to shift at times otherthan those indicated.

On vehicles with automatic transmission

On vehicles with manual transmission

3

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

437

09/01/28 18:30:54 32SMG631_442

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the transmissionand the clutch system to overheat.

Although your vehicle is equippedwith the hill start assist system, thevehicle may roll backward for a shortdistance depending on thecircumstances. Make sure to set theparking brake when starting off anincline in case the vehicle should rollback. For more information aboutthe hill start assist system, see page

.424

On vehicles with automatic transmission On vehicles with i-SHIFT

3

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

438

09/01/28 18:31:01 32SMG631_443

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steering wheel,then turn the wheel to the left to getthe trailer to move to the left, andturn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

You should keep the engine idlingfor about 2 minutes before turningoff the ignition switch. (Idling theengine is prohibited in somecountries. Always follow the legalrequirements of the countries inwhich you will drive.)

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin first or reverse (manual, i-SHIFT).Also, place wheel chocks at each ofthe trailer’s tyres.

bottom

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Backing Up On Diesel models onlyParking

439

09/01/28 18:31:07 32SMG631_444

440

09/01/28 18:31:09 32SMG631_445

Regularly maintaining your vehicle isthe best way to protect your invest-ment. You will be rewarded withsafer, more economical, trouble-freedriving. This section lists items thatneed to be checked regularly andexplains how to check them. It alsodetails some simple maintenancetasks you can do yourself. Themaintenance schedules show youwhen these things need to be done.

......................Maintenance Safety . 442.................Maintenance Schedule . 443

....................Maintenance Record . 453..............................Fluid Locations . 455

Adding Engine Oil.........................(Petrol models) . 459

Adding Engine Oil.........................(Diesel models) . 461

Engine Coolant.........................(Petrol models) . 463

Engine Coolant.........................(Diesel models) . 465

...................Windscreen Washers . 467....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 468

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 470................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 471

Air Cleaner Element.........................(Petrol models) . 473

Air Cleaner Element.........................(Diesel models) . 475

......................................Fuel Filter . 476.............................................Lights . 477

..............Air Conditioning System . 497..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 498

.................................Wiper Blades . 500..............................................Tyres . 503

...................Checking the Battery . 511

...................Replacing the Battery . 514.............................Vehicle Storage . 516

Maintenance

Maintenance

441

09/01/28 18:31:13 32SMG631_446

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedtechnician.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not fuel.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

Maintenance442

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which youcan be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual/Service Book.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructionsand precautions can causeyou to be seriously hurt orkilled.

Always follow theprocedures and precautionsin this owner’s manual.

09/01/28 18:31:23 32SMG631_447

－

The required maintenance schedulespecifies all maintenance required tokeep your vehicle in peak operatingcondition. Maintenance work shouldbe performed in accordance with thestandards and specifications ofHonda by properly trained andequipped technicians. Yourauthorized dealer meets all of theserequirements.

There are two types of maintenanceschedule in this owner’s manual. Oneis for petrol models (see pages to

), and the other is for dieselmodels (see pages ).

The maintenance schedule in thisowner’s manual should be appliedexcept for EU, Australia and SouthAfrica (see pages to ).

In EU countries, follow themaintenance schedule in the ServiceBook that came with your vehicle.

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several kilometers(miles).

Always use the recommendedpetrol only (see page ).

We recommend the use of genuineHonda parts and fluids or theirequivalent whenever you havemaintenance done. These are thesame high-quality items that wentinto your vehicle when it was new, soyou can be sure they fit and performflawlessly.

Always use the recommendeddiesel fuel only (see page ).

In Australia, follow the maintenanceschedule in the owner’s warrantyand service manual that came withyour vehicle.

In South Africa, follow themaintenance schedule in themaintenance booklet that came withyour vehicle.

The maintenance schedule assumesyou will use your vehicle as normaltransportation for passengers andtheir possessions. You should alsofollow these recommendations:

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother vehicle parts.

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

449446

452446

450 452

370

370

On Petrol models

On Diesel models

CONTINUED

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance 443

09/01/28 18:31:34 32SMG631_448

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Windscreen wipers Check thewiper condition monthly. If thewipers do not wipe the windscreensecurely, check them for wear,cracks, and other damage.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes and clutch Check thefluid level monthly. See page .

Brake pedal Check the brakepedal for smooth operation.

Parking brake Check theparking brake lever for smoothoperation.

Tyres Check the tyre pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

You should check the followingitems at the use or specified intervals.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level

Check the radiator reserve tankevery time you fill the fuel tank.See page .

Check the expansion tank everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Windscreen washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .


374

377

376

467

468

471

503

On Petrol models

On Diesel models

On Diesel models


Maintenance

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

444

09/01/28 18:31:47 32SMG631_449

－－

－

－

－

－

Battery Check its condition andthe terminals for corrosionmonthly. See page .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, position lights, tail-lights, high-mount brake light, andlicence plate lights monthly. Seepage .

Doors Check the tailgate andall doors including the rear doorsfor smooth opening/closing andsecure locking.

Horn Check the horn operation.

Air conditioning system (on sometypes) Check its operationweekly. See page .

Windscreen demister Operatethe heater and air conditioningand check the demister ventsmonthly.

511

497

477


Maintenance 445

09/01/28 18:31:53 32SMG631_450

－

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

This maintenance scheduleoutlines the minimum requiredmaintenance that you shouldperform to ensure the trouble-free operation of your vehicle.Due to regional and climaticdifferences, some additionalservicing may be required.Please consult your warrantybooklet for a more detaileddescription.

Maintenance Schedule for Petrol Models (Except EU, Australia, South Africa and Russia)

Maintenance446

MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E

Service at the indicated distanceor time whichever comes first.

km x 1,000miles x 1,000months

Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)

Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles)Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles)Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)

6037.536

14087.584

180112.5108

Every 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months


Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year

2012.512

4025.024

8050.048

10062.560

12075.072

160100.0

96

200125.0120

Only severe schedule is required in some countries: refer to the local warranty booklet that came with your vehicle.

Refer to page for replacement information under severe driving conditions.

At 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years, thereafterevery 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years

Refer to page for replacement information under severe conditions.

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil filter

Clean air cleaner element (Dry type only)Replace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace fuel filterReplace spark plugsInspect drive beltInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Iridium type

NormalSevereNormalSevere

1 :2 :3 :

449476

1

1

3

2

2

09/01/28 18:32:10 32SMG631_451

－

＊

＊

Maintenance Schedule for Petrol Models (Except EU, Australia, South Africa and Russia)

Maintenance 447

Visually inspect the following items:

MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E



6037.536

8050.048

2012.512

4025.024

10062.560

12075.072

14087.584

160100.0

96

180112.5108

200125.0120

Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 monthsEvery 3 years (independent of distance)

Rotate tyres every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)


Replace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filter (if equipped)Check expiry date for TRK bottle (if equipped)Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition atleast once per month)

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections



M/T

A/T

: 449

09/01/28 18:32:24 32SMG631_452

－

＊＊

＊

＊

This maintenanceschedule outlines theminimum requiredmaintenance that youshould perform toensure the trouble-freeoperation of yourvehicle. Due to regionaland climaticdifferences, someadditional servicingmay be required.Please consult yourwarranty booklet for amore detaileddescription.

Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule for Petrol Models (Russia)

448


MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E


km x 1,000months

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Replace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace fuel filterReplace spark plugs (Iridium)Inspect drive beltInspect idle speedReplace engine coolantReplace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filter (if equipped)Check lights alignmentTest drive (noise, stability, dashboard operation)Inspect vehicle corrosion

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connectionsTyre condition

Every 3 years

At 200,000 km or 10 years, thereafter every 100,000 km or 5 years

1512

Refer to page for replacement information under driving conditions.When you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air, under dusty conditions or the airflowfrom the climate control system becomes less than usual. Replace the filter every 15,000 km or 1 year.

4536

7560

10584

135108

165132

Every 120,000 km

3024

6048

Every 7,500 km or 6 months

9072

12096

150120

180144

NormalSevere

M/TA/T

1 :2 :

476

1

2

09/01/28 18:32:39 32SMG631_453

Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip, or in freezing temperaturesdriving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.Driving in extremely hot [over 35°C (95°F)] conditions.

If you drive your vehicle under one or more of the following severeconditions, the following items must be serviced according to themaintenance schedule indicated as Severe.

Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.Trailer towing, driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving in mountainousconditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

Items

Engine oil and oil filter

Transmission fluid(M/T, A/T)

Condition

A, B, C, D, E

B, D

A:

B:C:D:

E:

Except Russia

NOTE:

Severe driving conditions:

Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule for Petrol Models (Except EU, Australia and South Africa)

449

MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E

09/01/28 18:32:48 32SMG631_454

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

This maintenance scheduleoutlines the minimum requiredmaintenance that you shouldperform to ensure the trouble-free operation of your vehicle.Due to regional and climaticdifferences, some additionalservicing may be required.Please consult your warrantybooklet for a more detaileddescription.

Maintenance Schedule for Diesel Models (Except EU and South Africa)

Maintenance450

MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E



Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 yearEvery 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months

12075.072

8050.048

160100.0

96

200125.0120

4025.024



2012.512

6037.536

10062.560

14087.584

180112.5108

Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles)Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Replace air cleaner element (Wet type)

Replace fuel filterInspect drive beltReplace engine coolantReplace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakes


NormalSevere

M/T

: 452

09/01/28 18:33:01 32SMG631_455

－

CONTINUED


Maintenance 451


MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E



Replace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filter (if equipped)Check expiry date for TRK bottle (if equipped)Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition atleast once per month)

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Every 3 years (independent of distance)

2012.512

4025.024

6037.536

8050.048

10062.560

12075.072

14087.584

160100.0

96

180112.5108

200125.0120

Rotate tyres every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)


09/01/28 18:33:14 32SMG631_456

If you drive your vehicle under one or more of the following severeconditions, the following items must be serviced according to themaintenance schedule indicated as Severe.

Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip, or in freezing temperaturesdriving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.Driving in extremely hot [over 35°C (95°F)] conditions.Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.Trailer towing, driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving in mountainousconditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

Condition

A, B, C, D, E

D, E

B, D

Items

Engine oil and oil filter

Air cleaner element

Manual transmissionfluid

A:

B:C:D:

E:

NOTE:

Severe driving conditions:


Maintenance452

MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E

09/01/28 18:33:21 32SMG631_457

Have your servicing dealer record all required maintenance below. Keep receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

12,500 Mi.(or 12 Mo.)

25,000 Mi.(or 24 Mo.)

37,500 Mi.(or 36 Mo.)

50,000 Mi.(or 48 Mo.)

62,500 Mi.(or 60 Mo.)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

75,000 Mi.(or 72 Mo.)

87,500 Mi.(or 84 Mo.)

100,000 Mi.(or 96 Mo.)

112,500 Mi.(or 108 Mo.)

125,000 Mi.(or 120 Mo.)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

20,000 km

40,000 km

60,000 km

80,000 km

100,000 km

120,000 km

140,000 km

160,000 km

180,000 km

200,000 km

Maintenance Record (Except EU, Australia, South Africa and Russia)

Maintenance 453

09/01/28 18:33:28 32SMG631_458

Have your servicing dealer record all required maintenance below. Keep receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

(or 12 Mo.)

(or 24 Mo.)

(or 36 Mo.)

(or 48 Mo.)

(or 60 Mo.)

(or 72 Mo.)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

Km or Month

Date

Km or Month

Date

Km or Month

Date

Km or Month

Date

Km or Month

Date

Km or Month

Date

(or 84 Mo.)

(or 96 Mo.)

(or 108 Mo.)

(or 120 Mo.)

(or 132 Mo.)

(or 144 Mo.)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

Km or Month

Date

Km or Month

Date

Km or Month

Date

Km or Month

Date

Km or Month

Date

Km or Month

Date

Maintenance

15,000 km

30,000 km

45,000 km

60,000 km

75,000 km

90,000 km

105,000 km

120,000 km

135,000 km

150,000 km

165,000 km

180,000 km

Maintenance Record (Russia)

454

09/01/28 18:33:34 32SMG631_459

Fluid Locations (Petrol models)

Maintenance 455

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

RADIATOR CAP ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(Black cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

1.4 engine model with manual transmission

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)


09/01/28 18:33:37 32SMG631_460


Maintenance456



ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR


1.4 engine model with i-SHIFT


RADIATOR CAP


ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

09/01/28 18:33:41 32SMG631_461


Maintenance 457


RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP


ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR

1.8 engine modelBRAKE FLUID(Black cap)



AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

Manual transmission only

Automatic transmission only

09/01/28 18:33:45 32SMG631_462

Fluid Locations (Diesel models)

Maintenance458


EXPANSIONTANK


ENGINE OIL FILL CAP




09/01/28 18:33:49 32SMG631_463

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour theoil slowly and carefully so you do notspill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Let the enginewarm up and turn off the engine, letit sit for approximately 3 minutes,then check the oil level on theengine oil dipstick. Do not fill abovethe upper mark; you could damagethe engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil. It is highlyrecommended that you use genuineHonda Motor Oil, ‘‘ACEA A1/B1,’’‘‘ACEA A3/B3,’’ or ‘‘ACEA A5/B5’’in your vehicle for as long as youown it.

This oil is formulated to help yourengine use less fuel.

CONTINUED

Recommended Engine OilEuropean models

Adding Engine Oil (Petrol models)

Maintenance 459

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP


ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

09/01/28 18:33:56 32SMG631_464

You can select the proper SAE/ACEA viscosity oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart:

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade deter-gent oil. It is highly recommendedthat you use genuine Honda MotorOil in your vehicle for as long as youown it.

You can select the proper SAEviscosity oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart:

Always use an API service SL orhigher grade fuel-efficient oil. Thisoil is formulated to help your engineuse less fuel.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.


Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil (Petrol models)

Maintenance460

Ambient Temperature

Ambient Temperature

09/01/28 18:34:04 32SMG631_465

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour theoil slowly and carefully so you do notspill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Let the enginewarm up and turn off the engine, letit sit for approximately 3 minutes,then check the oil level on theengine oil dipstick. Do not fill abovethe upper mark; you could damagethe engine.

Always use a synthetic motor oil thatmeets the ACEA specifications, andis the proper viscosity as shown inthe following chart. When usingsynthetic oil, you must follow the oiland filter change intervals shown bythe maintenance schedule.

It is highly recommended that youuse genuine Honda Motor Oil or0W-30 synthetic motor oil meetingthe minimum specification: ‘‘ACEAA1/B1,’’ ‘‘ACEA A3/B3,’’ or ‘‘ACEAA5/B5.’’

CONTINUED

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil (Diesel models)

Maintenance

On vehicles without DPF

461

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

09/01/28 18:34:11 32SMG631_466

＊

＊

You can select the proper ACEA/SAE viscosity oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart:

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

It is highly recommended that youuse genuine Honda Motor Oil or0W-30 synthetic motor oil meetingthe specification: ‘‘ACEA C2’’ or‘‘ACEA C3.’’

You can select the proper ACEA/SAE viscosity oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart:

NOTE: 0W-30 oil is formulated toimprove fuel economy.

NOTE: 0W-30 is formulated toimprove fuel economy.

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil (Diesel models)

Maintenance

On vehicles with DPF only

462

Ambient Temperature

Ambient Temperature

09/01/28 18:34:20 32SMG631_467

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use genuine Honda AllSeason Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.This coolant is pre-mixed with 50percent antifreeze and 50 percentdistilled water. Never add straightantifreeze or plain water.

The cooling system contains manyaluminium components that cancorrode if an improper antifreeze isused. Some antifreeze, even thoughlabelled as safe for aluminium parts,may not provide adequate protection.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant (Petrol models)

Maintenance 463

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to sprayout, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK


09/01/28 18:34:28 32SMG631_468

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capanticlockwise, without pressingdown.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turninganticlockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spills immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

4.

5.

6.1.

2.

3.

Engine Coolant (Petrol models)

Maintenance464

RESERVE TANK


RADIATOR CAPRADIATOR CAP

1.4 engine model is shown.

09/01/28 18:34:38 32SMG631_469

If the coolant level in the expansiontank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use genuine Honda AllSeason Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.This coolant is pre-mixed with 50percent antifreeze and 50 percentdistilled water. Never add straightantifreeze or plain water.

The cooling system contains manyaluminium components that cancorrode if an improper antifreeze isused. Some antifreeze, even thoughlabelled as safe for aluminium parts,may not provide adequate protection.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant (Diesel models)

Maintenance 465

Removing the expansiontank cap while the engine ishot can cause the coolant tospray out, seriously scaldingyou.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the expansion tankcap.

EXPANSIONTANK

MIN LINE

MAX LINE

09/01/28 18:34:45 32SMG631_470

The coolant level should be up tothe MAX line. Add coolant if it islow.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spills immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the expansion tank cap backon, and tighten it fully.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Remove the expansion tank cap bypushing down and turninganticlockwise.


Loosen the expansion tank cap byturning it 1/8 turn anticlockwise.This will relieve any remainingpressure in the cooling system.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

Engine Coolant (Diesel models)

Maintenance466

MAX LINE

CAP

09/01/28 18:34:53 32SMG631_471

Check the fluid level in thewindscreen washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level asfollows:

Unfasten the reservoir cap.

Pull up the cap until the tube isfully exposed.

Check the fluid trace on the tube.If the fluid level is low, fill thereservoir with windscreen washerfluid.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindscreen washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windscreen wiperblades with windscreen washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

Do not use engine antifreeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindscreen washer reservoir.Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’spaint, while a vinegar/water solutioncan damage the windscreen washerpump. Use only commercially-available windscreen washer fluid.

1.

2.

3.

Windscreen Washers

Maintenance 467

Petrol models Diesel models

09/01/28 18:35:02 32SMG631_472

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance468

DIPSTICK

1.8 engine model

LOWERMARK

UPPERMARK

09/01/28 18:35:09 32SMG631_473

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda GenuineATF-Z1 (Automatic TransmissionFluid).

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Make sure the rubber cap on thedipstick fits in the dipstick guideand that you push the dipstick inall the way.

Damage resulting from the use oftransmission fluid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered bythe Honda new vehicle warranty.

Using transmission fluid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmissionoperation and durability, and couldresult in damage to the transmission.

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Donot mix with other transmissionfluids.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the service reminder indication.On vehicles without servicereminder system, follow themaintenance schedule in the ServiceBook that came with your vehicle.

On vehicles without the ServiceBook, follow the maintenanceschedule in this owner’s manual.

6.5.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 469

09/01/28 18:35:18 32SMG631_474

Always use genuine Honda MTF-3(Manual Transmission Fluid-3). If itis not available, you may use an APIservice SJ or higher grade motor oilwith a viscosity of SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40 as a temporary replacement.However, motor oil does not containthe proper additives, and continueduse can cause stiffer shifting.Replace as soon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distancerecommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Manual Transmission Fluid

Maintenance470

09/01/28 18:35:22 32SMG631_475

The brake fluid reservoir consists ofthe two parts: primary and secondaryreservoirs. The secondary reservoiris behind the primary reservoir.MAX mark is on the primaryreservoir, and MIN is on thesecondary.

Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

Brake fluid reservoirClutch fluid reservoir

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘BRAKEFLUID LOW’’ message on the multi-information display when the brakefluid level is low.

Replace the brake fluid according tothe recommendation in themaintenance schedule.

Always use genuine Honda BrakeFluid or an equivalent from a sealedcontainer that is marked DOT3 orDOT4 only. Brake fluid markedDOT5 is not compatible with yourvehicle’s braking system.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Brake System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance 471

MIN MAX

Diesel modelsPetrol models

MINMAXManual transmission model is shown.

09/01/28 18:35:32 32SMG631_476

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

Clutch System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance472

MAX

MIN

Diesel models

MAX

MIN

Petrol models with manualtransmission

Petrol models with i-SHIFTtransmission

MAX

MIN

09/01/28 18:35:39 32SMG631_477

The air cleaner element should bereplaced according to the time anddistance recommendations in themaintenance schedule.

The air cleaner element should alsobe cleaned according to themaintenance schedule.

Clean the air cleaner element byblowing compressed air through it inthe opposite direction to normal airflow. If you do not have access tocompressed air (such as a servicestation), ask your dealer to do thisservice.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing in the enginecompartment.

To replace it:

Unsnap the three (on 1.4 enginemodels) or four (on 1.8 enginemodels) hold-down clips andremove the air cleaner housingcover.

1.

On vehicles with dry type air cleanerelement

CONTINUED

Replacement

Cleaning

Air Cleaner Element (Petrol models)

Maintenance 473


CLIPSCLIPS

09/01/28 18:35:50 32SMG631_478

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Make sure to connect the airintake tube to the air cleanerhousing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and snap the three (on 1.4engine models) or four (on 1.8engine models) hold-down clipsback into place.

2.

3.

4. 5.

6.

Air Cleaner Element (Petrol models)

Maintenance474

1.4 engine model

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

1.8 engine model

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

1.8 engine model

09/01/28 18:35:59 32SMG631_479

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Unsnap the three holding-clips andpull up the front of the air cleanerhousing cover.

To replace it:

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing in the enginecompartment.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and snap the three holding-clips securely.

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

The air cleaner element should bereplaced according to the time anddistance recommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Replacement

Air Cleaner Element (Diesel models)

Maintenance 475

CLIPS

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

09/01/28 18:36:09 32SMG631_480

You will see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ orthe symbol with a ‘‘WATER INFUEL FILTER’’ message on themulti-information display when waterstays in the fuel system. Contactyour dealer as soon as possible (seepage ).

The fuel filter should be drained ofwater according to the time anddistance recommendations in themaintenance schedule.

The fuel filter should be replacedaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in the mainte-nance schedule.

It is recommended to replace thefuel filter every 40,000 km (25,000miles), or 2 years (except EU, SouthAfrica and Russia)/every 45,000 km,or 3 years (South Africa and Russia),if the fuel you are using is suspectedto be contaminated. In a high dustenvironment, the filter may becomeclogged sooner.

Have a qualified technician changethe fuel filter. Since the fuel systemis under pressure, fuel can spray outand create a hazard if all fuel lineconnections are not handledcorrectly.

After the vehicle has been stored foran extended period, the engine maynot start. If water has accumulated inthe fuel system, you will see thesymbol on the multi-informationdisplay when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Thismay also be caused by air in the fuelsystem. In this case, follow theprocedure for

(see page ).

111

517

Draining Water(Diesel models only)

Fuel Filter

Priming the FuelSystemOn European models

Fuel Filter

Maintenance476

09/01/28 18:36:18 32SMG631_481

＊

＊

＊＊

Check the operation of your vehicle’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can make thecondition of your vehicle unsafereducing your vehicle’s visibility andthe ability to signal your intentions toother drivers.

1:2: Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.

If equipped

Lights

Maintenance 477

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT

FRONT FOG LIGHT

FRONT TURN SIGNAL

SIDE TURN SIGNAL

POSITION LIGHT LOW BEAMHEADLIGHT

1

2

09/01/28 18:36:22 32SMG631_482

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊＊＊

Check the following:

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

Headlights (low and high beam)Position lights

Brake lightsTurn signals

Back-up lightsHazard light functionLicence plate lightsHigh-mount brake light

Side turn signals

Tail-lights

Front fog lights (for some types)Rear fog light (for some types)

Rear fog light is installed on the driver’s side only.Bulb replacement should be done by your dealer.On vehicles without rear fog light.On vehicles with rear fog light.

592

1:2:3:4:

Lights

Maintenance478


HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

BACK-UP LIGHT

LICENCE PLATE LIGHTS

STOP/TAIL-LIGHT

TURN SIGNAL

TAIL-LIGHT

REAR FOG LIGHT /STOP/TAIL-LIGHT

2

4

1, 4

3

09/01/28 18:36:37 32SMG631_483

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in theluggage area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or another qualifiedtechnician.The vertical angle of the headlightscan be adjusted. For moreinformation, see page .

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or ascratch on the glass can cause thebulb to overheat and shatter.

The low beam headlight bulbs arehigh voltage discharge tube bulbs.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itreplaced.

Your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic headlight adjustingsystem that adjusts the vertical angleof the headlights (low beam)automatically. Refer to page formore information.

150

150

On vehicles with high voltage dischargetype low beam headlights

CONTINUED

Replacing a Headlight BulbHigh Voltage Discharge TubeHeadlights(For some types)

Headlight Aiming

Lights

Maintenance 479

09/01/28 18:36:46 32SMG631_484

Open the bonnet. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way, and remove the bulb.

Remove the cover on the back ofthe headlight assembly by turningit anticlockwise.

To change a bulb on the left side,remove the nut on the battery stay,then push the battery toward thewindscreen to obtain enoughworking space.

3.

4.

2.1.

On 1.8 engine model with automatictransmission

High Beam Headlights(Petrol models)

Lights

Maintenance480

CLIP

CONNECTOR

BULB

09/01/28 18:36:55 32SMG631_485

↑

CONTINUED

Open the bonnet.

To change a bulb on the left side,remove the cable from the clip andundo the two fasteners from thesecondary air intake cover bypulling the centre of each fastener.Remove the cover, then removethe upper part of the secondary airduct.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place, and clip the end intothe slot.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely.

Reinstall the cover over the backof the headlight assembly and turnit clockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

To change a left side bulb, obtainworking space by moving thebattery toward the windscreen(see page ).


1.

2.

5.

6.

7.

8.

480

On 1.8 engine model


Lights

Maintenance

Low Beam Headlights(Petrol models)

481

COVER

Front

SECONDARY AIR DUCT

COVER

09/01/28 18:37:06 32SMG631_486

Open the bonnet.




Reinstall the cover over the backof the headlight assembly and turnit clockwise to lock in place. Makesure it is right side up; it is marked‘‘TOP.’’


Reinstall the secondary air intakeduct securely, then put the coverback in place. Reinstall the twofasteners and secure them bypushing on the heads until theylock, and put the cable back inplace.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.


5.

6.

7.

8.1.

9.

3.

4.

Lights

Maintenance

High Beam Headlights(Diesel models)

482

CLIP

CONNECTOR

BULB

09/01/28 18:37:17 32SMG631_487

CONTINUED



Remove the coolant tubes fromthe two clips and the over flowtube from the expansion tank,then remove the expansion tankfrom its holder by pushing the taband pulling the tank straight up.


To change a bulb on the right side,remove the upper part of thewasher fluid reservoir by pulling itstraight out.

3.

2.

Lights

Maintenance 483

EXPANSIONTANK COVER

COOLANT TUBES

OVER FLOWTUBE

WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR CAP

09/01/28 18:37:25 32SMG631_488


Open the bonnet.

Reinstall the expansion tank on itsholder, then put the coolant tubesback in place. Reinstall the overflow tube to the expansion tanksecurely. Put the upper part of thewasher fluid reservoir back inplace.

Put the battery back to its originalposition, reinstall the nut on thestay and tighten it securely.



Reinstall the cover over the backof the headlight assembly and turnit clockwise to lock it in place.



1.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

4.

On the left side

On the right side

Low Beam Headlights(Diesel models)

Lights

Maintenance484

CLIP

CONNECTOR

BULB

09/01/28 18:37:36 32SMG631_489

↑









5.

4.

3.2.

6.

7.

8.

9. On the left side

Lights

Maintenance 485

COVER

Front CLIP

BULB

CONNECTOR

09/01/28 18:37:46 32SMG631_490

A front position light bulb is locatedunderneath the high beam headlightbulb under the cover.

Open the bonnet.


Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn anticlockwise.



2.

1.

3.

4.

480

482

On Diesel models


Replacing a Front Position LightBulb

Lights

Maintenance486

COVER

BULB

SOCKET

09/01/28 18:37:56 32SMG631_491

To change the left side bulb, startthe engine, turn the steeringwheel all the way to the right, andturn off the engine. To change theright side bulb, turn the steeringwheel to the left.

Insert the new bulb into theheadlight assembly. Make sure itis on all the way.


Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.


Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

1.

2.

3.

5.

6.

7.

8.

CONTINUED

On the left side

Replacing a Front Turn SignalLight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance 487

HOLDING CLIP

09/01/28 18:38:04 32SMG631_492

Remove the bulb from the socketby pushing it in and turning thebulb anticlockwise until it unlocks.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.


Put the inner fender in place.Install the two holding clips. Lockeach clip in place by pushing onthe centre.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn anticlockwise.

Remove the air intakeduct to access the light assembly.

5.

6.

7.

8.

4.Left side only:On some types

Lights

Maintenance488

SOCKET

BULB

09/01/28 18:38:13 32SMG631_493

CONTINUED

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the cover. Remove itby carefully prying on the edgewith a flat-tipped screwdriver.

Use a wrench to remove the twomounting bolts.

Pull the light assembly out of therear pillar.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: stop/tail-light orturn signal light.

1. 2.

3.

4.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Rear Bulbs(In Fenders)

489

COVER BOLTS

SOCKET

BULB

09/01/28 18:38:21 32SMG631_494

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the cover on the backof the tailgate. Remove it bycarefully prying on the edge with aflat-tipped screwdriver.


Remove the socket for that bulbby turning it one-quarter turnanticlockwise.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Reinstall the light assembly intoplace, then tighten the mountingbolts securely.

Align the tabs on the cover withthe holes in the body. Slide thecover on to the rear pillar andreinstall it security.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

1.

10.

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Tailgate)

Lights

Maintenance490

09/01/28 18:38:30 32SMG631_495

Determine which of the four orthree bulbs is burned out: tail-light,back-up light, licence plate light orrear fog light (on the driver’s sideonly).

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn anticlockwise.

Reinstall the cover into tailgate.


Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: stop/tail-light,back-up light or licence plate light.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

On vehicles without rear fog light

Lights

Maintenance 491

SOCKET

COVER

BULB

Vehicle with rear fog light is shown.

09/01/28 18:38:39 32SMG631_496

Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Halogen light bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or ascratch on the glass can cause thebulb to overheat and shatter.

Remove the bolt with a wrench. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turnanticlockwise.

Pull the fog light assembly fromthe bumper carefully, whilepushing the light assemblyoutward.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb(For some types)

Lights

Maintenance492

BOLT

BULB

CONNECTOR

09/01/28 18:38:48 32SMG631_497

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the front fog lights to testthe new bulb.

The ceiling lights and vanity mirrorlights come apart the same way, butthey do not use the same type ofbulbs.

Remove the front housing on thefront ceiling light by carefullyprying on the edge of it with afingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver.

Align the tab on the light assemblyto the bumper, and reinstall thefog light assembly, then tightenthe screw securely.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

CONTINUED

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorLights

Lights

Maintenance 493

FRONT CEILING LIGHT

09/01/28 18:38:56 32SMG631_498

Front ceiling light:Pry on the edge of the front housing.

Rear ceiling light:Pry on the side edge of the lens inthe middle.

Vanity mirror light:Pry on the upper edge of the lens.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its holder.

Push the new bulb into the holder.Snap the lens or the housing backin place.

3.

2.

Lights

Maintenance494

REAR CEILING LIGHT VANITY MIRROR LIGHT

BULB

BULB

BULB

09/01/28 18:39:05 32SMG631_499

Open the tailgate.

Put a cloth on the front edge ofthe light assembly. Remove thelight assembly by using a smallflat-tipped screwdriver to prycarefully on the front edge of theassembly.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the light assembly by pullingit out.

Remove the plastic cover bypivoting it upward.

Pull the bulb straight out of theholder. Push the new bulb straightinto the holder until it bottoms.

1. 2. 3.

4.

CONTINUED

Replacing the Luggage Area LightBulb

Lights

Maintenance 495

CONNECTOR

PLASTIC COVER

BULB

09/01/28 18:39:15 32SMG631_500

Pull the bulb straight out of itsholder. Install the new bulbstraight into the holder until itbottoms.

Turn on the position lights tomake sure the new bulb isworking.

Put the light assembly back inplace, then close the glove box.

Remove the light assembly bypulling it down.

Open the glove box. Place a clothand pry the plastic lens carefullywith a small flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Put the light assembly back intothe hole, rear side first. Push onthe front side until it snaps intoplace.

Put the cover back in place andinstall the electrical connectorsecurely.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

5.

6.

Replacing a Glove Box Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance496

BULB CONNECTOR

09/01/28 18:39:23 32SMG631_501

Your vehicle’s air conditioning is asealed system. Any majormaintenance, such as recharging,should be done by a qualifiedtechnician. You can do a couple ofthings to make sure the airconditioning works efficiently.

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

The condenser and radiator finsbend easily. Only use a low-pressurespray or soft-bristle brush to cleanthem.

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least 10minutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a).

Whenever you have the airconditioning system serviced, makesure the service facility uses arefrigerant recycling system. Thissystem captures the refrigerant forreuse. Releasing refrigerant into theatmosphere can damage theenvironment.

Air Conditioning System (For some types)

Maintenance 497

AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER

09/01/28 18:39:30 32SMG631_502

Remove the under cover from thelower part of the dashboardcarefully.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

This filter should be replaced duringscheduled maintenance. On EU,Australia and South Africa models,refer to the maintenance schedule inthe separate service informationbooklet that came with your vehicle.On other models, see themaintenance schedules in thisowner’s manual.

The dust and pollen filter should bereplaced at short intervals if youdrive primarily in urban areas thathave high concentrations of soot inthe air from industry and diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it moreoften if airflow from the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem becomes less than usual.

The dust and pollen filter is underthe dashboard on the passenger’sside of the front of the centreconsole.To replace it:

To access the filter, open the frontpassenger’s door. Be careful of the front passenger’s

foot light cable.

1.

2.

For some types

Dust and Pollen Filter (For some types)

Maintenance

Replacement

498

CLIPS UNDER COVER

09/01/28 18:39:40 32SMG631_503

Install a new filter in the housing.Make sure the arrows of the ‘‘AirFlow’’ marks on the filter point tothe airflow direction (inside thevehicle).

Place the hinges to the housing(the lower side first), then reinstallthe cover.

If you are not sure how to replacethe dust and pollen filter, have itreplaced by your dealer.

Put your fingers in both side slitson the housing, grasp the filter,then pull it out.

To remove the cover, pull ittoward you with the tab whiletaking it out of its hinges (theupper side first).

Put the under cover back in placeand make sure the four clips arelatched securely.

5.

4.

6.

3.

Dust and Pollen Filter (For some types)

Maintenance 499

DUST AND POLLEN FILTER

COVER

09/01/28 18:39:47 32SMG631_504

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

Remove the cap on the wiperblade assembly by squeezing thelock tabs and sliding it outwardalong the holder.

Do not open the bonnet when thewiper arms are raised, or you willdamage the bonnet and the wiperarms.

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off thewindscreen. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

1.

2.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance500

WIPER ARMS

TAB

09/01/28 18:39:54 32SMG631_505

Remove the blade from the bladeassembly:

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Carefully pull out the bladeassembly to prevent it from hittingthe windscreen.

Pull back the end of the bladeassembly on the ‘‘LOCK’’ side ofthe blade. Then grab the end ofthe blade, and slide it out.

Find the side of the bladelabelled ‘‘LOCK.’’ This is theside you pull out.

Press and hold the lock tab.Slide the blade assembly towardthe lock tab until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

If you cannot remove the cap,release the lock with a small flat-tipped screwdriver. Put a cloth onthe notch, insert a screwdriver andpush it slightly toward the top ofthe wiper blade, then slide the capoutward.

4.3.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 501

WIPER BLADE

BLADE ASSEMBLY

TAB

NOTCH

COVER

09/01/28 18:40:04 32SMG631_506

Do not pull up the end of theholder forcibly and bend theholder excessively while removingthe blade. This could damage theholder.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windscreen, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled and that its edge is notbunched up.

Install the new blade onto theblade assembly:

Pull back either end of the bladeassembly.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Reinstall the cap on the wiper armalong to the slit on the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Place the side of the blade notlabelled ‘‘LOCK’’ on the end ofthe blade assembly, and slidethe blade onto the assemblyuntil it is fully installed.

6.

7.

8.

9.

5.

10.

Maintenance

Wiper Blades

502

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

09/01/28 18:40:13 32SMG631_507

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtyres must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tyres and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tyres properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tyres wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.Overinflated tyres can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The deflation warning system willwarn you when a change in tyrerevolutions occurs due to a decreasein tyre pressure. See page formore information on the deflationwarning system.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with deflation warningsystem, we recommend that youvisually check your tyres every day.If you think a tyre might be low,

check it immediately with a tyregauge. Then initialise the deflationwarning system (see page ).

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tyre at least once amonth. Even tyres that are in goodcondition may lose 10 to 20 kPa (0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm , 1 to 2 psi) per month.Remember to check the spare tyre(if equipped) at the same time.

Check the air pressure when thetyres are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1.6km (1 mile). Add or release air, ifneeded, to match the recommendedcold tyre pressures on the label onthe driver’s doorjamb.

425

427

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Tyres

Inflation Guidelines

503

Using tyres that areexcessively worn orimproperly inflated can causea crash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingtyre inflation andmaintenance.

09/01/28 18:40:22 32SMG631_508

While tubeless tyres have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tyre starts losingpressure.

You should get your own tyrepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tyre pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tyreproblem and not due to a variationbetween gauges.

If you check air pressures when thetyres are hot [driven for severalkilometers (miles)], you will seereadings 30 to 40 kPa (0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm , 4 to 6 psi) higher than thecold reading. This is normal. Do notlet air out to match therecommended cold air pressure. Thetyre will be underinflated.

For convenience, the recommendedcold air pressures and tyre sizes areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tyres fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tyre. Replace the tyre ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tyre. Replace the tyre if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Tyres

Maintenance

Tyre Inspection

504

09/01/28 18:40:30 32SMG631_509

CONTINUED

To help increase tyre life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tyres every 10,000 km (6,250miles). Move the tyres to thepositions shown in the chart eachtime they are rotated. The aboveillustration shows how the tyresshould be rotated.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tyre wear. If you find a tyreis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tyres ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tyre should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tyresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tyre life. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminium wheels.Use only genuine Honda wheelweights for balancing.

Your tyres have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 12.7 mm (1/2 inch) wide acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread lefton the tyre.

A tyre this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tyre if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

For vehicles equipped with aluminiumwheels:

Tyres

Maintenance

Tyre RotationTyre Maintenance

505

Front

(For directionaltyres and wheels)

(For non-directionaltyres and wheels)

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

09/01/28 18:40:40 32SMG631_510

Replace your tyres with radial tyresof the same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tyrepressure rating (as shown on thetyre’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tyres onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tyres of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

If you purchase directional tyres,rotate only front-to-back.When the tyres are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

The ABS, VSA and deflation warningsystem work by comparing the speedof the wheels. When replacing tyres,use the same size originally suppliedwith the vehicle. Tyre size andconstruction can affect wheel speedand may cause the system to workinconsistently.

After replacing tyres, initialise thedeflation warning system to use itproperly (see page ).

It is best to replace all four tyres atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttyres or two rear tyres as a pair.Replacing just one tyre can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.Consult your dealer before replacingtyres.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

If the tyres that came on yourvehicle are directional tyres, theyshould be rotated only front-to-back.

After rotating tyres, initialise thedeflation warning system to use itproperly (see page ).427

427

On vehicles with directional tyres

Tyres

Maintenance

Replacing Tyres and Wheels

506

09/01/28 18:40:49 32SMG631_511

＊＊

＊

Wheels:Tyres:

Only for Sport and Executivemodels

:

CONTINUED

1.4 engine model

1.8 engine model and diesel enginemodel

1.4 engine model

1.8 engine model and diesel enginemodel

Tyres

Maintenance

Wheels and Tyres

507

Installing improper tyres onyour vehicle can affecthandling and stability. Thiscan cause a crash in whichyou can be seriously hurt orkilled.

Always use the size and typeof tyres recommended in thetyre information label onyour vehicle.

16 x 6 1/2J

16 x 6 1/2J17 x 7J

205/55R16 91V

225/45R17 91Y205/55R16 91V

205/55R16 91H

09/01/28 18:40:57 32SMG631_512

＋＋

Because of the limited winterqualification of summer tyres forwinter use we recommend the use ofwinter tyres (M S tyres) on snowyand icy roads. If M S tyres areinstalled, all four wheels should beequipped to insure safe driving. Useonly tyres of the same brand withthe same profile. Pay attention to thetyre size, load capacity and speedclass when buying.

The sizes of wheels and tyresinstalled on your vehicle varydepending on models.

See the tyre information label on thedriver’s doorjamb or ask your dealerfor information on the proper size ofthe tyres on your vehicle.

Install the winter tyres according tothe remarks in the registration paper.According to the EEC Directive fortyres, when winter tyres are used, itis necessary to affix a sticker withthe allowable max. speed of thewinter tyres clearly in the field ofview of the driver, if the designedmax. speed of vehicle is higher thanthe allowed max. speed of wintertyre. A sticker is obtainable fromyour tyre dealer. If any questionsarise, please discuss these with oneof our dealers.

On European models

Tyres

Maintenance

Winter Tyres

508

09/01/28 18:41:03 32SMG631_513

Use snow chains only in anemergency or when they are legallyrequired for driving through acertain area. Install the snow chainson the front wheels. Use greatercaution when driving with snowchains on snow or ice. They mayhave less-predictable handling thangood winter tyres without chains.Some snow chains may damage thevehicle’s tyres, wheels, suspension,brake lines and body. Choose onlyfine limbed chains which guaranteeenough free space between the tyreand the other vehicle parts in thewheelhouse. Pay attention to thesectional assembly view and otherdirections from the chainmanufacturer. Consult your dealerbefore purchasing any type of chainsfor your vehicle.

When you have installed tyre chains,drive at less than 30 km/h (19 mph)on roads covered with snow or ice.To minimize tyre and chain wear,avoid driving on cleared roads withchains installed.

You cannot install any type of tyrechains on your vehicle. Replace theoriginal tyres with optional 205/55R16 tyres if you need to install tyrechains.

On vehicles equipped with 225/45R17size tyres

Tyre Chains

Tyres

Maintenance 509

09/01/28 18:41:08 32SMG631_514

＊

＊

＊

＊

Original tyre is mentioned on the tyre information label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Use only the specified chains or their equivalents for your tyres as listed.

On 225/45R17 tyres, you cannot install any type of tyre chains. If youhave to use tyre chains, replace the original tyres with the optional205/55R16 tyre.

Chain TypeOriginal Tyre Size

1:

2:

1

For EU models

Tyres

Maintenance510

RUD-matic classic 48482 or equivalents

Not Available

205/55R16

225/45R17 2

09/01/28 18:41:15 32SMG631_515

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolours.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

The location of the test indicatorwindow varies betweenmanufacturers.

CONTINUED

Checking the Battery

Maintenance 511

1.4 engine model

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOWTEST INDICATOR WINDOW

1.8 engine model with automatictransmission

1.8 engine model with manualtransmission

09/01/28 18:41:22 32SMG631_516

－

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.


Maintenance512

The battery contains sulfuricacid (electrolyte) which ishighly corrosive andpoisonous.

Getting electrolyte in youreyes or on your skin cancause serious burns. Wearprotective clothing and eyeprotection when working onor near the battery.

Swallowing electrolyte cancause fatal poisoning ifimmediate action is nottaken.

KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OFCHILDREN

The battery gives offexplosive hydrogen gasduring normal operation. Aspark or open flame cancause the battery to explodewith enough force to kill orseriously hurt you.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

Wear protective clothing anda face shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

2.2 engine model (diesel)

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

09/01/28 18:41:28 32SMG631_517

－

－

－

On vehicles with i-SHIFTOn the right-hand drive typesIf your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you mustmove the shift lever to neutral andpress on the brake pedal to reset theneutral position after reconnectingthe battery. You press on the brakepedal for about 3 seconds until thegear position indicator shows N thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Flush with water from a cupor other container for at least 15minutes. (Water under pressure candamage the eye.) Call a physicianimmediately.

Remove contaminatedclothing. Flush the skin with largequantities of water. Call a physicianimmediately.

Drink water or milk.Call a physician immediately.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, thespeedometer’s is reading is reset tothe mph display (see page ).88

Maintenance


Emergency Procedures

Eyes

Skin

Swallowing

513

09/01/28 18:41:35 32SMG631_518

－

－

Loosen the bolt on the negativebattery cable, then disconnect thecable from the negative ( )terminal.

Always disconnect the negative( ) cable first, and reconnect itlast.

When you remove and replace thebattery, always follow themaintenance instructions inMaintenance Safety on page andthe warnings in this section toprevent potential hazards.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) position.

Open the bonnet.

1.

2.

3.

442

(For EU countries)

Replacing the Battery

Maintenance514

BATTERYBRACKET

BATTERYSTAY

NEGATIVETERMINAL

NUT

BATTERYBRACKET

BATTERYSTAY

POSITIVE TERMINAL COVER

NEGATIVETERMINAL

NUT

A/T model only

POSITIVE TERMINALPOSITIVE TERMINAL COVER

09/01/28 18:41:45 32SMG631_519

＋

To install a new battery, reverse thisprocedure.

This symbol on the batterymeans that this product mustnot be treated as householdwaste.

An improperly disposed of batterycan be harmful to the environmentand human health.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.

Open the positive battery terminalcover. Loosen the bolt on thepositive battery cable, thendisconnect the cable from thepositive ( ) terminal.

Loosen the nut on each side of thebattery bracket with a wrench.

Pull the bottom end of eachbattery stay out of the hole on thebattery base, and remove thecombination of the battery bracketand the stays.

Remove the battery cover.

Take out the battery carefully.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Maintenance

Replacing the Battery

515

A/T model only

POSITIVE TERMINAL

09/01/28 18:41:54 32SMG631_520

When parking the vehicle for anextended period, wateraccumulates in the fuel systemand the engine will not start. Inthis case, water may need to bedrained off with the fuel filter (see

on page ).

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual, i-SHIFT) or Park(automatic).

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetyres are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windscreen.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

476

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance

On Diesel models only

Draining Water

516

09/01/28 18:42:04 32SMG631_521

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Loosen the two holding screws,then remove the cover.

Squeeze the fuel hand primer untilyou feel a strong resistance.

If your vehicle runs out of fuel, themalfunction indicator lamp will comeon, or the symbol ‘‘ ’’ willappear on the multi-informationdisplay, and the engine will notrestart after refueling the fuel tankwith the appropriate fuel (see pages

and ).

In this case, air may have enteredthe fuel system. The system requirespriming to start the engine. Primethe fuel system as follows:

Refuel the fuel tank (minimum 5litres).

Open the bonnet.

If you store your vehicle for 1 year orlonger, have your dealer perform themaintenance inspections called for inthe 2 years/40,000 km (25,000 miles)maintenance schedule as soon asyou take it out of storage (see page

). The replacements called for inthe maintenance schedule are notneeded unless the vehicle hasactually reached that time ordistance.

For EU countries, Australia, andSouth Africa, see the separateservice information booklet.

1.

2.

3.

4.

:

443

567 568

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance

Priming the Fuel System(Diesel models only)

517

FUEL HAND PRIMER

HOLDING SCREW

09/01/28 18:42:14 32SMG631_522

The engine runs normally, but themalfunction indicator lamp or thePGM-FI warning remains on.

To turn off the indicator, restartand turn off the engine at leastthree times at intervals ofapproximately 30 seconds.

If this procedure is performedduring normal driving, themalfunction indicator lamp will beturned off, and the PGM-FI warningon the multi-information display willalso go out.If you are not sure how to bleed theair, contact your dealer.

If the engine fails to restart afterpriming the fuel system, there is aproblem in the fuel system. Youshould have the vehicle inspected byyour dealer.

Start the engine (see page ). Ifthe engine does not start rightaway, do not hold the ENGINESTART button for more than 10seconds at a time. This willdamage the fuel pump and theengine starter.

If the engine fails to start, returnto step 4.

After the engine restarts, pressthe accelerator pedal slightly andhold it at approximately 1,500 rpmfor about 30 seconds. This willcomplete the air bleeding in thefuel system.

Reinstall the cover in front of thefuel hand primer, then tighten theholding screws securely.


5.

6.

7.

8.

9.393

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance518

09/01/28 18:42:23 32SMG631_523

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour vehicle helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives youinformation on how to clean yourvehicle and preserve its appearance:the paint, brightwork, wheels andinterior. Also included are severalthings you can do to help preventcorrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 520.....................................Washing . 520

.......................................Waxing . 521...................Aluminium Wheels . 521

..........................Paint Touch-up . 522..................................Interior Care . 523...................................Carpeting . 523.................................Floor Mats . 523

.........................................Fabric . 524...........................................Vinyl . 524

.......................................Leather . 524....................................Windows . 524...................................Seat Belts . 525

..........................Air Fresheners . 525....................Corrosion Protection . 526

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 519

09/01/28 18:42:26 32SMG631_524

Frequent washing helps preserveyour vehicle’s beauty. Dirt and gritcan scratch the paint, while tree sapand bird droppings can permanentlyruin the finish.

Wash your vehicle in a shady area,not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle isparked in the sun, move it into theshade and let the exterior cool downbefore you start.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this owner’smanual.

Chemical solvents and strongcleaners can damage the paint, metal,and plastic on your vehicle.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly withcool water to remove loose dirt.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a product made especially forcar washing.

Wash the vehicle using water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe vehicle does not need waxing.

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

As you dry the vehicle, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).522

Exterior Care

Washing

Appearance Care520

09/01/28 18:42:34 32SMG631_525

－

－Always wash and dry the wholevehicle before waxing it. You shouldwax your vehicle, including the metaltrim, whenever water sits on thesurface in large patches. It shouldform into beads or droplets afterwaxing.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your vehiclewhen it is new.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. Youshould use a polish on your vehicle ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the vehicle doesnot need waxing.

Clean your vehicle’s aluminium alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protectiveclearcoat that keeps the aluminiumfrom corroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners or stiffbrushes, can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing Aluminium Wheels(For some types)

521

09/01/28 18:42:43 32SMG631_526

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle’s colour. Thecolour code is printed on a plate onthe front doorjamb on the left side.Take this code to your dealer so youare sure to get the correct colour.

Inspect your vehicle frequently forchips or scratches in the paint.Repair them right away to preventcorrosion of the metal underneath.Use the touch-up paint only on smallchips and scratches. More extensivepaint damage should be repaired bya professional.

Exterior Care

Paint Touch-up

Appearance Care522

09/01/28 18:42:47 32SMG631_527

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchors. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

If you use non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of an anchored mat.

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Carpeting Floor Mats(Optional)

523

09/01/28 18:42:53 32SMG631_528

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

If you use a leather cleaner, wipe itoff quickly with a soft and dry cloth.Never leave a cloth soaked withleather cleaner on any part of theinterior. If left for a long time, someleather cleaners may causediscolouration or cracking of interiortrim or fabric.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

The rear window demister andantenna wires are bonded to theinside of the glass. Wiping vigorouslyup-and-down can dislodge and breakthese wires. When cleaning the rearwindow, use gentle pressure andwipe side-to-side.

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Vinyl

Leather(For some types)

WindowsFabric

524

09/01/28 18:43:01 32SMG631_529

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Dirt build-up around the openings ofthe seat belt anchors can cause thebelts to retract slowly. Wipe theopenings with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of yourvehicle, it is best to use a solid type.Some liquid air fresheners containchemicals that may cause parts ofthe interior trim and fabric to crackor discolour.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Seat Belts Air Fresheners

Interior Care

Appearance Care 525

OPENING

09/01/28 18:43:08 32SMG631_530

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your vehicle:

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the vehicle.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your vehicle. You canhelp keep your vehicle fromcorroding by performing somesimple periodic maintenance:

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your vehicle. Thisis especially important in areasthat use road salt in winter. It isalso a good idea in humid climatesand areas subject to salty air. Becareful of the ABS wheel sensorsand wiring at each wheel.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourvehicle inspected and repairedperiodically.

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thevehicle stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

1.

2.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care526

09/01/28 18:43:15 32SMG631_531

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

.....................Compact Spare Tyre . 528...................Changing a Flat Tyre . 530

...................................Honda TRK . 537.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 552

................................Jump Starting . 554If the Engine Overheats

.........................(Petrol models) . 557If the Engine Overheats

.........................(Diesel models) . 561.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 563

........................Oil Level Indicator . 564..........Charging System Indicator . 565

Malfunction Indicator Lamp.........................(Petrol models) . 566

Malfunction Indicator Lamp.........................(Diesel models) . 567..........................PGM-FI Warning . 568

...............Brake System Indicator . 569..............................................Fuses . 570

Fuses Locations.........................(Petrol models) . 574

Fuses Locations.........................(Diesel models) . 576

......................Emergency Towing . 578

Taking Care of the Unexpected


527

09/01/28 18:43:18 32SMG631_532

Use the compact spare tyre as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tyre repaired orreplaced, and put it back on yourvehicle as soon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tyre every time youcheck the other tyres. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).

This tyre gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tyre.

Do not use your compact sparetyre on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not use more than onecompact spare tyre at the sametime.

Replace the tyre when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tyre, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tyre is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tyre.

The compact spare tyre is smallerthan the regular tyre. Yourvehicle’s ground clearancereduces when the compact sparetyre is installed. Driving over roaddebris or bumps could possiblydamage the underside of yourvehicle.

Do not use the compact spare tyreif you are towing a trailer.

Do not initialise the deflationwarning system, because thecompact spare tyre is smaller thanthe regular tyre.


Compact Spare Tyre (For some types)

528

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm , 60 psi)

09/01/28 18:43:29 32SMG631_533

(For Australian model) Where:‘‘A’’ kg is the maximum Load Rating‘‘B’’ is the equivalent Load Index‘‘C’’ is the Speed Category Symbol‘‘D’’ is the equivalent speed in km/h

Temporary spare tyre fitted to thisvehicle must have a maximum loadrating of not less than ‘‘A’’ kg, or aload index of ‘‘B’’ and a speedcategory symbol of not less than ‘‘C’’(‘‘D’’ km/h).Drive with caution when thetemporary spare tyre is fitted. Do notexceed 80 km/h. Re-install normalwheel as soon as possible.

D

km/h(Speed)

C

Speed CategorySymbol

A

MaximumLoad Rating

B

LoadIndex

Compact Spare Tyre

Normal Tyre

Compact Spare Tyre Wheel


Compact Spare Tyre (For some types)

529

130 km/hM800 kg 100

T135/90D15 100M

225/45R17 91Y

15 x 4T

09/01/28 18:43:38 32SMG631_534

If you have a flat tyre while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

Use the jack that came with yourvehicle. If you try to raise anothervehicle with this jack or use anotherjack to raise your vehicle, the vehicleor jack can be damaged.

Your vehicle is equipped with thetyre sealant kit instead of the sparetyre. This kit is available for easyrepair of a flat tyre (see page ).

See Owner’s Manual.

See page for your jack type.

Place jack underneath reinforcedarea.

Never get under vehicle whensupported by jack.

Jack Label for EU models

1.

2.

3.

2.1. 3.537

592

On vehicles with spare tyre

On vehicles with Honda TRK

Changing a Flat Tyre

Taking Care of the Unexpected530

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tyre exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only bythe jack.

09/01/28 18:43:48 32SMG631_535

Open the tailgate. Raise theluggage area floor by lifting up onthe strap.

Hook the strap on the back of theluggage area cover (if equipped)to keep the floor lid open.

The tools are in the rear left sidecompartment in the luggage area.

Park the vehicle on firm, level andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual/i-SHIFT).Apply the parking brake.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tyre.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

CONTINUED


Taking Care of the Unexpected 531

SPARE TYRE

TOOL KIT

JACK

09/01/29 17:56:59 32SMG631_536

Remove the under-floor box andtake out the vinyl bag and the tyrenet.

Put the under-floor box back inplace, then lower the floor lid.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tyre out of its well.

Place blocks in front and back ofthe wheel diagonally opposite thetyre you are changing.

Turn the jack’s end bracketanticlockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Take the tool bag out of the rearside compartment.

Remove the cover by turning thehandle anticlockwise, then pullingout the cover. Unlatch thefastening strap by squeezing thetabs.

9.

7. 8.6.

10.

11.



532

UNDER-FLOOR BOX

VINYL BAG, TYRE NET

09/01/28 18:44:06 32SMG631_537

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tyre is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tyre. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flattyre on the ground with theoutside surface facing up.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tyre you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

12. 13. 14.

15.

CONTINUED



JACKING POINT WHEEL NUT WRENCH

EXTENSION

WHEEL NUTS

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

09/01/28 18:44:14 32SMG631_538

Before mounting the spare tyre,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tyre. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

16. 17.

18.

On some models



BRAKE HUB

WHEEL NUT

WHEEL COVER

09/01/28 18:44:22 32SMG631_539

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.

Tighten the wheel nuts to:

On some types, remove the centrecap before storing the flat tyre inthe luggage area.

Store the wheel cover or centrecap in the luggage area. Makesure it does not get scratched ordamaged.

Put the flat tyre in the suppliedvinyl bag.

Place the flat tyre on the luggagearea floor.

Make sure to place the under-floorstorage area lid (if equipped) onthe upper position and put the flattyre on the lid.

19. 20. 21.

22.

CONTINUED



CENTRE CAP

108 N·m (11 kgf·m , 80 lbf·ft)

09/01/28 18:44:31 32SMG631_540

Close the tailgate.

Wrap the flat tyre with the net,then attach the other two hooks tothe same luggage hooks as shown.

Store the jack in the rear left sidecompartment. Turn the jack’s endbracket to lock it in place.

Store the tool kit in the rear leftside compartment.

Place the supplied tyre net on theluggage area, then attach the twohooks to the luggage hooks on thetailgate opening.

23. 24.

25.

26.

27.



Loose items can fly aroundthe interior in a crash andcould seriously injure theoccupants.

Store the wheel, jack, andtools securely before driving.

09/01/28 18:44:39 32SMG631_541

＊

＊

Your vehicle is not equipped with aspare tyre. Instead, your vehicle hasthe tyre sealant kit (Honda TRK:temporary repair kit of TERRA-S ).This kit is available only for easyrepair of a flat tyre.

You should check the usable periodof the tyre sealant according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule .

When using the tyre sealant kit,always follow the instructions andthe procedure in this owner’s manual.

To remind you of the instructions forusing the tyre sealant kit, thehandling manual is included in thekit. Symbols on thehandling manual are to remind youto read this owner’s manual for usingthe tyre sealant kit.

Read the handling manual well anduse it correctly.

Small punctures in the tyre tread,caused by a nail or a screw, can besealed with the temporary repair kit.

The tyre sealant kit cannot be usedin the following cases.Inform your dealer or a RoadsideAssistance Service.

Expired best before date of thetyre sealant.

Cuts or piercing in the tyre treadlarger than approximately 4 mm.

Cuts in the tyre side wall.

Tyre damage caused by drivingwith considerably reduced tyrepressure or even with deflatedtyres.

A tyre bead completely unseatedoutside or inside of rim.

A rim damaged.

2 or more tyres punctured.On EU models, refer to theService Book that came withyour vehicle.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.:

CONTINUED

On vehicles with Honda TRK

Honda TRK (For some types)


09/01/28 18:44:51 32SMG631_542

Open the tailgate. Remove the sidecover by turning the handleanticlockwise. Take the Honda TRKout of the rear right sidecompartment.

Pull out a nail or a screw in thetyre tread with the pliers suppliedin the tool kit. When you can’t pullit out or you can’t find it, werecommend you to inform yourdealer or Roadside AssistanceService. The kit can also be usedto repair the tyre withoutremoving the nail or screw butonly in unavoidable cases.

1.

Instructions for Use



If you drive a vehicle afterrepair without extracting anail or a screw, it may causeair leakage again or damagethe inside and burst a tyre. Ifyou have to drive, drivecarefully, especially aroundcorners.

NAIL/SCREW

HONDA TRK

TOOL KIT

PLIER

09/01/28 18:44:58 32SMG631_543

Take out the temporary repair kitand shake the bottle (A). Screwthe filler hose (B) onto the bottle(A), thereby piercing the seal ofaluminium.

2.

CONTINUED



Harmful if swallowed.Swallow plenty of waterand seek medical adviceimmediately.

Irritating to eyes. Rinseimmediately with plenty ofwater and seek medicaladvice.

Keep locked up and out ofthe reach of children.

If you shake the bottle afterconnecting the hose withthe bottle, it may spillsealant. Shake bottle wellbefore connecting hose.

Contains ethylene glycol.CAP

(A)

(B)

(A)

AluminiumSealed

09/01/28 18:45:04 32SMG631_544

To remind you of the information forrepairing a flat tyre with this sealantkit, the labels are attached on thesealant bottle. Read the instructionscarefully. Symbols on thelabel are to remind you to read theHonda TRK section for using thetyre sealant kit.

Unscrew the valve cap (D) fromthe tyre valve (C). Deflate the tyrecompletely pushing the valveinsert using the back of the valveremover (E).

If sealant adheres to clothes, it maynot be possible to remove. Be carefulnot to spill any.

If you have any questions about thetyre sealant kit, please contact yourdealer.

3.

Safety Label on the Sealant Bottle



(D)

(C)

(E)

09/01/28 18:45:11 32SMG631_545

Pull the plug from the filler hoseand slide the filler hose onto thetyre valve (C).

Unscrew the valve insert (F) usingthe valve remover (E). Do not placethe valve insert (F) in sand or dirt.

4.

CONTINUED



A valve insert can jump out, ifair remains in tyre. Be carefulin removing valve insert.

(C)

(E)

(F)

PLUG

FILLER HOSE

(C)

09/01/28 18:45:18 32SMG631_546

Pull off the filler hose and firmlyscrew the valve insert (F) into thetyre valve (C) using the valveremover (E).

Affix the ‘‘Tyre Sealant in the tyre’’sticker (G) on the wheel.

Hold the filling bottle with the fillerhose downwards and compress.Squeeze the complete contents intothe tyre.

5.



(F)

(C)

(E)

(G)

(C)

09/01/28 18:45:25 32SMG631_547

Affix a sticker of ‘‘Maximum Speed’’(H) within the driver’s range ofvision on the upper display.

Screw the inflation hose (J) to thetyre valve (C). Fit the plug tosocket (K) of the cigarette lighter.

6.

CONTINUED



Do not affix a sticker on thesteering wheel. The SRS airbag may not function.

Do not affix it in the positionwhere it prevents the driverfrom seeing the warningindicators or speedometer.

(H)POWER PLUG

(K)

09/01/28 18:45:31 32SMG631_548

Turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position. Turn onthe air compressor (L).Inflate the tyre to the required airpressure (M). Do not inflate the tyrefor more than 10 minutes.If overinflated, deflate air byloosening the screw of the hose.

Operate the electric inflation pumpfor not longer than 15 minutes. It cancause overheating.



If the required air pressure isnot reached within 10minutes, the tyre may beseverely damaged.

The Tyre Sealant Kit cannotprovide the necessary seal.Inform a Honda Dealer orRoadside Assistant Service.

POWERPLUG

(M)

(K)(J)

(L) (C)AIR COMPRESSOR SWITCH

ON

OFF

AIR PRESSURE GAUGE

09/01/28 18:45:37 32SMG631_549

Continue the journey immediately.Drive carefully within the speed of80 km/h (50 mph). If you drive at a speed of more than

80 km/h (50 mph), your vehicle mayvibrate and will not drive safely.

After 10 minutes or 5 km (3 miles)running, check the tyre pressurewith the air compressor pressuregauge. Note that the air pressuremust be checked with the aircompressor turned off. If the tyrepressure is kept, the tyre punctureis sealed. Then initialise thedeflation warning system (seepage ). Continue to drivecarefully to the nearest Hondadealer or a Roadside AssistanceService.

If the required air pressuredropped, inflate the tyre to therequired air pressure and repeatfrom step 6.

7.

8.

9.

427

CONTINUED



09/01/28 18:45:43 32SMG631_550

If the puncture hole cannot bedetected, the tyre repair shop cannotrepair the sealed tyre. When youcontinue running, check tyrepressure often and if tyre pressuredecreases, have the sealed tyrerepaired at a Honda dealer.

A wheel can be reused afterwiping sealant with cloth, but thevalve must be replaced.

Dispose of the used bottle at aHonda dealer.

Have the tyre replaced at thenearest Honda dealer. To repairthe sealed tyre, consult yourdealer.



In the following cases, do notdrive on.Inform a Honda dealer or aRoadside Assistance Service.

The tyre pressure hasdropped below 130 kPa (1.3bar, 19 psi).

The tyre pressure has stilldropped after steps 6 and 7.

09/01/28 18:45:49 32SMG631_551

To remind you of the information forrepairing a flat tyre with this sealantkit, the labels are attached on the aircompressor. The following showsyou the instructions for these labels.

Symbols on the label areto remind you to read the HondaTRK section for using the tyresealant kit.

CONTINUED



Instructions for Labels on the AirCompressor

547

Do not run the engine inenclosed areas, or when thevehicle is supported by thejack.

Do not touch the aircompressor with handswithout protective clothing.Because it may be extremelyhot while operating.

Never use the air compressorfor 15 minutes or longer.When reusing, make sure thecompressor is cool to thetouch.

Do not use the aircompressor for any otherpurpose than inflating yourtyres.

09/01/28 18:45:57 32SMG631_552

The power supply of the aircompressor is limited to yourvehicle’s 12 volt DC accessory socket.

Before using the air compressor,drive your vehicle to the roadshoulder and stop in a safe place thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Remove the valve cap from a flattyre and securely connect the aircompressor hose to the valve.

Connect the power plug of the aircompressor to the socket of thecigarette lighter.

Turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position. Turn onthe air compressor switch andinflate the tyre to the specified airpressure. Check the tyre pressureby using the air pressure gauge onthe compressor.

Turn off the switch on the aircompressor before checking the airpressure.

When the tyre is inflated tospecified air pressure, disconnectthe power plug from the cigarettelighter socket. Make sure not toallow air to leak from the tyre.Then install and tighten the valvecap securely.

Step 1.

Step 2.

Step 3.

Step 4.



Directions

548

NOTE:

09/01/28 18:46:05 32SMG631_553

Be careful not to spill sealant from atyre.

Remove the tyre and wheel fromthe vehicle.Deflate tyre pressure.

Cut the valve off with a knife.

Be careful not to damage the tyre orthe wheel.

1.

2.

CONTINUED



Sealant Extraction(For a Honda dealer)

549

Be careful not to cut a handor a finger.

09/01/28 18:46:12 32SMG631_554

Insert the hose through the valvehole into the tyre.The hose should enter the sealantas deeply as possible.

Squeeze the bottle and draw outthe sealant.(It is better to stand a tyre on atable.)

Repeat step 4 until the sealantcannot be drawn out.

Bend the hose and tie it with thestrap or tape so that sealant doesnot leak. Dispose of the bottle atyour dealer when you replace itwith a new bottle.

Recycling sealant is important forprotecting environmental resources.Please cooperate in collecting usedsealant.

3.

4.

5.

6.



09/01/28 18:46:19 32SMG631_555

To remind you of the information forextracting the used sealant, this sealis attached on the wheel. It alsoshows you the tyre has beenrepaired by the tyre sealant kit. Thefollowing shows you the instructionson this seal.

Symbols on the seal areto remind you to read this owner’smanual for extracting the usedsealant.



Sealant Label

551

The sealant containsethylene glycol.

Swallowing the sealant cancause fatal poisoning. Drinkwith large quantities of water.Call a physician immediately.

Getting the sealant in youreyes or on your skin cancause serious injury. Flushwith large quantities of waterthoroughly. Call a physicianimmediately.

Keep out of the reach ofchildren.

Make sure to keep thesealant enclosed in the bottle.

SEAL

09/01/28 18:46:26 32SMG631_556

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you pressthe ENGINE START button:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

When you press the ENGINESTART button, you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Do not hold the ENGINE STARTbutton for more than 15 seconds.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Press on the brakepedal and move the shift lever toneutral. Check the gear positionindicator on the upper display. If itdoes not show N, the battery isdischarged. Seeon page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

Check the transmission interlock.With an automatic transmission, itmust be in Park or neutral, or thestarter will not operate.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Press the ENGINE START button,then release it. If the headlights donot dim, check the condition of thefuses. If the fuses are OK, there isprobably something wrong with

the electrical circuit for theignition switch or starter motor.You will need a qualifiedtechnician to determine theproblem (seeon page ).

554

578

511

554

554


If the Engine Won’t Start


Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

552

09/01/28 18:46:36 32SMG631_557

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

After you have parked the vehiclefor an extended period or whenthe outside temperature becomesvery high, water accumulates inthe fuel system and the engine willnot start. In this case, you shoulddrain the water from the fuel filter(see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If equipped, the fuel cutoff switchmay be activated. If the switch isactivated, it must be reset beforestarting the engine (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you press theENGINE START button, but theengine does not run.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

If the indicator is blinking, movethe shift lever out from neutral,then return it again while pressingon the brake pedal.

If your vehicle runs out of fuel,priming the fuel system isrequired to restart the engine (seepage ).

After you have stored your vehiclefor an extended period, air mayhave entered the fuel system (see

onpage ).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page on petrolmodels with manual transmissionand automatic transmission, page

on petrol models with i-SHIFT,and page on diesel models.

153

570

578378

517

517

390

392393

476

On all models

On diesel models only

EmergencyTowing

The Starter Operates Normally

Priming the Fuel System

Starting theEngine

If the Engine Won’t Start


09/01/28 18:46:46 32SMG631_558

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

Open the bonnet, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

To jump start your vehicle:

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.Turn off all the electrical

accessories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, audio system, lights, etc.Put the transmission in neutral(M/T, i-SHIFT) or Park (A/T),and set the parking brake.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can freeze.Attempting to jump start with afrozen battery can cause it to rupture.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

1.

2.

Jump Starting


A battery can explode if youdo not follow the correctprocedure, seriously injuringanyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

1.4 engine model

BOOSTER BATTERY

09/01/28 18:46:55 32SMG631_559

－

＋

＋

CONTINUED

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

3.

4.

Jump Starting


2.2 engine model (Diesel)


BOOSTER BATTERY

BOOSTER BATTERY1.8 engine model with automatictransmission is shown.

1.8 engine model with manualtransmission is shown.

09/01/28 18:47:03 32SMG631_560

－

On diesel models


Connect the second jumper cable tothe negative ( ) terminal on thebooster battery. Connect the otherend to the stud bolt on the engineside as shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part of theengine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,and then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle untileverything is disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

After jump starting, you must movethe shift lever to neutral and presson the brake pedal for about 3seconds until the gear positionindicator shows N the next time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

5.

6.

7.

Jump Starting


1.8 engine model


09/01/28 18:47:12 32SMG631_561

CONTINUED

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the bonnet,turn off the engine. Wait until yousee no more signs of steam orspray, then open the bonnet.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral,and set the parking brake. Turnoff the all accessories, and turn onthe hazard warning lights.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the bonnet.

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

578

On vehicles with manual transmissionand i-SHIFT (automated manualtransmission)

EmergencyTowing


If the Engine Overheats (Petrol models)

557

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the bonnet ifsteam is coming out.

09/01/28 18:47:22 32SMG631_562

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge, or lower,before checking the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capanticlockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

).

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat (climate control toAUTO at ‘‘ ’’). Add coolantto the radiator up to the base ofthe filler neck. If you do not havethe proper coolant mixtureavailable, you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

6.

7.

8.

9.

376

578

10.

11.



EmergencyTowing

558



09/01/28 18:47:30 32SMG631_563

CONTINUED

If the high temperature indicatorstays on, turn off the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andcheck the high temperatureindicator. If the high heat is due tooverloading, the engine shouldstart to cool down almostimmediately. If it does, wait untilthe high temperature indicatorgoes off, then continue driving.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the bonnet,turn off the engine. Wait until yousee no more signs of steam orspray, then open the bonnet.

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the hightemperature indicator blinking orremaining on. Or you may see steamor spray coming from under thebonnet.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with an ‘‘ENGINETEMP. HIGH’’ message on themulti-information display.

Driving with the high temperatureindicator on can cause seriousdamage to your engine.

The high temperature indicatorshould be off under most conditions.If the engine coolant temperaturegets higher than normal, theindicator will blink. If it stays on, youshould determine the reason (hotday, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning indicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

On vehicles with automatic transmissiononly



559



09/01/28 18:47:39 32SMG631_564


on page ).

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capanticlockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the hightemperature indicator goes offbefore checking the radiator.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

).

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat (climate control toAUTO at ‘‘ ’’). Add coolantto the radiator up to the base ofthe filler neck. If you do not have

the proper coolant mixtureavailable, you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe high temperature indicator. Ifit begins to blink or comes onagain, the engine needs repair(see on page

).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

6.

7.8.

9.

5.

578

463

578

10.

11.

EmergencyTowing

Emergency Towing



560



09/01/28 18:47:47 32SMG631_565

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.It may go higher if you are driving upa long steep hill on a very hot day. Ifit climbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

Your vehicle can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the bonnet.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutraland set the parking brake. Turnoff the climate control system andall other accessories. Turn on thehazard warning indicators.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the bonnet,turn off the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point, then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thebonnet.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

If the Engine Overheats (Diesel models)




09/01/28 18:47:56 32SMG631_566


on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theexpansion tank (see page ).

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat (climate control toAUTO at ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant upto the MAX line on the expansiontank. If you do not have the propercoolant mixture available, you canadd plain water. Remember tohave the cooling system drainedand refilled with the propermixture as soon as you can.

If the expansion tank needscoolant, you will have to removethe cap. Before doing that, turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and check thetemperature gauge. Remove theexpansion tank cap only if thetemperature gauge pointer hascome down to normal or below thered mark and you do not hear anybubbling or gurgling noisescoming from the cooling system.

Use a cloth or glove to protectyour hand while removing theexpansion tank cap. Loosen thecap by turning it 1/8 turn anticlock-wise. Stop and wait for any pres-sure in the expansion tank toescape. Then remove the cap byturning it anticlockwise.

Put the expansion tank cap backon tightly. Run the engine, andcheck the temperature gauge. If itgoes back to the red mark, theengine needs repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theexpansion tank. If it has gonedown, add coolant to the MAXmark. Put the expansion tank capback on tightly.

9.

8.

7.

6.

578

377

578

10.

11.

12.

If the Engine Overheats (Diesel models)

EmergencyTowing

Emergency Towing


Removing the expansiontank cap while the engine ishot can cause the coolant tospray out, seriously scaldingyou.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the expansion tankcap.

09/01/28 18:48:04 32SMG631_567

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause seriousmechanical damage almostimmediately. Turn off the engine assoon as you can safely get thevehicle stopped.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the bonnet, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmanoeuvres.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page on petrolmodels, and page on dieselmodels).

This indicator should comeon when the ignition switch

is in the ON (II) position, and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible and you shouldtake immediate action.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with an ‘‘OILPRESSURE LOW’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

1.

2.

4.

3.

106

578

374

461459


Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

563

09/01/28 18:48:13 32SMG631_568

Your vehicle has an engine oil levelsensor to check the oil level. If thesymbol ‘‘ ’’ for the oil levelindicator comes on on the multi-information display when the engineis running, the engine oil level is low.You will also hear a beep when thissymbol comes on. If you select thewarning symbol with the message(s)in the customizing settings, you willsee this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message onthe multi-information display (see

page ). The oil level symbol/messagedisplay can be reset each time youturn off the engine. When you startyour trip again, the system begins tomonitor the engine oil level. It maytake a while until the system sensesthe engine oil level is low and thesymbol, or the symbol with amessage appear on the multi-information display. You shouldcheck the engine oil level and addengine oil before driving again if theoil level symbol, or the symbol with a‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’message comes on.

If this symbol comes on, safely pulloff the road, park the vehicle on levelground, turn off the engine and letthe vehicle sit for approximately 3minutes.

Do not fill above the upper mark onthe dipstick and do not spill theengine oil in the engine compartment.This could damage the engine andother components.

If you do not carry spare engine oil inyour vehicle, drive moderately to thenearest service area and add engineoil. Avoid full-throttle accelerationand driving at high speed.

Check the oil level. If the engine oillevel is near or below the lower markon the dipstick, you should add theengine oil (see page on petrolmodels, and page on dieselmodels).

105

459461

Oil Level Indicator


OIL LEVEL INDICATOR

09/01/28 18:48:21 32SMG631_569

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is in the ON (II)position, and go out after the enginestarts. If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. You will also see thesymbol ‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol witha ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a dealer or a service stationwhere you can get technicalassistance.

This system activates after theengine warms up. If the outsidetemperature is extremely low, youmay have to drive for a long timeuntil the system senses the engineoil level.

If the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay when the engine is running,there is a system problem in theengine oil level sensor. You will alsohear a beep. Have your dealerinspect your vehicle as soon aspossible.

If you ignore the oil level symbol/message and keep driving with thissymbol/message on, you canseriously damage the engine.

107


Oil Level Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Oil Level Sensor Failure

565

09/01/28 18:48:30 32SMG631_570

＊

＊


If this indicator comes on, safely pulloff the road and turn off the engine.Restart the engine and watch theindicator. If it stays on, have yourvehicle checked by the dealer assoon as possible. Drive moderatelyuntil the dealer has inspected theproblem. Avoid full-throttle

acceleration and driving at highspeed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if the indicatorcomes on frequently, even though itgoes off when you follow the aboveprocedure.

On European models, if youturn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, withoutstarting the engine, themalfunction indicator lamp willcome on for about 20 seconds. Itthen goes off or blinks 5 timesunder various conditions. This isnormal: it shows the self-testingcondition of the diagnostics forthe emissions control systems.

This indicator comes on fora few seconds when you

turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position . If the indicator comeson while driving, it means one of theengine’s emissions control systemsmay have a problem. Even thoughyou may feel no difference in yourvehicle’s performance, it can reduceyour fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the malfunctionindicator lamp may also come onwith the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

If you keep driving with themalfunction indicator lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairsmay not be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

:

106


Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Petrol models)

566

09/01/28 18:48:37 32SMG631_571


If this indicator comes on, safely pulloff the road and turn off the engine.Restart and turn off the engine atleast three times at intervals ofapproximately 30 seconds, thenwatch the indicator. If it stays on,have your vehicle checked by your

dealer as soon as possible. Drivemoderately until the dealer hasinspected the problem. Avoid full-throttle acceleration and driving athigh speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if the indicatorcomes on frequently, even though itgoes off when you follow the aboveprocedure.

If you keep driving with themalfunction indicator lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairsmay not be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

This indicator comes on,then goes out when you

turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates one of theemissions control systems may havea problem. Even though you mayfeel no difference in your vehicle’sperformance, it can reduce your fueleconomy and cause your vehicle toput out excessive emissions.Continued operation may causeserious damage.

This indicator will also come on andyou cannot restart the engine afteryour vehicle has run out of fuel. Ifthis occurs, refuel the fuel tank, thenfollow the procedure for

on page beforeattempting to restart the engine.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, without starting theengine, the malfunction indicatorlamp will come on for about 20seconds. It then goes off or blinks 5times under various conditions. Thisis normal: it shows the self-testingcondition of the diagnostics for theemissions control systems.

106

517

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Diesel models)


Primingthe Fuel System

567

09/01/28 18:48:45 32SMG631_572

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information displaywhile the engine is running, there isa problem in the engine controlsystem. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

If this symbol or the symbol with amessage is displayed, safely pull offthe road and turn off the engine.Restart and turn off the engine atleast three times at intervals of

approximately 30 seconds, thenwatch the multi-information display.If it appears again, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if this symbol‘‘ ’’ appears on the multi-information display frequently, eventhough it goes off when you followthe above procedure.

If you keep driving with the symbol‘‘ ’’ on, you can damage yourvehicle’s emissions controls andengine. Those repairs may not becovered by your vehicle’s warranties.

This symbol or the symbol with amessage may also appear if you donot use the proper fuel for theclimate or regional conditions. Thismay cause the engine power toreduce (see page ).

This symbol or the symbol with amessage will also appear on themulti-information display and youcannot restart the engine after yourvehicle has run out of fuel. If thisoccurs, refuel the fuel tank, thenfollow the procedure for

on page beforeattempting to restart the engine.

517

370

On diesel models


PGM-FI Warning

Primingthe Fuel System

568

09/01/28 18:48:52 32SMG631_573

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

The brake system indicatornormally comes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, and as a reminderto check the parking brake. It willstay on if you do not fully release theparking brake.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘BRAKEFLUID LOW’’ message on the multi-information display.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message in the multi-information display if there is aproblem with the brake system.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthe brake system indicator, haveyour vehicle inspected by yourdealer immediately.

471

578

Brake System Indicator

EmergencyTowing


09/01/28 18:49:01 32SMG631_574

The vehicle’s fuses are located intwo fuse boxes.

The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left corner.

The under-bonnet fuse box is locatedin the back of the enginecompartment on the left side. Toopen it, push the tabs as shown.

Fuses


TABTAB

INTERIOR FUSE BOX Petrol modelsUNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX

Diesel modelsUNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX

09/01/28 18:49:09 32SMG631_575

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

On the under-bonnet fuse box,remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-bonnet fuse box bylooking through the side windowat the wire inside. Remove thescrews with a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and on petrol models, andpages and on diesel models,or the diagram on the fuse box lid,which fuse or fuses control thatdevice. Check those fuses first, butcheck all the fuses before decidingthat a blown fuse is the cause.Replace any blown fuses, and checkif the device works. 3.

2.

1.

574 575576 577

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses


Fuses

571

BLOWNFUSE

BLOWN

FUSE

09/01/28 18:49:17 32SMG631_576

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-bonnet fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-bonnet fuse box.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the cigarettelighter or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate that anything is wrong.Replace the fuse with one of thecorrect rating as soon as you can.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

5.4.

Fuses


FUSE PULLER BLOWN

09/01/28 18:49:24 32SMG631_577

＋Replacing a fuse with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement fuse with the properrating for the circuit, install one witha lower rating.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

To check the battery fuse, removethe cover on the positive ( )terminal on the battery.

6.

Fuses


FUSE

1.8 engine model with manualtransmission is shown.

1.8 engine model with automatictransmission is shown.

FUSE

09/01/28 18:49:30 32SMG631_578

＊

＊

＊

The fuses contained in the under-bonnet fuse box varyslightly depending on models. The locations of fuses areshown with symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the tablebelow for the fuses on your vehicle.

No. No.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected1

2

3

456789101112

13141516171819202122232425262728

For some types

Main Fuse BatteryEPSHeadlight MainIgnition Switch MainVSA MotorVSA F/SOption Maini-SHIFTPower Window MainMG ClutchThrottle Control RelayIG PowerNot UsedNot UsedRear Defroster

LAF SensorIG CoilSub FanBack UpInterior LightMain FanBlowerOil Level SensorHorn, StopHazardNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedHeadlight WasherNot UsedNot Used

:


Fuse Locations (Petrol models)

574

UNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX

09/01/28 18:49:37 32SMG631_579

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

The fuses contained in the interior fuse box vary slightlydepending on models. The locations of fuses are shownwith symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the table belowfor the fuses on your vehicle.

No. No. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected123456789

1011121314151617181920

21222324252627282930

3132333435363738

For some types

Headlight Low Beam MainShifterStart SignalSunshadesDoor LockDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedRear Accessory SocketAccessoryFront Passenger’s PowerWindowFront Accessory SocketRear Right Power WindowRear Left Power WindowNot UsedAccessory, RadioIG2 HACDaytime LightFront Wiper

Power WindowFuel PumpIG1 ACGABS UnitHeated SeatsFront Fog LightsDaytime Running LightsIG1 STARTODS (Occupant DetectionSystem)MeterSRSRight Headlight High BeamLeft Headlight High BeamSmall Lights (Interior)Small Lights (Exterior)Right Headlight Low BeamLeft Headlight Low BeamHeadlight High Beam MainSmall Lights MainRear Fog Lights :


Fuse Locations (Petrol models)

575

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

09/01/28 18:49:44 32SMG631_580

＊

The fuses contained in the under-bonnet fuse box varyslightly depending on models. The locations of fuses areshown with symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the tablebelow for the fuses on your vehicle.

No. Circuits Protected No. Circuits Protected1

2

3

456789101112

Main Fuse BatteryEPSHeadlight MainIgnition Switch MainVSA MotorVSA F/SOption MainGlowPower Window MainMG ClutchIGP2IGPNot UsedNot UsedRear Defroster

131415161718192021222324

2526

2728

Headlight WasherNot UsedMain FanBack UpInterior LightSub FanBlowerNot UsedHorn, StopHazardFuel HeaterISV (Intake ShutterValve)Fuel Heater MonitorPTC1 (PositiveTemperature CoefficientHeater System)PTC2PTC3


Fuse Locations (Diesel models)

576

UNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX

09/01/28 18:49:50 32SMG631_581

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

The fuses contained in the interior fuse box vary slightlydepending on models. The locations of fuses are shownwith symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the table belowfor the fuses on your vehicle.

No. No.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected123456789

1011121314151617181920

21222324252627282930

3132333435363738

Power WindowFuel PumpIG1 ACGABS UnitHeated SeatsFront Fog LightsDaytime Running LightsIG1 STARTODS (Occupant DetectionSystem)MeterSRSRight Headlight High BeamLeft Headlight High BeamSmall Lights (Interior)Small Lights (Exterior)Right Headlight Low BeamLeft Headlight Low BeamHeadlight High Beam MainSmall Lights MainRear Fog Light For some types

Headlight Low Beam MainShifterStart SignalSunshadesDoor LockDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedRear Accessory SocketAccessoryFront Passenger’s PowerWindowFront Accessory SocketRear Right Power WindowRear Left Power WindowNot UsedAccessory, RadioIG2 HACDaytime LightFront Wiper

:


Fuse Locations (Diesel models)

577

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

09/01/28 18:49:57 32SMG631_582

－

－

－

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the front tyres and lift themoff the ground. The other two reartyres remain on the ground.

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension and

the cables lift that end of the vehicleoff the ground. Your vehicle’ssuspension and body can beseriously damaged.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do the following:

Release the parking brake.

Release the parking brake.Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.Shift to N.Make sure that the gear positionindicator shows N.Turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position.

Shift the transmission to neutral.

Start the engine.Press on the brake pedal. Movethe shift lever through all itspositions.Shift to D position and hold for 5seconds, then to N.Turn off the engine.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Release the parking brake.

i-SHIFT (automated manualtransmission):

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Emergency Towing


Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

This method oftowing is unacceptable.

578

09/01/28 18:50:12 32SMG631_583

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle bythe bumpers will cause seriousdamage. The bumpers are notdesigned to support the vehicle’sweight.

The steering system can bedamaged if the steering wheel islocked. Leave the ignition switch inthe ACCESSORY (I) position, andmake sure the steering wheel turnsfreely before you begin towing.

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

Do not tie down the vehicle at anangle with which the towing cableshit against the vehicle’s frontbumper. To avoid your vehicle fromdamaging, protect the front bumperwith a tape.

If you decide to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar.Prepare the vehicle for towing asdescribed above, and leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) position so the steering wheeldoes not lock. Make sure the radioand any electrical accessories areturned off so they do not run downthe battery.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If youcannot shift the transmission or startthe engine (automatic transmission),your vehicle must be transportedwith the front wheels off the ground.

If the gear position indicator doesnot show N with the ignition switchin the ON (II) position, thetransmission may not be shifted toneutral. In this case, your vehiclemust be transported with the frontwheels off the ground.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 80 km (50 miles), and keep thespeed below 55 km/h (35 mph).


Emergency Towing


09/01/28 18:50:20 32SMG631_584

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see the previous page).

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can usethe detachable front towing hookequipped with your vehicle. Makesure to use the properly-designedand attached towing equipment.

To attach the front towing hook onthe left of the front bumper on yourvehicle:

Take the front towing hook, thewheel nut wrench and the flat-tipped screwdriver out of the toolkit bag in the left side storage inthe luggage area.

Remove the cover from thebumper by pushing the lower partof the cover with your finger.

1.

2.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Emergency Towing


TOOL KIT

09/01/28 18:50:28 32SMG631_585

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle bythe bumpers will cause seriousdamage. The bumpers are notdesigned to support the vehicle’sweight.

If you slip the clutch for a long timewhile trying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat and damage thetransmission. Use a tow service toprevent transmission damage.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe front towing hook for straight,flat ground towing only. Do not towat an angle. This hook should not beused for open-road towing.

Screw the front towing hook intothe bolt hole behind the bumperthrough the opening and tightenthe hook securely by the wheelnut wrench.

3.

Emergency Towing


WHEEL NUT WRENCH

09/01/28 18:50:33 32SMG631_586

582

09/01/28 18:50:36 32SMG631_587

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers.

................Identification Numbers . 584................................Specifications . 587

Three Way Catalytic Converter.........................(Petrol models) . 593

Catalytic Converters.........................(Diesel models) . 594

Technical Information

Technical Information 583

09/01/28 18:50:39 32SMG631_588

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The chassis number is stamped onthe fire wall.

The engine number is stampedinto the engine block.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Do not mistake the transmissionnumber for the engine number.

1.

2.

3.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information584

1.4 engine model

1.8 engine model

ENGINE NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

i-SHIFT (AUTOMATED MANUALTRANSMISSION) NUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBERAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

09/01/28 18:50:47 32SMG631_589

On some types, a certification plateis attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

The chassis and engine numbersalso appear on the plate attached tothe front doorjamb on the left side.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)/chassis number also appearson a plate fastened to the top of thedashboard on some types.

CONTINUED




ENGINE NUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

09/01/28 18:50:52 32SMG631_590

＊

＊

The vehicle identification number(VIN)/chassis number is mouldedon the fire wall in the enginecompartment. To access this number,remove the lid on the back of theengine compartment. Make sure toreinstall the lid before closing thebonnet.

On some types, the chassis number/chassis and engine numbers alsoappear on the plate attached to theleft side doorjamb.

On Australian model, thecertification plate is attached to theleft side doorjamb.

information appearson the plate on the top of thedashboard.

is the calendar monthand the year in which the body shelland power train sub-assemblies areconjoined and the vehicle is driven ormoved from the production line.

On Australian model



BUILT DATEBUILT DATE

586

CHASSIS AND ENGINENUMBER PLATE/CERTIFICATION PLATE: Australian model only

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)/BUILT DATE PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)/CHASSIS NUMBER

09/01/28 18:50:59 32SMG631_591

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Specifications


The mounting point/rear over

hang of coupling device

Dimensions

655 mm (25.8 in)

538 mm (21.2 in)621 mm (24.4 in)

4,256 mm (167.6 in)

325 mm (12.8 in)1,014 mm (39.9 in)1,025 mm (40.4 in)1,125 mm (44.3 in)897 mm (35.3 in)

marks show towbar fixing points.mark shows towbar coupling point.

DimensionsNo.(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

4,270 mm (168.1 in)

1,510 mm (59.4 in)

1,504 mm (59.2 in)2,635 mm (103.7 in)1,460 mm (57.5 in)1,765 mm (69.5 in)

Length

WidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

4,250 mm (167.3 in)

1,505 mm (59.3 in)

NOTE:1.2.

(8)

Australian model

Front

Rear

Saudi Arabia model1 :2 :

(2)

(5)

(4)(3)

(1)

(6)(7)

1

2

2

09/01/28 18:51:14 32SMG631_592

－－

－－－－

－－

－－

－－－－

＊

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications


Weights

1,194 1,321 kg (2,632 2,912 lbs)

1,189 1,247 kg (2,621 2,749 lbs)1,186 1,244 kg (2,615 2,743 lbs)

1,890 kg (4,167 lbs)1,800 kg (3,968 lbs)1,750 kg (3,858 lbs)1,690 kg (3,726 lbs)

1,421 kg (3,133 lbs)1,351 1,468 kg (2,978 3,236 lbs)

1,282 1,321 kg (2,826 2,912 lbs)

1,253 1,357 kg (2,762 2,992 lbs)1,248 1,287 kg (2,751 2,837 lbs)

Curb weight

Max. permissible weight

920 kg (2,028 lbs)940 kg (2,072 lbs)

1,000 kg (2,205 lbs)1,085 kg (2,392 lbs)

820 kg (1,808 lbs)830 kg (1,830 lbs)

1,280 kg (2,822 lbs)

1,315 kg (2,899 lbs)

Max. permissible axle weight(Front)

Max. permissible axle weight(Rear)

Max. loaded vehicle weight(ADR)

1,730 kg (3,814 lbs)1,700 kg (3,748 lbs)

835 kg (1,841 lbs)840 kg (1,852 lbs)

1,325 kg (2,921 lbs)

840 kg (1,852 lbs)

1.4 engine1.8 engine

Diesel engine

M/TA/T


Diesel engine

M/TA/T

M/TA/T

M/Ti-SHIFT

M/T

A/T

1.4 engine

1.8 engine

Diesel engine

1 :

2 :3 :4 :

See the plate attached to the front doorjamb on the left side or askdealer for information.Australian modelSouth African modelSaudi Arabia model

M/T

A/T


Diesel engine

1

1

1

2

3

3

3

2

2

4

2

09/01/28 18:51:29 32SMG631_593

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊＊＊

CONTINUED

Specifications


Engine (Diesel models)

Engine (Petrol models)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC i-VTECin line, 4-cylinder gasoline engine

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC i-VTEC in line,

4-cylinder gasoline engine73 x 80.0 mm (2.87 x 3.15 in)81 x 87.3 mm (3.19 x 3.44 in)

1,339 cm (82 cu-in)1,799 cm (110 cu-in)

103 kW (140 PS)/6,300 rpm174 N·m (17.7 kgf·m)/4,300 rpm

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratio 16.7 : 1

2,204 cm (134 cu-in)85 x 97.1 mm (3.35 x 3.82 in)

Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC inline, 4-cylinder diesel engine with

turbo charger, intercooler

SKJ20DR-M11SIZFR6K-11S

SKJ20DR-M13IZFR6K13

10.5 : 110.5 : 1

Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Max. PowerMax. TorqueMax. SpeedCompressionratioSpark plugs

Max. towing weight(EU)

Max. towing weight (ADR)

The maximum permissiblevertical load on the couplingdevice (EU)

1,500 kg (3,307 lbs)1,000 kg (2,205 lbs)1,400 kg (3,086 lbs)1,200 kg (2,646 lbs)

500 kg (1,102 lbs)

75 kg (165 lbs)

1,400 kg (3,086 lbs)800 kg (1,764 lbs)500 kg (1,102 lbs)500 kg (1,102 lbs) 195 km/h (121 mph)

NGK:DENSO:NGK:DENSO:

: Saudi Arabia model

1.4 engine

1.8 engine

1.4 engine1.8 engine1.4 engine1.8 engine1.8 engine1.8 engine

1.4 engine1.8 engine1.4 engine

1.8 engine

M/TA/TM/TA/T

Diesel modelsThe following is for Germany only.The maximum trailer weight is valid for 12% slope. For anincreasing of the trailer weight you have to look in your vehiclepaper or ask your next dealer.

1 :2 :

3 :4 :5 :6 :

1.4 engine model1.8 engine model with manual transmission1.8 engine model with automatic transmissionAustralian model

Trailer withbrakes

Trailer withoutbrakes

Trailer withbrakesTrailer withoutbrakes

2

6

3

4

5

1

09/01/28 18:51:45 32SMG631_594

＊＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊＊

＊＊

Specifications


Capacities

50 (13.2 US gal , 11.0 Imp gal)

1.6 (1.7 US qt , 1.4 Imp qt)4.4 (1.16 US gal , 0.97 Imp gal)5.3 (1.40 US gal , 1.17 Imp gal)

1.4 (1.5 US qt , 1.2 Imp qt)

Fuel tank

Engine coolant

Engine oil

6.8 (7.2 US qt , 6.0 Imp qt)4.5 (4.8 US qt , 4.0 Imp qt)4.2 (4.4 US qt , 3.7 Imp qt)5.5 (5.8 US qt , 4.8 Imp qt)3.5 (3.7 US qt , 3.1 Imp qt)3.4 (3.6 US qt , 3.0 Imp qt)5.9 (6.2 US qt , 5.2 Imp qt)3.7 (3.9 US qt , 3.3 Imp qt)3.6 (3.8 US qt , 3.2 Imp qt)

7.8 (2.06 US gal , 1.72 Imp gal)

6.8 (1.80 US gal , 1.50 Imp gal)5.1 (1.35 US gal , 1.12 Imp gal)6.6 (1.74 US gal , 1.45 Imp gal)

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine0.6 (0.16 US gal , 0.13 Imp gal)

Including the coolant in the expansion tank and that remaining inthe engine. Expansion tank capacity:

0.5 (0.13 US gal , 0.11 Imp gal)0.4 (0.11 US gal , 0.09 Imp gal)

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

5.8 (6.1 US qt , 5.1 Imp qt)2.5 (2.6 US qt , 2.2 Imp qt)2.5 (2.6 US qt , 2.2 Imp qt)2.2 (2.3 US qt , 1.9 Imp qt)

With headlight washerWithout headlight washer

5.7 (1.51 US gal , 1.25 Imp gal)

7.3 (1.93 US gal , 1.61 Imp gal)

2.4 (2.5 US qt , 2.1 Imp qt)5.9 (6.2 US qt , 5.2 Imp qt)

Manual transmission fluid(including i-SHIFT)

Automatic transmission fluid

Manual transmission fluid

Windscreen washer reservoir

Approx.

1.4 engine model:1.8 engine model:

7 :8 :

1 :

2 :3 :

4 :5 :6 :

Change

Total

ChangeIncludingfilter

Withoutfilter

Total

1.4 engine model1.8 engine model

Diesel models

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

9 :10 :

1.8 engine model with manual transmission1.8 engine model with automatic transmission

5, 6

6

2

1, 3

4

5

7

8

2

5

7

8

2

5

6

2

5

6

2

5

6

2

9

10

09/01/28 18:52:04 32SMG631_595

－

CONTINUED


Specifications

591

Suspension

Steering

Clutch

Brake

Alignment

Tyres

0.0 mm (0.00 in)

0°

Type

Type

Type

TypeFrontRearParking

Dry, single plate, diaphragm spring

StrutTorsion beam

Rack and pinion, with electricalpower assistance

Power assistedVentilated discSolid discMechanical

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

4.0 mm (0.16 in)

1°4°14’

Size/Pressure See tyre information label ondriver’s doorjamb or ask dealerfor information.

in

FrontRear

FrontRearFrontRearFront

09/01/28 18:52:17 32SMG631_596

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

－－－

＊＊＊

－－－

＊

＊

＊

－－－－－

－－－－－－－－

－－

－－－

＊＊＊

Specifications


Battery

Fuses(Diesel models)

Fuses (Petrol models)

Jack

Lights

12 V12 V 55 W

Capacity 55 W

12 V12 V

21/5 W21 W

5 W21 W

12 V12 V

35 W12 V

12 V12 V12 V

59 AH/5 HR45 AH/20 HR36 AH/5 HR

28 AH/5 HR35 AH/20 HR

12 V12 V

Interior

Under-bonnet

Interior

Under-bonnet

12 V 74 AH/20 HR

Type Honda Type-A

12 V 21 W12 V 18 W12 V 5 W

See page 575 or the fuse labelattached to the lower dashboard.See page 574 or the fuse boxcover.

See page 577 or the fuse labelattached to the lower dashboard.See page 576 or the fuse boxcover. 12 V

12 V14 V

5 W2 W1.4 W

12 V12 V

8 W5 W

12 V 5 W12 V 55 W

21/5 W12 V

Headlights

Front turn signal lightsFront position lightsSide turn signal lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/taillights (in fenders)Tail-lightsBack-up lightsRear fog lightStop/taillights (in tailgate)Front fog lightsLicence plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightCeiling lights

Driver’s and front passenger’sambient foot lightsGlove box lightVanity mirror lightsLuggage area light

On vehicles without rear fog light.On vehicles with rear fog light.

For some types

On vehicles with high voltage discharge type low beamheadlights, replacement of a low beam headlight bulb should beperformed by your dealer.

Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.

Diesel models

FrontRear

(D2R)

1 :2 :3 :

1.8 engine model1.4 engine model

High beamLow beam

(H1)(H7)

European models:

1 :

2 :

(AMBER)

(H11)

(SILVER/AMBER)

LED type

LED type

LED type

5 :4 :3 :

4

2

5

2

2

1

2

3

1

2

3

1 3

3

3

09/01/28 18:52:47 32SMG631_597

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’sperformance. Follow theseguidelines to protect your vehicle’sthree way catalytic converter.

Always use unleaded petrol. Evena small amount of leaded petrolcan contaminate the catalystmetals, making the three waycatalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring,backfiring, stalling, or otherwisenot running properly.



Three Way Catalytic Converter (Petrol models)

593

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

09/01/28 18:52:56 32SMG631_598

The catalytic converter containsprecious metals that serve ascatalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is equippedwith your vehicle to reduce HC, CO,NOx and PM. A replacement unitmust be an original Honda part or itsequivalent.

Always use only diesel fuelrecommended in this owner’smanual (see page ).370


Catalytic Converters (Diesel models)

594

WARM UP OXIDATION CATALYTICCONVERTEROXIDATION CATALYTIC CONVERTER

09/02/12 10:34:09 32SMG631_599

The PM will be burnt out andremoved from the DPF at aperiodically high temperature of thecatalytic converter while driving.While the PM is burnt, you maynotice some changes on theinstrument panel and the exhaustgas. You may notice some whitesmoke in the exhaust gas. Theaverage fuel consumption on themulti-information display will beincreased temporarily.

The DPF system requires no regularmaintenance. If you drive for longperiods at slow speeds, particulatematter (PM) will be accumulatedand the regeneration of DPF will berequired. The condition of theaccumulated PM will vary with thetype of diesel fuel. Always use therecommended diesel fuel in thisowner’s manual (see page ).

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘DPF REGENERATIONREQUIRED’’ message on the multi-information display while the engineis running, it means the dieselparticulate filter (DPF) should beregenerated to remove theaccumulated particulate matter (PM).

Your vehicle is equipped with thediesel particulate filter (DPF) systemto remove the particulate matter(PM) from the exhaust gas. TheDPF is installed in the catalyticconverter.

370

CONTINUED


DPF (Regeneration Required)


Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)System(For some types)

595

OXIDATION CATALYTIC CONVERTERWITH DPF

09/02/12 10:34:17 32SMG631_600

If you ignore this symbol/messageand continue driving, the DPF andyour vehicle’s emission controlsystems will be seriously damaged.

To regenerate the DPF, when trafficallows, maintain a vehicle speed of atleast 60 km/h (37 mph) and continueto drive until the symbol/messagegoes out (it may take about 15minutes, depending on drivingconditions). This will increase theexhaust temperature and help toburn and remove the PM from theDPF.

The catalytic converter with DPFsystem must operate at a hightemperature for the chemicalreactions to take place. It can set onfire any combustible materials thatcome near it. Park your vehicle awayfrom high grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

If you ignore this symbol/messageand continue driving, the systemwarning switches to the symbol/message of DPF (check system). Ifthis happens, take your vehicle to aHonda dealer as soon as possible tohave the DPF system checked.

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information displaywhile the engine is running, it meansthe diesel particulate filter (DPF) isclogged with accumulatedparticulate matter (PM) and itshould be checked, then repaired orreplaced. Take your vehicle to aHonda dealer as soon as possible.While in this condition, the enginepower gets reduced.



DPF (Check System)

596

09/01/28 18:53:17 32SMG631_601

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 77, 565............................Jump Starting . 554

..............................Maintenance . 511............................Specifications . 592

..............................Before Driving . 369..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 22

.........................Beverage Holders . 186....................Bonnet, Opening the . 373

..................................Booster Seats . 63

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 420

.............Break-in, New Linings . 370............Bulb Replacement . 489, 490

...........................................Fluid . 471.......................................Parking . 182

.................System Indicator . 78, 569.................Pad Wear Indicators . 419

.............................Braking System . 419.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 370

Brightness Control,...............................Instruments . 148

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 490

..............................Brake Lights . 489.......................Front Fog Lights . 492

...............Front Position Lights . 486.................................Headlights . 479

...........................Interior Lights . 493.................Licence Plate Lights . 490

..........................Rear Fog Light . 490........................Rear Lights . 489, 490

............................Specifications . 592....................Turn Signal Lights . 487

...Accessories and Modifications . 380ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.....................................Position) . 154.............Accessory Power Socket . 187

........Adding Engine Coolant . 463, 465...........Additives, Engine Oil . 460, 462

.............................Airbag (SRS) . 12, 27...................................Air Bleeding . 517

.............Air Cleaner Element . 473, 475..............Air Conditioning System . 203

..............................Maintenance . 497.................................Usage . 206, 211

................Air Outlets(Vents) . 197, 203......................Air Pressure, Tyres . 503

.....Aluminium Wheels, Cleaning . 521..............................Antifreeze . 463, 465

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 78, 420

...................................Operation . 420Anti-theft Steering Column

............................................Lock . 154..........................Appearance Care . 519

...........................................Ashtray . 191................................Audio System . 220

........................Automatic Heating . 201Automatic Lighting Feature

...................................Operation . 145.......................System Warning . 111

..............Automatic Transmission . 400..........................Capacity, Fluid . 590

...............Checking Fluid Level . 468.......................................Shifting . 400

....................Position Indicators . 400

....................Shift Lock Release . 405...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 24

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 316

Index

A

B

597

09/01/28 18:53:21 32SMG631_602

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 2, 70

..............Daytime Running Lights . 145

......................Bulbs, Halogen . 479, 492

............................Capacities Chart . 590.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 66

.........................Carrying Luggage . 382Cassette Player

............................................Care . 262...........................Operation . 260, 309

..............Catalytic Converter . 593, 594.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

.........................................CD Care . 312..........................CD Changer . 239, 287

CD Changer Error...........................Messages . 242, 290

..............................CD Player . 233, 279.CD Player Error Messages . 241, 289

................................Ceiling Lights . 192...............................Centre Pocket . 188

.........................Certification Plate . 586................................Chains, Tyres . 509

...................Changing a Flat Tyre . 530Changing Oil

......................................When to . 446...Charging System Indicator . 77, 565

...........................Chassis Number . 586............Checklist, Before Driving . 389

................Child Restraint Systems . 44.....................Lower Anchorages . 49

................Tether Anchor Points . 60....Child Restraint Systems for EU . 47

.....................................Child Safety . 34..............................Booster Seats . 63

............Child Restraint Systems . 44Important Safety

.............................Reminders . 34, 39..........................................Infants . 41

..........................Larger Children . 61.....................Lower Anchorages . 49

................Risks with Airbags . 35, 38.............................Small Children . 43

.........................................Tethers . 60.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 35

................Childproof Door Locks . 158..........................Cigarette Lighter . 190

............Cleaner Element, Air . 473, 475Cleaning

...................Aluminium Wheels . 521......................................Exterior . 520.......................................Interior . 523

...................................Seat Belts . 525

...........................................Vinyl . 524....................................Windows . 524

..............................................Clock . 317...........................Clutch Fluid . 471, 472

......................................Coat Hook . 188Cold Weather, Starting

.................................in . 390, 392, 393.....................Compact Spare Tyre . 528

.................Console Compartment . 185.............Controls, Instruments and . 69

Coolant................................Adding . 463, 465

....................................Checking . 376.................Proper Solution . 463, 465

...................Temperature Gauge . 89....................Corrosion Protection . 526

................Cruise Control Indicator . 83............Cruise Control Operation . 322

...................................Cup Holders . 186............Customized Settings . 113, 114

Index

C

D

598

09/01/28 18:53:26 32SMG631_603

CONTINUED

.................................Dead Battery . 554....................Default Settings . 114, 135

..........Deflation Warning System . 425Defrosting the

....................Windows . 200, 210, 216..............Demister, Rear Window . 149

.............................Diesel Fuel . 370, 371Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

........................................System . 595....................................Dimensions . 587

.............Dimming the Headlights . 144Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 468..................................Engine Oil . 374

........................Directional Signals . 144Disc Brake Pad Wear

...................................Indicators . 419............................Disc Player . 233, 279

Doors............Locking and Unlocking . 155

....................Power Door Locks . 155Downshifting

..........Automatic Transmission . 400..............Manual Transmission . 395

...................DPF (Check System) . 596....DPF (Regeneration Required) . 595

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7...........................................Driving . 387

....................................Economy . 379.........................In Bad Weather . 430

...........................Driving, i-SHIFT . 406..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 498

..............................Economy, Fuel . 379Electric Power Steering (EPS)

.......................................Indicator . 82.......................................Symbol . 108

..................................Emergencies . 527.............Battery, Jump Starting . 554...........Brake System Indicator . 569

...............Changing a Flat Tyre . 530.....Charging System Indicator . 565

..................Checking the Fuses . 570.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 149

...............................Honda TRK . 537........i-SHIFT System Indicator . 416

............................Jump Starting . 554.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 563

Malfunction Indicator..............................Lamp . 566, 567

....................Oil Level Indicator . 564..........Overheated Engine . 557, 561

.......................................Towing . 578........................Tyre Sealant Kit . 537.........................Emergency Brake . 182

....................Emergency Flashers . 149......................Emergency Towing . 578

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 89

.........................If It Won’t Start . 552Malfunction Indicator

........................Lamp . 76, 566, 567............Oil Level Indicator . 105, 564

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 77, 563

......Oil, What Kind to Use . 459, 461.......................Overheating . 557, 561

............................Specifications . 589..........Starting (Diesel models) . 393

Starting (Petrol models with............................M/T, A/T) . 390

Starting (Petrol models with.................................i-SHIFT) . 392

.............Engine Coolant . 376, 463, 465....................Engine Number . 584, 585

Index

E

599

09/01/28 18:53:31 32SMG631_604

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 66....................Expansion Tank . 377, 465

..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 520

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 524..................Fan, Interior . 199, 209, 215

.........................................Features . 195....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 371

Filters........................Air Cleaner . 473, 475

.........................Dust and Pollen . 498.............................................Fuel . 476

...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 149..................Flat Tyre, Changing a . 530

.....................................Floor Mats . 523Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 468..........................................Brake . 471.........................................Clutch . 472

..............Manual Transmission . 470...............Windscreen Washers . 467

...................Folding Door Mirrors . 181.........................Folding Rear Seat . 170........................Four-way Flashers . 149

............................Front Airbags . 12, 28...........................Front Fog Lights . 147

......................................Front Seat . 165....................................Adjusting . 165

...................................Airbags . 12, 27

.......................................Heaters . 173.........................................Fuel . 370, 371

...........................Cutoff System . 378.................................Diesel . 370, 371

......................Fill Door and Cap . 371...........................................Filter . 476...........................................Gauge . 89

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 86................Octane Requirement . 370

........................Tank, Refueling . 371.....................Fuses, Checking the . 570

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 89

...............................................Fuel . 89...............................Speedometer . 89

.................................Tachometer . 89................Gear Position Indicator . 406

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 400

..............Manual Transmission . 395..............................Glass Cleaning . 524

......................................Glove Box . 184......................Glow Plugs Indicator . 77

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 479Hands-Free Telephone (HFT)

........................................System . 330............Hazard Warning Flashers . 149

Headlights.....................................Adjuster . 150

........................................Aiming . 479.........Daytime Running Lights . 145

..................High Beam Indicator . 85..........Low Beams, Turning on . 144

......................Reminder Beeper . 144........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 479

.................................Turning on . 144.......................................Washer . 141

............................Head Restraints . 166...............................Heated Mirror . 180

...................................Heater, Seat . 173

Index

G

H

F

600

09/01/28 18:53:36 32SMG631_605

CONTINUED

................................................Keys . 152

.........Heating, Automatic System . 201Heating and Cooling System

.....................Automatic System . 203High Altitude, Starting

.................................at . 390, 392, 393...............High-Low Beam Switch . 144..............High-mount Brake Light . 478...............Hill Start Assist System . 424

...................................Honda TRK . 537...........................................Horn . 3, 138

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 472

Identification Number,.......................................Vehicle . 586

Ignition............................................Keys . 152

.........................................Switch . 154......................Immobilizer System . 153

Important Safety....................................Precautions . 8

.......................Indicators . 72, 73, 74, 75...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 78

Brake (Parking and Brake............................System) . 78, 569

................Charging System . 77, 565.............................Cruise Control . 83

Deflation Warning..............................System . 84, 426

...............................................EPS . 82...................................Glow Plugs . 77...................................High Beam . 85

...........................i-SHIFT System . 79........Key (Immobilizer System) . 79

......................................Low Fuel . 86................Low Oil Pressure . 77, 563

Malfunction Indicator..............................Lamp . 566, 567.............................Oil Level . 105, 564

...............................................SRS . 80.........................System Message . 80

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 85

.......................................VSA . 83, 422....................VSA Activation . 83, 422

...Indicators, Instrument Panel . 72, 76...............................Infant Restraint . 41

......................................Infant Seats . 41.....................Lower Anchorages . 49

................Tether Anchor Points . 60..................Inflation, Proper Tyre . 503

.................................Inside Mirror . 179............................Inspection, Tyre . 504..........Instrument Panel . 72, 73, 74, 75

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 148...........................Interior Cleaning . 523

...............................Interior Lights . 192.................................Interface Dial . 196

........................................Introduction . i.........................................iPod . 243, 291

i-SHIFT (Automated Manual....Transmission) Operation . 406

...............................Indicator . 79, 416...................Transmission Fluid . 470

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 533......................................Jack, Tyre . 531

................................Jump Starting . 554

Index

J

K

I

601

09/01/28 18:53:41 32SMG631_606

..................New Vehicle Break-in . 370...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

.......Numbers, Identification . 584, 586

.......................Label, Certification . 586...............Lane Change, Signaling . 144

......................Language Selection . 134

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 23Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 477.....................Indicator . 72, 73, 74, 75......................................Position . 144

................................Turn Signal . 144....................................Load Limits . 383

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 154Locks

.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 154............................Fuel Fill Door . 371

...............................Power Door . 155......................................Tailgate . 163

........................Low Coolant Level . 376.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 86

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 77, 563.........................Lower Anchorages . 49

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 395Lubricant Specifications

..........................................Chart . 590....................Luggage Area Cover . 174

.....................Luggage Area Light . 495.............................Luggage Hooks . 385

................Luggage, How to Carry . 383..........................Luggage, Storing . 382

..................................Maintenance . 441Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 444........................................Record . 453

..........................................Safety . 442....................................Schedule . 443

Malfunction Indicator..................................Lamp . 566, 567

...................Manual Transmission . 395........Manual Transmission Fluid . 470

Maximum Allowable Shift........................................Speeds . 397

.........................Meters, Gauges . 72, 87........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 179

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 381........mph to km/h Change Button . 88

........................................MP3 . 234, 280.............Multi-Information Display . 91

........Octane Requirement, Petrol . 370.........................................Odometer . 95

...............................Odometer, Trip . 95Oil

......Change, When to . 446, 448, 450

......................Checking Engine . 374..................Level Indicator . 105, 564

..............Pressure Indicator . 77, 563Selecting Proper Viscosity

..............................Chart . 460, 462................Oil Level Indicator . 105, 564

..............Oil Level Sensor Failure . 565.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 154

..................One-push Turn Signal . 144............................Outside Mirrors . 180

Outside Temperature.......................................Indicator . 95

............Overheating, Engine . 557, 561

Index

N

O

L

M

602

09/01/28 18:53:47 32SMG631_607

CONTINUED

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 444

..............................Paddle Shifters . 408

..............................Paint Touch-up . 522............Panel Brightness Control . 148

...........................................Parking . 418...............................Parking Brake . 182

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 78, 569

Parking Over Things That............................................Burn . 418

..............................................Petrol . 370................Filling the Fuel Tank . 371

...........................................Filter . 476...........................Fuel Economy . 379

...........................................Gauge . 89.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 86

................Octane Requirement . 370....................................Refueling . 371

..........................PGM-FI Warning . 568..................Polishing and Waxing . 521

...................................Pollen Filter . 498..............................Position Lights . 144

........................Power Door Locks . 155

............................Power Windows . 175.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 20

.............Priming the Fuel System . 517..................Proper Seat Belt Usage . 17

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 14...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 20........................Protecting Children . 34.......................Protecting Infants . 41

.......Protecting Larger Children . 61.........Protecting Small Children . 43

Using Child Restraint Systems............................with Tethers . 60

..........Using Lower Anchorages . 49

...........Radiator Overheating . 557, 561...........Radio/Disc Sound System . 220

........................................RDS . 224, 268......................Rear Fog Light . 146, 147

Rear Lights, Bulb......................Replacement . 489, 490

........................Rear Seat Armrest . 169

........................Rear Seat, Folding . 170..........................Rear View Mirror . 179

...............Rear Window Demister . 149.............Reclining the Seat Backs . 165

....Reminder Indicators . 72, 73, 74, 75................Remote Audio Controls . 315

.....................Remote Transmitter . 159Replacement Information

........Air Cleaner Element . 473, 475..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 498

..................................Fuel Filter . 476..........................................Fuses . 570

................................Light Bulbs . 477....................................Schedule . 443

................................Spark Plugs . 589..........................................Tyres . 506

.............................Wiper Blades . 500Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 25Reserve Tank, Engine

...............................Coolant . 376, 463...............................Restraint, Child . 34............................Reverse lockout . 399

......................................Roof Rack . 384...............................Rotation, Tyre . 505

Index

R

P

603

09/01/28 18:53:52 32SMG631_608

................................Safety Belts . 10, 22.................................Safety Features . 9

.........................................Airbags . 12.....................................Seat Belts . 10

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 67..............................Safety Messages . iii

...................................Seat Belts . 10, 22...............Additional Information . 22

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 24

.....................................Cleaning . 525................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 23

................................Maintenance . 25Reminder Indicator and

................................Beeper . 22, 76...................System Components . 22

...............Use During Pregnancy . 20..................................Seat Heaters . 173

......................Seats, Adjusting the . 165............................Security System . 319...........................Service Intervals . 443

.........Service Station Procedures . 371..........................Setting the Clock . 317

..............................Side Airbags . 12, 29...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29

........................Risks to Children . 38................Side Curtain Airbags . 12, 30

.............................Signaling Turns . 144....................................Snow Tyres . 508

...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 520................................Sound System . 220

.....................................Spare Tyre . 528

.....................................Compact . 528......................................Inflating . 528

............................Specifications . 528....................................Spark Plugs . 589

....................Specifications Charts . 587..................................Speed Alarm . 116

...................Speed Alarm Indicator . 82...................................Speedometer . 89

Speed-sensitive Volume.......Compensation (SVC) . 232, 278

.......................................Spotlights . 192..........SRS, Additional Information . 27

...Additional Safety Precautions . 32..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 28

........................SRS Components . 27

..................................SRS Service . 32.............................SRS Indicator . 30, 80

...........................................START . 154...................Start Button . 390, 392, 393

......Starting the Engine . 390, 392, 393In Cold Weather at

........High Altitude . 390, 392, 393................With a Dead Battery . 554

Steam Coming from................................Engine . 557, 561

Steering Wheel..............................Adjustments . 151

...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 154...................Stereo Sound System . 220....................Storing Your Vehicle . 516

......................................Sunshades . 177...............................Super Locking . 157

Supplemental Restraint................................System . 12, 27......................................Servicing . 32

.........................SRS Indicator . 30, 80...................System Components . 27

............System Message Indicator . 80System Warning Symbols,

.........Multi-Information Display . 96

Index

S

604

09/01/28 18:53:55 32SMG631_609

CONTINUED

.........................Ultrasonic Sensor . 321.....................Underside, Cleaning . 526

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 527

.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 523USB Adapter

..................Cable . 245, 254, 293, 302.USB Flash Memory Device . 251, 300

................................Vanity Mirror . 189.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 383

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 587....Vehicle Identification Number . 586

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)........................................System . 422

.............................Vehicle Storage . 516.............................Ventilation . 201, 203

.................................................VIN . 586...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 524

.........................Viscosity, Oil . 460, 462

.....................................Tachometer . 89..........................................Tailgate . 163

............................Open Monitor . 101......................................Opening . 163

Tail-lights, Changing Bulbs.........................................in . 489, 490

Taking Care of the...............................Unexpected . 527

...........................Tape Player . 260, 309Technical Descriptions

..........Catalytic Converter . 593, 594.......................Temperature Gauge . 89

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 219.....................Tether Anchor Points . 60

..........................Time, Setting the . 317..................Tools, Tyre Changing . 531

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 432

................Emergency Wrecker . 578Equipment and Accessories

.................Weight Limit . 432, 434Trailer Hitch Mounting

..........................................Points . 587.....................Trailer Loading . 432, 433

......................Trailer Towing Tips . 436Transmission

..................Fluid Selection . 469, 470......Identification Number . 584, 585.............Shifting the Automatic . 400

..................Shifting the Manual . 395.................Shifting the i-SHIFT . 407

.....................................Treadwear . 504

.......................................Trip Meter . 95..................................Turn Signals . 144...................................Tyre Chains . 509

........Tyre, How to Change a Flat . 530..............................................Tyres . 503

..............................Air Pressure . 503........................................Chains . 509

.........................Checking Wear . 504..........................Compact Spare . 528

......................................Inflation . 503..................................Inspection . 504

..............................Maintenance . 505...................................Replacing . 506

......................................Rotating . 505...........................................Snow . 508

....................Specifications . 507, 591.TRK (Temporary Repair Kit) . 537

Index

V

UT

605

09/01/28 18:54:00 32SMG631_610

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 67

Washer, Windscreen........Checking the Fluid Level . 467

...................................Operation . 140.........................................Washing . 520

.....................Water Draining . 111, 476..................Waxing and Polishing . 521

Wheels.............Adjusting the Steering . 151............Alignment and Balance . 505

.....Cleaning Aluminium Alloys . 521..........................Compact Spare . 528

...............................Nut Wrench . 533Windows

.............................Auto Reverse . 176.....................................Cleaning . 524

................Operating the Power . 175..........................Rear, Demister . 149

WindscreenAutomatic Intermittent

....................................Wipers . 141.............................Cleaning . 140, 524.....................................Washers . 140

.................................Winter Tyres . 508Wiper Blades

....................................Changing . 500...................................Operation . 140

......................................WMA . 234, 280...................................Worn Tyres . 504

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 578

Index

W

606

09/01/28 18:54:03 32SMG631_611

this owner’s manual should be considered a permanent · pdf filethis owner’s...

Documents